Home

High-performance Embedded Workshop V.4.03 User`s Manual

1. 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 5 If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then click the Match whole word only checkbox When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 6 If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case checkbox 7 If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions checkbox See Reference 4 Regular Expressions for further information 8 The Direction radio buttons allow you to select the direction of the search Selecting Down means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the bottom of the file Selecting Up means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the top of the file 9 Click the Find Next button to begin the search Click the Cancel button to stop the Find action 4 4 2 Finding text in multiple files To search for text in multiple files 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Find In Files dialog box e Click the Find In Files toolbar button GPa OR e Press the F4 key OR e Select the Edit gt Fin
2. H oooooo000 73FFFFEO long see aa f tf lone e This window allows the user to view and modify C C source level variables e The contents of this window are displayed only when the debugging information available in the absolute file abs includes the information on the C C source program The variable information is not displayed if the source program information is excluded from the debugging information during optimization by the compiler In addition the variables that are declared as macro cannot be displayed e A variable can be dragged from the editor window or disassembly window in source mode and dropped into the Watch window The following items are displayed Name Name of the variable Value Value and assigned location The assigned location is enclosed by Type Type of the variable The R mark shows that the value of the variable can be updated during user program execution When the color of the R mark is black a value is real time updated Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area 332 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Pop up menu options Toolbar button Macro Recording Function Auto Update es Marks the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real
3. cccccccccccscsccceeceeceeceecccecececeeececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 292 17 3 14 Changing the program display position immediately after downloading 292 17 3 15 Updating the window contents cccccccssessesssssessessesseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesesseseeesseeaaas 293 17 3 16 Disabling update of the window contents cccccsssssssesessessssssssssssssssssssessseeeeeas 293 2CENESAS Table Of Contents viii 17 3 17 Changing the data length 22 0 0 cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeess 293 17 3 18 Changing DE IN ee ac iets erie e E E anced oeraaenanes 293 17 3 19 CANS HS ENG Code cesare ae EE A EE E AE A EE 293 17 3 20 Seting the 2h 6 0 e ane Rene ee eo ne ee eee ee eee eee eee rere R Ariat 294 17 3 21 Changing the number of digits displayed nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnesessnesssserseesesereererrererens 294 1 8 Switching display or non display of measurement result ecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 294 17 3 23 SAVING AN area Of Memory ccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 295 17 3 24 Loading a memory area from a file ooo ccceseecceeeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeess 295 17 3 25 Splitting up the window display ccccccccccccccccccccececceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 296 17 3 26 Verifying a memory area sss c5esacesccasceesaanectosadinccasaansasaacsncdensaanecsasdthe ceareaesasastessbanwanaats 29
4. Cancel CI a Bi i x Overlay Group Hame Sections 4 Enter an overlay group name in Overlay Group Name In the tree of the left pane the new overlay group is added under the section group subsection group or section 1 This item cannot be used when the linkage editor does not support overlay 2 Will be supported by SuperH RISC engine family C C compiler package V 9 00 Release 04 and H8 H8S and H8SX family C C compiler package V 6 01 Release 02 or later 13 1 6 Editing a selected item In the edit mode you can also modify the address value and the name of a section group subsection group overlay group or section To modify the selected item 1 Select one of the following operations e Right click on an item in the left pane to open a pop up menu Select Edit Selected Item OR e Double click Modify a value or name by in place editing The Edit Selected Item dialog box appears Enter a string or integer value into an edit field Edit Selected Item Section Start Address ao000000 Cancel Section noun dame FS THardier E ran il x 13 1 7 Setting the primary section In the edit mode you can set a selected overlay group as the primary section To set the primary section 1 Right click on an overlay group in the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Change Primary Section In the tree of the left pane the selected overlay group is set as the primary section Th
5. Manual Peset ioi E opel SETTE nare SINT mode SINT fle E PowerQh_Reset void E read SINT fileno SBYTE but UINT court g shrkseet see E sori lone a E write SINT fileno SBYTE buf UINT count _ G Glasses gi named gt unnamed gy HEAP_TYPE Globals aa CLOSEALL Won za INTO oid g ob gg nfiles aa lpt 7 12 Navigation Facilities x DemosHd c eriv ine inpre are lowlyLore lewerce O C Defines H 0 G Functions B DJ G Glasses c Globals a CLOSEALLtWod a INIT OUBSnid Sg ob g _ntiles Sm chereet oud Sm cherput SBYTED a close SIMT ilera Sq timed ap beck SINT ilero SOWORD offset SINT base a cpen SBYTE name SINT mode SINT fle Ep read _ SINT tileno SOYTE but UINT count 2g sml but Eg erdel SINT fileno SBYTE buf UINT count E lowsreh E resetpree FG Detines IMT OFFSET E sR hi H 0 C Functions E PowerON Reset E Marval Aesetivoid H 0 G Classes E sbrke E sbrkh stacksoth typedefineh 2 vectine vectiblerc 2 vhandlerare eae LLY LL Lo CoH CO Navigation i Navigation Group By File OFF Group By File OW It is possible to disable scanning for certain navigation categories if you do not require the information To switch off a navigation category 1 If you right click anywhere inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Select the Select Categories menu item The Select Categories dialog box i
6. To register a single component i 2 Note Click the Register button on the Tools Administration dialog box Browse to the component s HRF file and click the OK button to register that component The HEW registration file is located in the root directory of a component s installation 105 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 5 4 Unregistering a component The components that are registered with the HEW affect the way it behaves For example every compatible system tool that is registered will be added to the Tools menu when a new project is created Sometimes this may not be desirable If this is not required open the Tools Administration dialog box select the undesired component from the Registered Components list and click the Unregister button A dialog box will be invoked which asks you to confirm this action Click Yes to unregister the component Note Unregistering a component does not remove its installation from the hard disk It simply removes the information that the HEW was storing about that component i e it disconnects it from the HEW The action can be easily reversed at any time by registering the tool manually see section 5 3 Registering a component If you want to remove a component from the hard disk 1 e uninstall a component then refer to section 5 6 Uninstalling a component 5 5 Viewing and editing component properties To view information regarding a component select it from the Re
7. Cancel Enter the new session name i Select the session file you wish to import into the new session Click OK A new session as added with the same settings as the file you browsed to but with the new name 3 Importing a link to a session You can add a new session to the HEW system but link to the session file in its location rather than importing or copying the file to the project directory This is useful when sharing debugger information with other users in a network environment To import a link to an existing session file l dE oe iy Choose the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Click the Add button The Add new session dialog box will be displayed Click the Use an existing session file radio button Enter a name for the session Browse to an existing session file location which you would like to import into the current project 267 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Click the Open and maintain link to session file checkbox This means the session will not be imported into the project directory but instead the HEW will link to the session location This file location was entered in step 5 and it will save all of the session data in this location Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box It is possible to make the link to session file read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to
8. Import System phase Custom phase 66 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features To change the order of phases system custom in a build or build all operation iF 2 Select the phase to be moved and then click the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the phase up and down respectively Click the OK button to set the new ordering To view the properties of a system phase l A 3 Select the system phase that you would like to view Click the Modify button The Modify Phase dialog box will be invoked The Command tab shows general information about the phase This may include copyright information enhancements bug fixes user notes and so on Select the Environment tab to view the environment settings of the phase Click the OK button to close the dialog box To modify a custom phase l 2 8 Select the custom phase that you would like to modify Click the Modify button The Modify Phase dialog box will be invoked with the Command tab selected Command Command excluding parameters C ATools MyT ool exe p Browse Initial directory s CONFIGDIR gt Shaws Input file group for multi hot phases only Absolute file 7 Don t check for input file s existence before executing Read output on the fly Change the contents of Command and Initial directory as appropriate If there are multiple shot phases select the file type to execute a pha
9. 3 Select the Display static member on the variable expansion in the Watch Locals checkbox By default this checkbox 1s not selected 4 A confirmation dialog box appears Select No Confirmation Request ki 1 Would you want to display the static member on this expansion T Don t ask this question again The static member variables are hidden even when structures are expanded and this will save time taken for display Even after you have selected No it is still possible to view the static member variables by adding them to the Watch window 330 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 1 Tooltip watch Use this function to know the value of a variable defined in the source program Open the editor window or disassembly window in source mode to view the source program and rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip pop up window will appear showing the watch information To use Tooltip watch 1 Select Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box is displayed 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Check the Enable tooltip watch check box 4 Click OK M Enable tooltip watch To view a tooltip watch on the editor window or disassembly window in source mode 1 Open the editor window or disassembly window in source mode showing the variable that you want to examine 2 Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip will appear near the variable
10. Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 2 Refer to the help files for the emulator or the simulator e Example of test procedures Invoke the test support facility and select the data in an array memory content at the address of an array as the target of the test Save test 1mage information to the test image file that you wish to use for comparison and modify the program so that the number of times to store data into the array will be reduced Execute the test and see that the data stored in the array has changed Then modify the program again to restore the number of times to store data and execute the test Make sure that data in the array is the same that in the saved test image file Step 1 Recording a macro Step 2 Editing a macro viewing records Step 3 Playing a macro Step 4 Creating a test suite Step 5 Editing a test suite Step 6 Creating a test image file Step 7 Modifying the program before the test Step 8 Viewing the test result unmatched Step 9 Modifying the program back and executing the test again Step 10 Viewing the test result matched 22 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 13 2 Step 1 Recording a macro In this example use the macro recording support facility to record the following combination of operations as HEW command line commands Recorded HEW command line commands are output to the Macro tab of the Output window However some operations open another tab 1 Click the
11. There is the browse button hell right next to the edit field where an address can be entered If you click this button the Select Label dialog box will be displayed A label can be selected from the current list of labels in this dialog box 369 2CENESAS 10 Using Labels to View Your Code Select Label aeo 10 st f eee Cancel __alocbut OOO05100 __calcripey OOO 24C _CLOSEALL DOOU24E 0 _ cmpegb4 0000 45E4 __ompgeb4 OOO045 rE _eompgtb tu DOOO459C __ompneb4 OUOO455 4 __ conve OOOU45D 4 __ convey OUOO45D 4 __convib4 OOOU45D8 __convub4 OUO045F 0 _chype DOD0BE28 dibd OOOUSDOF0 __divb4y DOOU46D4 dil 00004394 __divlu OOOU4 39 __ duchek OOOU5FEQ emna FOOOOSC0 __ficlose OOOU2 708 __flopen OOUU288C __flshbut 00004638 __frotout OOOU2A408 _ free goasa In this dialog box the labels are initially listed in alphabetical order and their addresses are displayed on the right If you click a column header of names or addresses the labels will be sorted by the label name or the address value 370 CENESAS 11 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View 11 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View The HEW 4 0 onwards has the capability to include a toolbar in a views client area This toolbar allows the views functionality to be accessed quickly from this integrated toolbar Various views in the HEW system have this functionality One example is the Difference view This is shown below Ditt
12. Display symbol Parameter Local Variable Diaplay Radix f Hexadecimal C Decimal C Octal C Binary Cancel Nest level Specifies the level of function call nesting to be displayed in the Stack Trace window Display symbol Specifies the symbol types to be displayed in addition to functions Display Radix Specifies the radix for displays in the Stack Trace window 17 16 Using an external debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu The Debugger tab of the Setup Customize dialog box is where the external debugger related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supported in the new environment Invoke it by selecting the Setup gt Customize menu option and then selecting the Debugger tab The first choice to make is which debug tool you would like to use Once this has been selected the external debugger must be configured Hitachi Debugger Interface Configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW version 4 x or greater Renesas PD debugger Configuring the PD debugger to integrate with HEW Other external debugger Configuring an external debugger to integrate with HEW Non selected Not use the external debugger Click the Launch External Debugger toolbar button 4 to invoke the debugger with the spe
13. For other functions dependent on the debugging platform see the user s manual or help information packaged with the emulator or simulator 17 18 1 Looking at labels In addition to the debugging information that the HEW uses to link your program s source code to the actual code in memory the debug object file also contains symbolic information This is a table of text names that represent an address in the program and are referred to as labels in HEW In the Disassembly view you will see the first eight characters of the label in place of the corresponding address and as part of an instruction s operand Note An instruction s operand is replaced with a label name if the operand and label value match If two or more labels have the same value then the label that comes first alphabetically will be displayed 1 Listing labels To see a list of all the labels defined in the current debugger session click the View Labels toolbar button Eh or select the View gt Symbol gt Labels menu option 323 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Configuration of Label window Label x tobe xX Ase bdo BS Column header g paa e Youcan view symbols sorted either alphabetically by ASCII code or by address value by clicking on the respective column heading e You can quickly toggle a software break at the entry point of a function by double clicking in the BP breakpoint column Alternatively right click to show the pop up menu a
14. Global symbol Local symbol 196 2CENESAS 13 Map Window options e Map list of the linkage editor left pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar button Function Print F Prints section tree view Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons e Symbol information of the linkage editor right pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar button Function Find Finds a symbol Find Next Finds the next symbol that matches the search text Filter Filters the symbol information View source Views the source code for the address in the selected line Un Oo g Eg Print Prints section list view 13 2 2 Printing out the map list You can also print out the map list in the left pane To print out the map list 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Print 3 The standard print formatting and selection dialog box is displayed From here you can choose your printer and pag
15. R1 B 10001101 pointer 2 increment_size amp H FFFF0O000 gt gt D 15 flag ER4 2 C C expressions Expression examples Object value Specifies direct reference of a member C C p_Object gt value Specifies indirect reference of a member C C Class value Specifies reference of a member with class C value Specifies a pointer C C amp value Specifies a reference C C array 0 Specifies an array C C Object value Specifies reference of a member with pointer C ig value Specifies reference of a global variable C C Class function short Specifies a member function C struct STR value Specifies a cast operation C C 3 Supporting duplicate labels 17 Using the Debugger In some languages for example in C overloaded functions a label may represent more than one address Just entering the label name is ambiguous so the HEW will display the Select Function dialog box to display overloaded functions and member functions 2CENESAS 327 17 Using the Debugger Select Function Ei Select Function Name Set Function Mame Sample changeflong t 2006 iSample S ample 2000 iSample sort larng It 2068 Counter All Furiction Select Function Set Function 3 Functions f Functions 0 Functions Select overloaded functions or member functions in the Select Function dialog box Generally only one function can be selected at one time except for
16. Start Address oooo2000 Bl End Address poooz Bl Cancel Filename Browse Both a start and end address should be supplied You also need to specify the full filename to save the information to If needed you can browse to the file to use Click OK 12 Printing the disassembly view The disassembly view can be printed by using the File gt Print menu or the Print toolbar button when it is in focus or by using the menu Print on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode or mixed mode pop up menu When Print is selected the Disassembly Print Range dialog box is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to print Disassembly Print Range Ei Ei Start Address i amp l End Address poma l Cancel Both a start and end address should be supplied Clicking OK on this dialog box then passes the print selection to the standard print formatting and selection dialog box From here you can choose your printer and page setup options 17 2 3 Looking at the current PC position To automatically display the program counter PC click the Display PC toolbar button Fs or select the Debug gt Display PC menu item This will open the editor or disassembly at the current PC 17 2 4 Highlighting the line at the PC In the Editor and Disassembly windows an icon in the S W Breakpoints column indicates the PC location The source or assembly language code at the PC can be highlighted To highlight the l
17. Start Address joonoo0 End Address O000F F Data i FEE search Data As byte W Search Equal Data Search Backward Cancel 290 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Enter a value you want to find in Data and select the data format in Search Data As Check Search Equal Data to find the exact value specified To change the search direction check Search Backward If pattern is selected as the Search Data As a byte string of up to 256 bytes can be searched for The end address can also be prefixed by a plus sign which will use the entered value as a range If the data could not be found the Memory window display remains unchanged and a message box informing that the data could not be found 1s displayed If Search Next is selected from the pop up menu in the state where data has been found the search will continue from the next address Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 3 10 Changing the display address Use the scroll bar Page Up Page Down key and Up Down key to change the display position To change the display address directly follow the procedure below 1 In place edit in the address display area A T T Ai oooo20 no00s0 Address display area 2 To change the display address open the Display Address dialog box by selecting one of the following operations e Double click the address display area you want to change OR e Choose the Address option from
18. When you are looking at your program in a Disassembly view you may want to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode or mixed mode and select the Set Address option The Set Address dialog box will be displayed Set Address Ed 281 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Enter the address or label name in the edit box and either click the OK button or press the Enter key The Disassembly view updates to show the code at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 9 Modifying assembly language code You can modify the assembly language code in the disassembly view in disassembly mode or mixed mode by double clicking on the instruction that you wish to change The Assembler dialog box will be displayed Assembler Address 00002408 01 5F Mnemonic E MOW L H l CS PC A Code The address machine code and disassembled instructions are shown Type the new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonic field Pressing Enter will assemble the instruction into memory and move on to the next instruction Clicking the OK button will assemble the instruction into memory and close the dialog
19. branches 1 1 1 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Initial revision revision 1 1 1 1 date 2006 02 28 02 46 30 author user state Exp lines 0 0 New Source Command s completed successfully 153 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 154 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 9 Using Visual SourceSafe The High performance Embedded Workshop provides specific support for the Visual SourceSafe version control system The Visual SourceSafe version control system associates a project in your workspace with a project inside a Visual SourceSafe database Select a menu option from the Tools gt Version Control submenu or click a Version Control toolbar button to quickly activate the commands most frequently used in the Visual SourceSafe version control system For installation and option settings of Visual SourceSafe refer to the online help or user s manual for Visual SourceSafe In this section it is assumed that the login username and password have been set The outline of procedures for version control by the HEW connected with Visual SourceSafe is described below For other functions available see section 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a workspace Associate a project in a HEW workspace with a project inside a Visual SourceSafe database e Select Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 as the version control system to be connected with t
20. 17 Using the Debugger 6 Unloading of modules It is possible to manually unload downloaded modules When a module is unloaded its symbols are erased from the HEW debugging system but the memory contents of the target remains unmodified After a module has been unloaded it cannot be debugged unless it is reloaded To unload modules Select one of the following operations e Select the module which you wish to unload from the Debug gt Unload Modules submenu OR e Right click on the module in the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Unload It is possible to select two or more modules To unload all modules Select Debug gt Unload Modules gt All Downloaded Modules Select the Debug gt Debug Settings menu item The Debug Settings dialog box will be invoked This will unload the modules from the target in the order specified in Download modules list on the Target tab 17 1 6 Debugger sessions The HEW allows you to store all of your builder options into a configuration This means that you can freeze all of the options and give them a name In a similar way HEW allows the user to store his debugger options in a session Later on you can select the session and all of the debugger options will be restored These sessions allow the user to specify target download modules and debug options This means that potentially each session can be targeted at a di
21. 3 Depending on the selection a dialog is displayed which shows the class structure selected in an expanded tree format 4 Click Close to close this dialog once you have the information you require 12 3 Jump to a definition from the editor It is possible to select navigation items of defines C functions or C classes from the source codes shown in the editor window and view the positions where these navigation items are defined Note however that these navigation items must be under the categories checked on the Navigation tab of the workspace window To jump to a definition 1 Right click on a navigation item which you wish to view where it is defined within the Source field of the Editor window 2 Select Go to Definition Of Navigation item from the pop up menu C Functions C Classes extern void INTHandlerFPRG void oid FowerOWN Reset void oid Manual Reset void gt fo To Definition OF tain J gt pesetpng c al Navigation 183 sQENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities 3 Iftwo or more navigation items are found the Select Navigation Item dialog box appears File names and line numbers are listed in the dialog box Double click an item or select an item and press the OK button Select Navigation Item EES Select the location of sort Filename chew workspace demosh4 demosh4 demosh c cohhew workspace demosh4 demosh4 demash c Cancel 12 4 Dr
22. 7 Click OK e Code Coverage Test image data to be saved into test image files Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Simulated I O window acquired with this setting No I O simulation range is specified by default Test result details Range Coverage range Instruction Execution Unmatched test option mismatch at Unmatched address Image Content of the test image file System Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Range DemoSH4 c Instruction Execution Time mismatch at Ox20E4 Image 1 System 0 To make detailed setting 1 Opens the Edit Test Coverage dialog box 233 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility Edit Test Coverage Ei Ei Available A anges Ranges to be tested Test Options je Address MW Execution Path Execution Times gt ca Lancel Pass 2 Available Ranges shows the coverage ranges that are currently available If you select coverage ranges in Available Ranges and click the gt gt button these coverage ranges then appear in Ranges to be tested 4 The Address checkbox among test options is always ON because addresses must be saved whenever coverage ranges are saved into test image files users cannot control this selection To set other test options Execution Path Execution Times and Pass select the checkboxes for these options The Execution Path checkbox is selected by default Other
23. 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Commands Projects General System menu optione and toolbar buttone Addio VES nn A User menu options Mare up Move dari The Commands tab has two lists of menu options e System defined menu options System menu options and toolbar buttons System menu options and toolbar buttons lists the menu options always shown as the Tools gt Version Control sub menus These menu options also have an associated toolbar button on the Version Control toolbar This contains the six menu options associated with the most frequently used version control commands e User defined menu options User menu options User menu options lists user defined menu options Menu options defined in this list will be added to the end of Tools gt Version Control sub menus If you wish to add menu options not included in the system menu options they must be defined in this list User defined menu options are not shown on the version control toolbar 8 1 1 System defined menu options There are six version control toolbar buttons They provide you with a shortcut to the most commonly used version control commands Initially when you first create a workspace these toolbar buttons are inactive because you have not yet associated any version control commands to them The toolbar buttons are equivalent to the six menu options on the Tools gt Version Control sub menu In other words selecting
24. Color Mode Displays the format of the image Pixel Displays color information of the cursor location Displayed in decimal Position Displays the cursor location in X and Y axis Displayed in decimal X Displays the X axis of the cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of the cursor location Buffer Size Displays the buffer size Displayed in decimal Width Displays the buffer width Height Displays the buffer height Image Size Displays the width and height of the display Displayed in decimal Width Displays the width Height Displays the height 17 5 Displaying memory contents as Waveforms Memory contents can be displayed as wave forms in the Waveform window 17 5 1 Opening the Waveform window Choose View gt Graphic gt Waveform or click the Waveform toolbar button E3 to open the Waveform Properties dialog box 300 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Waveform Properties Ei Data Address ooo0o000 al OK Data Size bit Cancel Channel Mono C Stereo Buffer Size H es 00000000 Specifies the waveform format The following items can be specified Data Address Specifies the start address of data in memory Displayed in hexadecimal Data Size Selects 8bit or 16bit Channel Specifies Mono or Stereo Buffer Size Hex Specifies the buffer size of data Displayed in hexadecimal After the settings have been made in the Waveform Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Wave
25. Comment lines are allowed and must start with a character 361 2CENESAS 6 I O File Format 362 Example Com ment fhe u es fue uke Cetin tion SHV O34 Fami WO Regester Detinitions File Modules BaseAdcdreass 0 Meodulel Power Down Mode Registers Modulet OMA_ Channel Carmen Modules OMA Oo Short Address Mode Meoduled2 Bus Controller Moduled3 System Meoduledd Interrupt Controller OMIA Channel Commer regt re gO MAW ER regl re gD MAT CR reg sre qo WAB CAHAN rega sre gD MAB CARLS AM re gd re gD WAB C AHA re g5 zre gD WAB CALF AMN depzreaMSsTPCRAH F 0 Fega OMAWERA iH DMANER mdt og B A A dmawer_bttields Regter name Address sire Absolute address thg Fermat Bitfieds Bites Cetin tien Idirewer bittelds boxy EA biti VVEOB bt2 VVE 14 bt3 VYE1B 2CENESAS 7 Symbol File Format 7 Symbol File Format In order for HEW to be able to understand and decode the symbol file correctly the file must be formatted as a Pentica B file 1 The file must be a plain ASCII text file 2 The file must start with the word BEGIN 3 Each symbol must be on a separate line with the value first in hexadecimal terminated by an H followed by a space then the symbol text 4 The file must end with the word END Example BEGIN 11FAH Symbol name 1 11FCH Symbol name 2 11FEH Symbol name 3 1200H Symbol name 4 END Note Support for t
26. Debug gt Build submenu the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window and the File gt Recently Download Module submenu The Format drop down list box contains a list of supported object format Note this does not have to match the default object format However you can only debug modules that match the format specified in the debug settings dialog default object format field The Filenames can be specified with placeholders or as an absolute setting It is recommended to use placeholders The Access size field specifies the access width when the memory is accessed The Download debug information only checkbox can be used when you wish to download the debugging information The Perform memory verify during download checkbox can be used to do additional checks when downloading the module to ensure it was correctly downloaded to the target device The Download automatically on target connection checkbox can be used to automatically download the module when the target is being connected When you click the OK button the debug download module is added to the bottom of the list For automatically downloading an existing module to the target when adding it to the Download module list see section 17 1 5 2 Downloading modules To change the setting of a download module l Select one of the following operations Open the Debug Settings dialog box and select a module for which you wish to modify the
27. Opens a dialog box which allows you to select the same short filename retrieved from the download module at a new location Properties Displays file properties Right clicking on the Dependencies folder opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Macro Recording Function Configure View Configures the workspace view Right clicking on a dependence file opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Macro Recording Function Version Control Executes a version control system Configure View Configures the workspace view Show Differences Compares files Properties Displays file properties For details on Current project Loaded project and Unloaded project see section 2 12 Setting the current project 2 3 Project files In order for the HEW to be able to build your application you must first tell it which files should be in the project and how each file should be built see the figure below Add Project Files Remowe Project Files Debug OH Optimize OF Liat File TES bet Corpiler Options Debug OF ee bet Asembler Options List File TES Assembler Source Files i i Set Linker Options a bhp File TES j 36 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics 2 3 1 Adding files to a project Before building an application select files to configure the application To add files to a project 1 Files can be added to the active project only Select one of the fo
28. Select one of the following operations Select a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Right click on the selected file to open a pop up menu Select Show Differences OR Click the Compare Files toolbar button Pld OR Select the View gt Differences menu Right click within the window to open a pop up menu Select Compare The Compare Files dialog box is displayed Compare Files Reference file Jorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 dbsct c Browse 5 ance f Compare with file on drive Target file Advanced Browse m Gompere with version control Ensure the Compare with file on drive radio button is enabled Enter the name of a file to be compared to in Reference file If you have opened the Compare Files dialog box via the workspace window at step 1 the file name 1s already entered in Reference file Select a previously used file from the drop down list box or click the Browse button to browse a file Clicking the Advanced button displays the Compare Files Advanced Options dialog box This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog box Compare Files Advanced Options Advanced gnore blanks Cancel Click Compare 175 2CENESAS 11 Comparing Files To perform a difference comparison with a local file and a file in Visual SourceSafe system iP ve The H
29. To add a new empty session l Moa 266 Choose the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Click the Add button The Add Session dialog box will be displayed Click the Add New Session radio button Enter a name for the session Click the OK button f Odd anew session Hame NewSession 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger You can import session data from another file and create a new session file in the project directory All information is an exact copy of the file the data was imported from To import an existing session into a new session file l ae E Choose the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Click the Add button The Add Session dialog box will be displayed Click the Add An Existing Session File radio button Enter a name for the session Browse to an existing session file location which you would like to import into the current project Click the OK button Use an existing session file Name Tutorial oegsion tile path Browse Upen and maintain link to session file Make session tile link read only This operation can also be achieved by using the File gt Import session To import an existing session using File gt Import Session 1 Choose the File gt Import Session menu option The Session Name dialog box is displayed Session Hame Ed Session name
30. if is placed after This is the regular expression override character If the character following the backslash is a regular expression character it is treated as a normal character The backslash 1s ignored if it is followed by a normal non regular expression character Example 1 Searches for every occurrence of an asterisk Example 2 Searches for every occurrence of a backslash 355 2CENESAS 4 Regular Expressions 356 2CENESAS 5 Placeholders 5 Placeholders This section describes how to use the placeholders a feature provided by several of the High performance Embedded Workshop components 5 1 What is a placeholder A placeholder is a special string inserted into text which 1s replaced at some subsequent time for the actual value For example one of the HEW placeholders is FULLFILE which represents a file with a full path Suppose that you have an editor in c myedit myeditor exe which can accept the file to be edited as a parameter When invoking the editor for example you may want to open the file FILE1 C from the directory c files the following shortcut could be made c myedit myeditor exe c files FILE1 C However what happens if you want to open any file through this editor The problem is that the command above is specific to c files filel c What we want to be able to do is to tell the HEW to use the editor specified but to open the file that we have chosen at that
31. means the offset value from the first address of the row e Code shows the code names e Register shows the name of the register allocated to the first address of the memory data displayed on this row e In place edit in the address display area data display area code display area Macro Recording e Double clicking the address display area label display area open a dialog which allow you to change the display start address e A dialog box which allows you to change the memory data at the clicked address by double clicking the data display area code data display area Macro Recording Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar Macro Function button Recording Set eh Set data at specified address Fill oy CI Fill specified memory block with data Move z i D Move specified memory block to Compare ea Comparing the contents of two memory blocks p paring r Test Testing an area of memory Save Memory contents Saving memory contents in a text file Search Finding a value in memory Search Next Finding a next value in memory Address e Specify display starting address HE i A Scroll Area Bi Specify scroll range Register XXXXX Starting addre
32. 13 Map Add Section Group Section Start Address fo Cancel Section Group Name Section Sections 4 Enter the start address of a section in Section Start Address O E f i x 5 Enter a section group name in Section Group Name If you specify section names separated by a comma each of them will be added as a section In the example above Section1 and Section are added as sections In the tree of the left pane the new section group is added under the address 13 1 4 Adding a section In the edit mode you can add a section under a section group subsection group or overlay group To add a section 1 Right click on a section group subsection group or overlay group to open a pop up menu 2 Select Add Section 3 The Add Section dialog box appears Add Section Section Hame Section Cancel 4 Enter a section name in Section Name CI a a i x In the tree of the left pane the new section is added under the section group subsection group or overlay group 13 1 5 Adding an overlay group In the edit mode you can add an overlay group 1 under a section group subsection group or section 72 To add an overlay group 1 Right click on a section group subsection group or section to open a pop up menu 2 Select Add Overlay Group 3 The Add Overlay Group dialog box appears 192 CENESAS 13 Map Add Overlay Group Section List Secor Sector et tori
33. 306 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 7 3 Switching Register Bank Immediately after opening the Register window the register data for the bank corresponding to the value of flag is displayed To reference the register data of Bank1 select Bank1 menu option with the Register window active The register specific to Bank is displayed in the gray background Example of M16C family debugger 1 BANK Register Window Name Value R aoo Ri aoga R aoo Ra OOOO AQ aoo Al aooi FE aoga USE aoo ISE aoga Pe OFOOOO 4 ret uj z ojej z ojc 0 OOOO0UOUOd To reference the register data of BankO select Bank0 menu option with the Register window active Through the operation of option BankO and Bank1 the value of flag does not change To switch the bank you can also use the pop up menu which is displayed by clicking the mouse right button on the register display area in the Register window or change the value of flag If you change the value of flag the register bank also changes in response to the value Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 7 4 Setting the layout To set the layout of the Register Window choose Layout menu from the register Window pop up menu The followings can be selected Radix Switch display or non display of radix FLAGs Switch display or non display of flags display area When the radix or flag is shown the option 1s checked 307 2CENESAS 17
34. Debugger settings External debugger location Pb Browse Command line options O Download module P Browsen sQENESAS 17 Using the Debugger To configure an external debugger to integrate with HEW 1 Firstly the location of the debugger executable must be specified This may have been configured by the installation program or a project generation utility 2 The second item of data are the command line options This field allows additional options to be specified which can modify the behavior of the external debugger 3 Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to the debugger when the download module changes after a build 17 17 Synchronizing multiple debugging platforms Multiple debugging platforms can be operated at the same time in the HEW There are two methods available to achieve this These are outlined below the external method was available in HEW 2 x The Internal synchronization of debugger targets is the new preferred method for multiple target debugging in HEW 3 1 17 17 1 External HEW synchronization Initiating a HEW from another HEW synchronizes multiple debugging platforms The HEW that initiates another HEW is called the master and the initiated HEW is called the slave Choose Tools gt Launch Slave HEW or click the Launch Slave HEW toolbar button WE to initiate a slave HEW The slave HEW has the same functionality as th
35. End Address O000F F Compare Address DataLeneth Ibyte Cancel Ss l Enter the start address of the destination memory area in the Compare Address field and the data length in the Data Length field If you did not drag the comparison source address range you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value If there is a mismatch the address where it was found is displayed in a message box When the contents of the two memory areas match at comparison the message Comparison successful appears Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 3 7 Testing an area of memory You can test an area of memory in the address space using the Memory Test feature Select an address range to test in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Test option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Test Memory dialog box is displayed Test ble mory Start Address poong End Addes o000F F A Cancel If you did not drag the address range to be tested you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 289 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Note The exact test is target dependent However in all cases the c
36. Menu Option Open Workspace Save Workspace Close Workspace New Session Import Session Save Session Refresh Session Download A New Module Recent Workspaces Recent Downloaded Modules Toggle Breakpoint Enable Disable Breakpoint Workspace Disassembly CPU Registers Memory IO Set Current Project Insert Project Edit Project Configuration 2 Build File Build Build All Build Multiple Clean Current Project Clean All Project Build Configurations Debug Sessions Reset CPU Go Reset Go Go to Cursor Set PC to Cursor Keyboard Shortcuts CTRL F9 ALT K CTRL D CTRL R CTRL M CTRL I CTRL F7 F7 F5 SHIFT F5 Toolbar Button Recordable HEW Command Line Commands OPEN WORKSPACE SAVE WORKSPACE CLOSE WORKSPACE CHANGE _ SESSION CHANGE _ SESSION SAVE SESSION REFRESH SESSION See Dialog boxes OPEN WORKSPACE FILE LOAD SET DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK SET SOURCE SOFT BREAK STATE DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK STATE SOURCE SOFT BREAK See Windows CHANGE PROJECT CHANGE PROJECT SAVE SESSION BUILD FILE BUILD BUILD ALL BUILD MULTIPLE CLEAN CLEAN CLEAN See Dialog boxes RESET GO GO RESET GO TILL REGISTER SET 1 211 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility Run Step In Step Over Step Out Step Step Mode Auto Assembly Source Halt Program Initialize Connect 2 Disconnect 2 F11 ra F10 H SHIFT F11 Save Memory Verify Memory 2 Down
37. Properties Cancel The New Project Workspace dialog box allows you to select a project type for generation which matches your CPU target Project Type Description Application Project for generating an execution program that includes the initial routine file written in the C C language Assembly Application Project for generating an execution program that includes the initial routine file written in the assembly language Demonstration Project for generating a demonstration program written in the C language SuperH RISC engine Standard Tool chain or H8S H8 300 Standard Tool chain C source startup Application Project for generating a startup program written in the C language M16C Standard Tool chain or M32C Standard Tool chain Empty Application Project for only setting the toolchain environment no generation file Import Makefile A project to create an executable program by importing an existing makefile Library Project for generating a library file no generation file Debugger only xxxxxx A debug only project no generation file In the example below the SH 4 simulator debugger is assumed For details on the functions available with the debugging platform in use refer to the user s manual or help of the debugging platform 240 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Hew Project 1 9 Select Target CPU_Toolchain version Toolchain version 0 20 Which CPU do you want to use for
38. REGISTER SET 1 REGISTER SET 1 REGISTER SET 1 MEMORY EDIT MEMORY EDIT MEMORY FILL MEMORY MOVE MEMORY COMPARE FILE SAVE FILE LOAD MEMORY EDIT MEMORY EDIT If you make any setting in a dialog box or change the selection on a toolbar as shown in the table below the command in HEW command line commands recorded into macros will be recorded into a macro file Dialog box Toolbar Download Module Build Multiple 1 B Build Configurations Step Program SimUebuig SH 3 Debug Sessions simBessionSH 3 x Function Handling Enter Offset Format Filename Access size and Perform memory verify during download option Click the Build button or the Build All button Click the Clean button Change the Current configuration drop down list Change the Current session drop down list Select the Step over calls checkbox Do not select the Step over calls checkbox 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform Recordable HEW Command Line Commands FILE LOAD BUILD MULTIPLE CLEAN CHANGE CONFIGURATION CHANGE SESSION STEP OVER STEP 15 5 2 Recordable functions dependent on the debugging platform Macros of the recordable HEW function dependent on the debugging platform which is included in tool packages are recorded into macro files as scripts when the operation shown in the table below is performed Support of this function depends on the debugging platform in use For details ref
39. Run Tests Test_Suite_Demo ki Ei Test cases Ok C Tes Demo Demonstration Cancel Bun Mave up Let Mare daw Action after test execution Compare sistem against sawed test image file M Automatically save test results Test timeouts fio F Stop at first failure 2 All tests currently defined in the HEW test system are listed in the Test cases list Clicking the check box selects the test for execution in this test run 4 Itis also possible to modify the order a test is executed in by selecting the test and clicking the Move up and Move down buttons 5 When one or more tests have been selected the Run button is enabled Clicking this Run button starts the test run Information will be shown in Test tab of the output window as the tests are executed 6 Once completed the test browser will be displayed and will show the test results for all tests executed The Action after test case execution drop down list allows you two options The Compare system against saved test image file is the normal operation and allows the current HEW system to be compared with the test image file HIF file that was attached to the relevant test case These results will then be added to the test browser and will give pass fail and failure details information to you The Refresh test image file option simply runs all of the test cases and updates the test image file HIF file with the system image af
40. Runs tests allows you to run multiple tests that you have defined in the test suite and see the results of the comparisons in the test browser There are various options to configure the test run execution Test Result Browser Displays the test results for one or more test executions It shows the pass and fail results and the detailed reason why the test failed 1 10 List of Window Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Toolbar Function Shortcuts Button Window Cascade Arrange all open windows so that they overlap Tile Horizontally Arrange all open windows horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange all open windows vertically Arrange Icons Line up all minimized windows Close All Close all open windows Virtual desktop Desktop Manager Rename your configuration to a more meaningful name Default 1 4 Switch desktop configurations 1 11 List of Help Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Toolbar Function Shortcuts Button Help Help Topic Opens the main High performance Embedded Workshop help window Technical Create Bug Report Create a High performance Embedded Workshop bug report Support Check Website For Check for High performance Embedded Workshop product Updates updates or service packs About High performance Launches the About High performance Embedded Workshop Embedded Workshop dialog box allowing the user to view the version of High performance Embedded Workshop Debugger Help Shows the help window o
41. This column is not available if no module has been downloaded e Double clicking the Disassembly field opens the Assembler dialog box Enter assembly language codes Option Right clicking within the Disassembly field opens a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Macro Function Recording Open File in Source Mode Opens a file shown in the disassembly window Refresh Acquires the latest disassembly information to update the contents of the window Lock Refresh It is possible to lock a memory range in the disassembly so that it does not refresh View Source Launches editor at location in source Set Address Enters a new start address Go To Cursor a Commences to execute the user program starting from the current PC address The program will continue to run until the PC reaches the address indicated by the text cursor not the mouse cursor or another break condition is satisfied Display PC Displays the disassembled codes at the PC location 280 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Set PC Here CI Changes the value of the PC to the address indicated by the text cursor not the mouse cursor Edit Modifies the instruction at that address Find in Range Searches the range for the specified text string Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Define Column Format Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Turn Header On Off Shows or hides the co
42. address object codes labels and mixed codes for showing both source and disassembly to be viewed Disassembly mode The disassembly mode shows the true continuous disassembly code in address order This is the same as clicking the View gt Disassembly menu item This view is only available when a target is attached to the session This view allows breakpoints address object codes labels and disassembled codes to be viewed Note It is not possible to switch from the source view to the mixed display under the following conditions 1 The target is not connected to the current session 2 No download modules have been downloaded 3 No debug information is available for the current project 4 The currently displayed file has been edited and the changes not saved If an address included in the address range of a source file 1s then shifted to be in the range of another source file in View Disassembly mode selecting View Source mode or View mixed mode displays the Confirmation Request dialog box shown below To open the new source file for the address click Yes To view the source code in the previous mode click No If you do not wish to select View Source mode or View mixed mode click Cancel 271 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Confirmation Request Ei 1 Your current disassembly address does not correspond to the orginal file ss Do you wish to open the file which corresponds to the curent disassembly address T Don
43. follows e To select several files Click the files while pressing the CTRL key e Select several files as a range Click a file as the start of the range Then keep pressing the SHIFT key and click another file as the end of the selected range 2 Take either of the two ways listed below The red cross will be removed from the file s icon 4 and the file will be included in build 40 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics e Select Include Build lt file gt where lt file gt is the name of the selected file from the pop up menu opened by clicking the right mouse button lt file gt is not displayed if several files are selected e Select Build gt Include Exclude Build menu option 2 4 User folders in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop it is possible to add folders to the Projects tab of the workspace window This allows you to logically group your files into certain areas within a project The folder can be set to any name and this is entered in a dialog box The operations listed below are not allowed however for folders Download modules and Dependencies that are automatically displayed To add a user folder 1 Select the project on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click and select Add Folder 3 Enter the name in Folder of the Add Folder dialog box 4 Click OK 5 You can now drag and drop files into this folder to group them logically To add a sub folder 1 Select the folder
44. menu option will become available See Chapter 8 Using the Custom Version Control System e Once Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 is selected as a version control system other menu options of the Version Control gt Select menu option will become available See Chapter 9 Using Visual SourceSafe To deselect a version control system 1 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Select menu option The Select Version Control System dialog box will be displayed 2 Select lt None gt from the Version control systems list 3 Click the OK button 7 2 Importing and exporting a set up Each workspace can have a different version control setup The HEW allows you to store the version control settings independently so that you can import them into other workspaces This greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to configure the same version control settings across several workspaces To export a version control setup 1 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed 2 Click the Export button An Export current Version Control configuration dialog box will be displayed 3 Browse to the directory in which you would like to save the configuration 4 Enter the name of the file and then click the Save button To import a version control setup 1 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box
45. 17 cvs exe diff FILENAME C src sampleCVS C evs 1 11 17 cvs exe commit m modify FILENAME C src sampleCVS C evs 1 11 17 cvs exe log FILENAME C src sampleCVS Preparation for version control is now completed 4 Step 4 Using the Version Control facility Create a Repository 1 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Initialize menu 2 Select the file in the Initialize dialog box and click the OK button Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe init Command s completed successfully 5 Step 5 Using the Version Control facility Register a Module 1 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Register menu 2 Select the file in the Register dialog box and click the OK button Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe import m New Source sampleCVS Renesas rel 20060228 N sampleCVS dbsct c Omit No conflicts created by this import Command s completed successfully 6 Step 6 Using the Version Control facility Check out 1 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Checkout menu 2 Select the file in the Checkout dialog box and click the OK button 3 The Version Control tab of the output window shows the following message 150 Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe checkout sampleCVS U sampleCVS dbsct c 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Omit cvs exe checkout Updating sampleCVS Command s completed successfully 7 Step 7 Using the Version Control facility Mod
46. 2 MC Compares memory contents MEMORY DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents MEMORY EDIT ME Modifies memory contents MEMORY FILL MF Fills a block of memory MEMORY FIND 2 MI Finds a string in an area of memory MEMORY MOVE MV Moves a block of memory MEMORY TEST 2 MT Tests a block of memory OPEN TEST SUITE OTS Opens a test suite OPEN WORKSPACE OW Opens the specified workspace file QUIT QU Exits HEW RADIX RA Sets default input radix REFRESH SESSION RSE Reloads the session file REMOVE FILE REM Removes a file from the current project RESET RE Resets the microprocessor RUN TEST RT Runs a test SAVE SESSION SE Saves the current session SAVE WORKSPACE SW Saves the current workspace SET DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK SDB Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the disassembly level SET SOURCE SOFT BREAK SSB Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the source level SLEEP Delays command execution STATE DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK TDB Enables or disables a software breakpoint at the disassembly level STATE SOURCE SOFT BREAK TSB Enables or disables a software breakpoint at the source level STEP ST Steps through program by instructions or source lines STEP MODE SM Sets the step mode STEP_OUT SP Steps out of the current function 351 2CENESAS 3 List of Commands STEP OVER SO Steps through program without stepping into functions STEP RATE SR Sets rate of stepping SUBMIT SU Executes a file of commands TCL Turns TCL commands on or off
47. 367 2CENESAS 9 Drag and Drop in the HEW Debugger 368 2CENESAS 10 Using Labels to View Your Code 10 Using Labels to View Your Code Labels are a useful way of navigating through your debug module It is possible to use labels in any edit field that allows addresses If you enter a label in such a field then the built in evaluator will check the label and then convert it to an address This allows you to enter evaluations such as _main 100 or MyFunction 100 This means that any times that labels are used the addresses which will be evaluated are not fixed This is especially useful if you are using a command line batch file to set a number of breakpoints The command line batch file might always need to set a breakpoint on a certain function and this can be achieved by using a label Using the label allows the code to change without affecting the batch file contents HEW V 3 1 onwards also supports a number of easy ways to use label completion Display Address Ei Address f main al mar _ sor QOOU0000 FFFFFFFF Ok The dialog box above also shows an example of a label pick list This store the last twenty entries made into address fields throughout the entire HEW application This means if you are entering a label multiple times it should be much faster and efficient if you use this recently used address field list This control is available for all instances of the address edit field where the input is evaluated
48. 6 4 Using the workspace and project log facilities ccceceessssessseeeseessessssssssssssssssssssseseeaeas 117 6 5 Configuring the help Systemi ssscsmsciesicasasesdacynaniagienniensawaniusissdindoeedweadaesanendsanepeatsancausdeaudeeaceaseueedes 118 6 6 Keyboard shortcut customization cccccccccessseeesssesesessseesessseeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeegs 119 6 7 SCOPE of a control in the SCLUID siciscacsciessscssadansdenesasxcsdedencdcdedvebecsuedevadadsesseesuadsvatsuaeensianidereoees 120 6 7 1 Scope of a control in the Customize dialog DOX c cc cccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 6 7 2 Scope of a control in the Options dialog DOX cc cccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121 6 8 Specifying workspace options ssssssseseesessssessesssseesssssssesssssssssncececenscecesensnesesens 12 6 8 1 Open last Workspace at Start Up 0 cccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121 6 8 2 Restore files on opening a workspace oooooooseooeeeesnensossesssssssssssssserenenenseeeeereereeenne 121 6 8 3 Display workspace information on opening a workspace ssssesoononeneseesseenesseeenee 122 6 8 4 Save workspace before executing any phases cccccccccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 6 8 5 Prompt before saving a workspace 2 0 0 0 cee eeeeccceeeeeecccceccceeceecececcececeeecceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 6 8 6 Prompt
49. Build Debug Setup Tools Test Window Help Toolbars e D S il GG ES ie El Tutorial al G Tutorial a ese source file typedefine hb Workspace e a on Intprg s1c i stackact h window o 2 vecttbl src o vhandler src define R_Init 0x000000FO Editar ela E source file define INT OFFSET Ox1lOOUL window Other component window e g pham Command line LLEN poia Debug A Adn Fils A Macro AT h Version Contra pes Default desktop Read write 20 98 E Status bar Feady 1 2 1 Title bar The title bar displays the name of current activate project and file It also contains the standard Minimize Maximize and Close buttons Click the Minimize button to minimize the HEW on the Windows task bar Click the Maximize button to force HEW to fill the screen Click the Close button to close the HEW this has the same effect as selecting the File gt Exit menu option or pressing ALT F4 1 2 2 Menu bar The menu bar initially contains eleven menus File Edit View Project Build Debug Setup Tools Test Window and Help All of the menu options are grouped logically under these headings For instance if you want to open a file then the File menu is where you will find the right menu option if you want to set up a tool then the Tools menu is the correct selection File Edit View Project Build Debug Setup Jools Test Window Help If you use a debug only project Debugger only xxxxxx cr
50. By default any dependent files found in standard include paths will not be shown as in figure j below For example in C code if you write a include statement such as include lt stdio h gt stdio h will not be listed as a dependent file To view such system include files select the Show standard library includes checkbox as in figure jj below 56 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics fl J E Dependencies be libh builtin lowerch machineh math h sbrk h smachineh stackecth stddeth stdioh stdlibh strineh umachineh vecth J Dependencies Z lowerch E sbrkh 2 stackecth vecth Show File Paths By default any files will not be shown with their full path as in figure k below If the Show file paths checkbox is selected all of the files in the Projects tab of the Workspace window are shown with their full path i e from a drive letter as in figure kk below kk When Sort files in time order option is selected the workspace window is then sorted into file time stamp order The newest files are located at the top of list with the older files towards the bottom If files are updated after selecting this option manually update the order of these files To manually update the file o
51. Command has failed if the return code is Not Equal To 0 6 Enter C RCS CI EXE in Version control executable 7 Enter 1 FILENAME in Arguments 8 Enter PROJDIR in Initial directory 9 Click the OK button 10 Click the OK button in the Add Menu Option dialog box Tip It is recommended that you only register some commands frequently used for version control Other commands should be used via the MS DOS command prompt Also set up the following tree commands in the same way Command Option Name Characters to be Input Check out Version control executable C RCS CO EXE Argument f FILENAME Initial directory PROJDIR Diff Version control executable C RCS RCSDIFF EXE Argument FILENAME Initial directory PROJDIR Log Version control executable C RCS RLOG EXE Argument FILENAME Initial directory PROJDIR Preparation for version control is now completed 4 Step 4 Using the Version Control facility Check in 1 Enter a keyword at line 12 in the file rcs_sample c so that you will be able to see the changes made in the file 1d 2 Select the file rcs _sample c in the Projects tab of the workspace window and then select Tools gt Version Control gt Check in The MS DOS command prompt window opens 4 Enter a comment for check in after the prompt gt gt and press Enter Enter one period and press Enter 145 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System rcs_
52. Delete All Add PC Breakpoint Break Access Break Data Break Register Break Sequence Break Cycle Edit PC Breakpoint Break Access Break Data Break Register Break Sequence Break Cycle Enable Disable Delete Delete All 2CENESAS Recordable HEW Command Line Commands SIMULATEDIO_ CLEAR COVERAGE COVERAGE COVERAGE RANGE COVERAGE RANGE COVERAGE COVERAGE COVERAGE SAVE COVERAGE LOAD TRACE ACQUISITION BREAKPOINT BREAK ACCESS BREAK DATA BREAK REGISTER BREAK SEQUENCE BREAK CYCLE BREAK CLEAR BREAKPOINT BREAK CLEAR BREAK ACCESS BREAK CLEAR BREAK DATA BREAK CLEAR BREAK REGISTER BREAK CLEAR BREAK SEQUENCE BREAK CLEAR BREAK CYCLE BREAK ENABLE BREAK ENABLE BREAK CLEAR BREAK CLEAR BREAKPOINT BREAK ACCESS BREAK DATA BREAK REGISTER BREAK SEQUENCE BREAK CYCLE BREAK CLEAR BREAKPOINT BREAK CLEAR BREAK ACCESS BREAK CLEAR BREAK DATA BREAK CLEAR BREAK REGISTER BREAK CLEAR BREAK SEQUENCE BREAK CLEAR BREAK CYCLE BREAK ENABLE BREAK ENABLE BREAK CLEAR BREAK CLEAR 215 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility 15 6 Playing a macro There are a number of ways to play a macro file in the HEW these options are discussed below To play a macro from the toolbar or menu 1 Click the Play Macro button or menu item on the Macros toolbar or the Tools menu 2 Ifthere is only one macro defined it is automatically played If multiple macro functions exist in the current default mac
53. E F ASCII 00 OO OO Of OO OO OO 00 00 00 00 00 OO Cee 00 OO OO OO 00 OO OO 00 00 A OO OO OO Cee 00 OO OO OO OO O0 Oo OO Oo OO Oo 0A Cee 00 OO OO OO 00 OO OO OO 00 00O 00 60 00 00 OO CNL Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 294 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 3 23 Saving an area of memory You can save an area of memory in the address space to a disk file using the Save Memory feature Select an address range to save in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Save option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Save Memory As dialog box 1s displayed This operation can also be achieved by selecting Debug gt Save Memory save Memory As ea SIAN er an aa econ etm ET 3 Cancel File name tart address fooooo0o0 End address OO0000FF Access SIZE li If you did not drag the address range to be saved you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus sign which will use the entered value as a range Enter the file format in Format file name in File name and access size in Access size The File name drop down list contains the last four filenames used for saving memory Alternatively click the Browse button to launch a standard Save As dialog box The access size for saving data can be selected from the Access size drop down list When the data is saved in memory with little endian the order
54. EE EEE EH 78 tee TIN TE VE cas A A A cere atures I cae starr ae ocala PN acess T A E EE A 81 4 1 FGITOE WANGOW esie E T E saan doaderamaduatineantcdsmectseaaasaracuaneaateetncesces 81 4 2 Working with multiple files ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 82 4 3 Standard file OMe tA OMS sorsana e eet 82 4 3 1 RTE MTA TANS Yi T T E EE S T A T T T E N 82 4 3 2 Editine w 6 gt denen eae rene E Eeee eee eee eee 83 4 3 3 BV Ne AN spaces pa ses cnn soins P E A E P so ea soe S TE E 83 4 3 4 Oena d E lt cee nea a T er nee ee ene ee ee 84 4 3 5 VG SH ES cscs c ste tsetse asc ceri occ cs cae nc ene acne cou EE E 85 4 4 Searching and navigating through files 0 ccccccccceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 86 4 4 1 PHN OE XU A O nace AN A E A O TA A TTA OTTA 86 4 4 2 Finding text in multiple files cccccceceeeseesesssssssssesssessssssessssesssssassssassssaessesaagags 86 4 4 3 TR FA Seagrove sper E E E 87 4 4 4 JUMPING to aspecified Hne aseene E E a EE ead EE 88 4 5 Bookmark Seesen EE EEEE EEEE 89 dae Pro a praa E E E A Te 90 4 7 OMEN TORT VA OU essrsro erisa er E EA EANA ETEA EOE ananeedpaadanedaeeemaaiese 90 4 7 1 Paro SC Ui e E E E aia 90 4 7 2 CUMIN I OS ssenari aasin N DE EEE ESE ONN SDE ENEN EE AEE ODE 9 4 7 3 PN adeno sosoran n r E E E T E 92 4 8 Splitting a WNdOW sc sercsaracaeseageeaaaasaeseossousucouteneuets E E e ee ae E E Rehia 92 4 9 Chaneine the edito
55. Embedded Workshop AN Save changes to CNHE WS Workspace DemoSH4 DemoSh4 ebrk c e Clicking No closes the file without saving e Clicking Cancel returns to the editor window e Clicking Yes closes the file by overwriting the contents If the file has the read only attribute a confirmation dialog box appears asking if you wish to save the file as another name High performance Embedded Workshop AN CNHE Workspaces emoSH4 DemoSH4 sbrk c This file is read only Do wou want to save it as another filename No verwrite Cancel e Clicking Yes opens the Save file dialog box Change the file name before saving e Clicking No closes the file without saving 85 CENESAS 4 Using the Editor e Clicking Overwrite closes the file by overwriting the contents e Clicking Cancel returns to the editor window 4 4 Searching and navigating through files 4 4 1 Finding text To search for text in the current file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to search is the active window 2 Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search 3 Select one of the following operations to display the Find dialog box e Click the Find toolbar button a OR e Press the CTRL F key OR e Select the Edit gt Find menu option OR e Select the Find from the pop up menu in the Editor window Find Find what T Match whole word only rect Cancel Match case Regular expression
56. Enter Test_Suite Demo in Test suite name Initially the workspace directory is shown in Directory for test suite This can be modified as required Click the OK button Displays the Test tab of the workspace window Shows the Test Suite Demo test suite icon i Test Sute Demo TA Projects E Templates al Mawigation 1 13 6 Step 5 Editing a test suite Select the macro recorded at step 1 for running a test 26 l A p o a Right click on the Test Suite Demo test suite icon to display a pop up menu Select Edit Test Suite to open the Modify Test Suite dialog box Click the Add button The Add New Test dialog box opens Enter Test Demo in Test name Enter Demonstration in Test description Click the Add button The Add Test Script dialog box opens Select the Demo checkbox in Select macros to add to test Click the OK button CENESAS 1 Overview Add Test Script 8 Test Image file shows the test suite name entered at step 4 and test name Test Demo entered in Name test suite name_test name Add New Test BE Teabe SSS Demonstration Default eT Toye VG Dor Gp we Lap re a VST SRS Do DISTT CAH EW Workspaces DemoSH4 Teast Suite Dero Test Derno hit gt 9 Click the OK button The test Test Demo is added to the Test cases list Test Demo Demonstration leilig Remove 27 CENESAS 1 Overview 10 Click the OK bu
57. Function Recording Open Source File For Editing Opens a editor window containing the file for editing Open File in Source Mode Opens a file shown in the disassembly window Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Find Finds text in the current file Goto Line Jumps to a line in a file Toggle Breakpoint eo Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enable Disable Breakpoint eo Enables or disables the current software breakpoint Turn Header On Off Shows or hides the column header Define Column Format Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Columns Column name Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Instant Watch 1 Launches the Instant Watch dialog box with the name extracted from the view at the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Go To Cursor CI Starts executing the user program at the current PC and continues until the PC equals the address indicated by the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Set PC Here ce Changes the value of the PC to the address at the row of the text cursor not mouse cursor Display PC Opens the source file or disassembly at the address of the PC Properties Displays file properties 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 2 Opening a source file for editing The Disassembly source mode allows only to view and debug source files and no editing is permitt
58. IO window based on information it finds in an I O Register definition file When you select a debugging platform HEW will look for a lt device gt IO file corresponding to the selected device and load it 1f it exists This file is a formatted text file that describes the I O modules and the address and size of their registers You can edit this file with a text editor to add support for memory mapped registers or peripherals you may have specific to your application e g registers in an ASIC device mapped into the microcomputer s address space File format Each module name must be defined in the Modules definition section and the numbering of each module must be sequential Each module corresponds to a register definition section and within the section each entry defines an I O register The BaseAddress definition is for devices where the location of I O registers moves in the address space depending on the CPU mode In this case the BaseAddress value is the base address of the I O registers in one specific mode and the addresses used in the register definitions are the address locations of the registers in the same mode When the I O register file is actually used the BaseAddress value is subtracted from the defined register address and the resultant offset added to the relevant base address for the selected mode Each module has a section that defines the registers forming it along with an optional dependency the dependency is checked
59. If there are any syntax errors in the make file being executed or if any process executed whilst running the make file returns an invalid error code then hmake will exit with code 1 Otherwise hmake will exit with code 0 See below for file syntax and how to specify exit code conditions Parameters The following table shows the available parameters and their function Parameter Function A Execute all commands regardless of input output file status Equivalent to a Build All N Use status of input output files to calculate what commands need to be executed as normal and then display the commands but do not execute them I Displays help info 13 2 File syntax There are four basic types of statement used in a hmake file the variable declaration the description block the comment and the message command These can be combined in any order to produce a hmake file but a variable must be declared in a variable declaration before it is used in a description block or other variable declaration The first all statement used in nmake files is not required in a hmake file Commands are executed in order as they appear in the make file Note the character is used to show were a tab character must be used in order to keep the make file syntactically correct Variable declarations A variable declaration declares a variable which can then be used in any statement throughout the rest of the hmake file A declaration has the followi
60. Image Ei Ed Available components Ok oo JEE 5 tack T race 5Sim5 essio nsH 43 Buen J Trace SimSessionSH 4 OEI cru be De O SimSessionSH 4 oO el Memory SimSessionSH 4 Check All Ea Reaister SimSessionSH 4 OE Simulated 1 0 SimS essionSH 4 ee Oe Status SimSessionSH 4 S S ER OO Output s E Build Output window Import Cancel EEE Dee Symbol bee g s Locals SimSessionSH 4 ve Cee watch SimSessionSH 4 HEW is not capable of saving all HEW functions as test image data For details on the functions that can be saved into test image files see the topics below These topics also include information about failed test items FAIL shown after test or at comparison of test image files e Functions that can be saved into test image files common to all HEW products e Functions that can be saved into test image files dependent on the debugging platform In some cases it is necessary to make detailed setting specific to each of the test items before saving test image data If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens When a test item has any detailed setting it is possible to customize test image data of this test item before saving On the other hand when a test item does not allow detailed setting and the checkbox for this test item is selected all test 1mage data of this item will be saved into the file A save file icon ted in the Saving
61. Input n loop 151 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 49a53 54 gt loop Command s completed successfully You can see the changes made in the file sampleCVS c 10 Step 10 Using the Version Control facility Register the Result Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Commit menu Select the file in the Commit dialog box and click the OK button The Version Control tab of the output window shows the following message Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe commit m modify sampleCVS c Checking in sampleCVS c C evs 1 11 17 DATABASE sampleCVS sampleCVS c v lt sampleCVS c new revision 1 2 previous revision 1 1 done Command s completed successfully 11 Step 11 Using the Version Control facility View Logs 152 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Log menu Select the file in the Log dialog box and click the OK button The Version Control tab of the output window shows the following message Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe log sampleCVS c RCS file C cvs 1 11 17 DATABASE sampleCVS sampleCVS c v Working file sampleCVS c head 1 2 branch locks strict access list symbolic names rel 20060228 1 1 1 1 Renesas 1 1 1 keyword substitution kv total revisions 3 selected revisions 3 description revision 1 2 date 2006 02 28 03 39 22 author user state Exp lines 6 1 modify revision 1 1 date 2006 02 28 02 46 30 author user state Exp
62. K roooos7co INT MASE OODOD0DS4 ODOOO0000 None Global INTTEL wvect INT Ve 00000Db84 popat None Global INTTEL wect oda 00006544 TBL Reset 00000184 00000000 None Global IntPRG intp T da 00006834C _FPower 00001000 00001049 OOO0004A Entry Global PRe rese a dt OOO06BS5 Manual 00001044 OOO0106F OOOO00Z6 Fu Global PRe rese poza OOOOZOE OOOOODES Fu Global F i om 70000000 main 4 oii Symbol Hame eae Address ae Address TR Attribute ema 7 Symbol Size Scope Attribute Demo F Toolbar File Name The map list of the linkage editor The symbol information of the linkage editor e The left pane shows the map list of the linkage editor Nothing is displayed in this pane if there is no linkage list file map output by the linkage editor Selecting the root of the map list Linker map list shows all symbol information in the right pane Selecting a section in the map list only shows symbol information of the selected section in the right pane e The right pane shows the symbol information of the linkage editor Clicking the column header sorts the listed items When the window 1s first opened the items are sorted by the value of Start Address The Attribute column shows the symbol attribute Entry Entry function Function Function name Data Variable name None Undefined label or assembly symbol The Scope column shows the scope attribute Global Local
63. Macro User detined Record Macro Stop Macro Default gt mol1 2 D 15 2 Using the Macro dialog box The Macro dialog box allows you to access and manager the macro files currently in use in the HEW system The Macro dialog box is shown below Curent macro file Deft O0 i Macro functions Import Record flay Edit Assam emare M Show all available macro functions Initial directory S FILEDIR l Browse 208 2CENESAS 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility The Current macro file drop down list holds all of the macro files currently in use in the HEW system These files are stored in the HEW installation directory in the Macro folder Any files that are copied into this directory are automatically added to the Current macro file drop down list The macros functions in the Current macro file selection are shown in the Macro functions list box Changing the Current macro file selection will automatically update this list If you check the Show all available macro functions check box then all macros currently defined are displayed in the list When selected this option ignores the value of the Current macro file drop down list box It can be useful to use multiple macro files to logically hold related areas For example you might like to create a different macro file for use with different debugger targets To execute macro files that have relative paths specify the initial di
64. Modified category Change the selection in the Foreground list of the Color tab Click OK ye oS 17 8 Resetting the target MCU To reset the target MCU click the Reset CPU toolbar button Et or select the Debug gt Reset CPU menu option 310 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Resetting the target MCU initializes the on chip I O registers and makes the program counter jump to the address set in the reset vector 17 9 Setting PC to the address at cursor To changes the value of the PC to the address at the row of the text cursor click the Set PC to cursor toolbar button s or select the Debug gt Set PC to Cursor menu option 17 10 Initializing the debugging platform Select the Debug gt Initialize menu option It will close down any open child windows and shut down the link to the debugging platform If this is successful an attempt to re establish the link to the debugging platform will be made 17 11 Connecting disconnecting the debugging platform To connect the debugging platform Select one of the following operations an e Click the Connect toolbar button OR e Select the Debug gt Connect menu option To disconnect the debugging platform Select one of the following operations e Click the Disconnect toolbar button OR e Select the Debug gt Disconnect menu option Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 12 Executing your program This section des
65. Next gt Finish Cancel 2 Specify the options common to all project files in Step 2 The specifiable items depend on the CPU selected in Step 1 To move to Step 3 click the Next gt button in Step 2 Hew Propect 3 9 Setting the Contents of Files to be Generated What kind of initialization routine would you like to create Humbe of Mil Stearns ell M Use Heap Memory Heap Size H 400 Generate maint Function a E source file M 1 0 Register Definition Files Generate Hardware Setup Function z Back Next gt Finish Cancel 242 sQENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 3 Specify the generation file in Step 3 Use I O Library Use Heap Memory I O Register Definition Files Note Checking enables use of standard I O libraries Number of I O Streams Specifies the number of I O streams that can be used simultaneously Checking enables use of the heap area management function sbrk Heap Size Specifies the unit of the size of the heap area to be managed Generate main Function Selects generation of a model main function Generates a main function file Project name c cpp Checking generates an I O register definition file jodefine h written in the C language Generate Hardware Setup Selects generation of a model I O Function register initial setting program Generates a hardware setting file hwsetup c cpp or hwsetup src To include a main function that has already
66. Open last workspace at start up checkbox if you would like the HEW to automatically open the last workspace when it is launched 4 Click the OK button W Open last workspace at start up 6 8 2 Restore files on opening a workspace When you close a workspace the HEW stores the names of the files that were open at that time When you open a workspace the HEW can restore i e open the same files so that you can continue your session in exactly the same state as when you left it If you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when the workspace is opened then set this checkbox To restore files on opening a workspace 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Restore files on opening workspace checkbox if you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when the workspace is opened 4 Click the OK button W Restore files on opening workspace 121 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 8 3 Display workspace information on opening a workspace When many workspaces are being used it is sometimes difficult to remember exactly what is contained within each workspace The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to enter a textual description of each workspace This description can be displayed whenever a workspace is opened To enter a workspace description 1 Select the workspace icon from the Pr
67. Opens the Edit Test IO registers dialog box Edit Test IO registers Compared IO registers Name Addess ooo o o C PTEH C PTEL CI TTE O TEA C MMUCA C ccR O TRA FI EXPE YT Curent Setting Po T lgnore address FFOUOUOU FFOUOUO4 FFOOOU0S FFOUQUOL FFOUOUTO FFOUOUIC FFOOOU0 FFONONA4 kl Ed l Cancel 2 Selecting the checkbox for an I O register in the Compared I O registers list allows this I O register to be saved into the test image file These checkboxes are not selected by default The selected I O register is shown in Current Setting 3 Ifyou do not wish to compare the address of the selected register select the Ignore address checkbox This checkbox is not selected by default 4 Click OK e CPU Status Test image data to be saved into test image files Test result details 226 Values set as detailed information and all data in the Status window Sheet Line Src Dest Example Name of the unmatched sheet Unmatched line number Content of the test image file Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Status differs Sheet Platform Line 6 Sre Execute From Pipeline Reset Dest Execute From EX Stage 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility To make detailed setting 1 Opens the Edit Test Status dialog box Edit Test Status EES Cancel 2 To specify the sheet to be compared in the test image file s
68. PTR PO Cancel Specify the trace range by Start PTR and End PTR Click OK Select the Edit or Remove button in the Edit Test Trace Range dialog box as required Click OK To make detailed setting with two or more trace types 230 l 2 gt 2 eS Opens the Edit Test Trace Ranges dialog box Edit Test Trace Ranges Trace ranges Start PTR End PTR Cancel d Modity EE EE Bemare Click Add button in the Edit Test Trace Ranges dialog box The Add Trace Range dialog box is displayed Add Trace Range Ei Ei Trace type fIntemal AL DrUsermemorn trace Start PTH DT End PTR Po Cancel Specify the trace range by Trace type Start PTR and End PTR Click OK Select the Edit or Remove button in the Edit Test Trace Range dialog box as required Click OK sQENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility e Symbol Locals Test image data to be saved into test image files Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Locals window acquired with this setting Checkboxes for all symbols are blank by default Test result details Failed at symbol Unmatched symbol name Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at symbol i Sre int H 00000001 R14 Dest int H 00000000 R14 To make detailed setting 1 Opens the Edit Test Locals dialog box Edit Test Loca
69. Placeholder Configuration directory Insert Example 4 1 Alternatively if you know the placeholder already type it into the field directly Ensure that you type the placeholder name in uppercase and that it is preceded by C and followed by Y This is correct FILEDIR These are incorrect Filedir FILEDIR FILEDIR 358 2CENESAS 5 Placeholders 5 3 Available placeholders The table below lists the available placeholders and their meanings along with an example of their use Placeholder Meaning Expanded placeholder example FULLFILE Filename including full path c hew workspace project file src FILEDIR File directory c hew workspace project FILENAME Filename excluding path including extension file src FILELEAF Filename excluding path and extension file EXTENSION File extension src WORKSPDIR Workspace directory c hew workspace WORKSPNAME Workspace name workspace PROJDIR Project directory c hew workspace project PROJECTNAME Project name project CONFIGDIR Configuration directory c hew workspace project debug CONFIGNAME Configuration name debug HEWDIR HEW installation directory c hew TCINSTALL Toolchain install directory on the options setting dialogs and the c hew Tools Renesas Sh 9 0 1 1 New Build Phase dialog step 3 TOOLDIR Tool installation directory Tools Administration c hew Tools Renesas Sh 9 0 1 1 TEMPDIR Temp
70. RHS Different Lines RHS Moved lines Modified Accessed Not Accessed Unknown No Memory Modified Build Error Build Warning Information PC Line Highlight Source Lines Text Objects to be Customized A selected text shown in the editor window and disassembly window in source mode The line at the PC program counter in the editor window and disassembly window in source mode while the Enable line highlight for PC position checkbox is selected in the Editor tab of the Options dialog box Comment or keywords 1 shown in the editor window and disassembly window in source mode 1 Control Declaration Operator PreProcessor Value Directive Unmatched text lines shown in the left pane in the Difference window Moved text lines shown in the left pane in the Difference window Unmatched text lines shown in the right pane in the Difference window Moved text lines shown in the right pane in the Difference window Text sections of changed values shown in the Register window Text sections of executed codes at coverage measurement shown in the Memory window Text sections of codes not executed at coverage measurement shown in the Memory window Text outside the coverage range shown in the Memory window Text outside the memory range shown in the Memory window Text sections of changed values shown in the Memory window Lines of error messages shown in the Build tab of the Output window Lines of warning messages shown in the Buil
71. Record Macro button on the Macros toolbar The mouse pointer is modified to include the record icon The message Recording is shown in the Macro tab of the Output window 2 Select File gt Refresh Session trhis records the refresh_session command 3 Click the Registers button ED on the CPU toolbar to open the Register window Double click the register of which you wish to change the value to invoke the Set Value dialog box Enter 0 in Value trhis records the register_set command 4 Click the Build button EE on the Standard toolbar to build the program for demonstration Etrhis records the build command 5 Double click to download the program for demonstration within the Download module folder in the Projects tab of the workspace window trhis records the file_load command 6 Click the Memory button h on the CPU toolbar to invoke the Display Address dialog box Enter the address of the data field in Display Address Then select Fill from the pop up menu Enter 0 as the data in the Fill dialog box trhis records the memory _fill command 7 Click the Reset CPU button Et on the Debug Run toolbar to reset the CPU lrhis records the reset command 8 Open a source file including a main function in the editor window 9 Right click on the last line of the main function and select Go To Cursor from the pop up menu Etrhis records the go_till command 10 Add the array element a 6 storing ra
72. Right clicking on a download module opens a pop up menu containing the available options Available when the debugger is connected Pop up Menu Options Macro Recording Function Download a Downloads modules Download Debug Data Only CI Downloads modules debug data only Unload C4 Unloads modules Download A New Module CI Opens the Download Module dialog box which allows you to add download modules Remove Removes the selected modules Debug Settings Opens the Debug Settings dialog box which allows you to modify the debug settings Configure View Configures the workspace view Relocate Module 2 Opens a dialog box which allows you to select one directory for relocating all files retrieved from the download module Properties Shows the selected download module setting in the Download Module dialog box This download module setting can be modified The download module will be unloaded if it has already been downloaded 2 If you use a debug only project 1 e Debugger only xxxxxx this menu item will be displayed 35 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics Right clicking on a file retrieved from the download module opens a pop up menu containing the available options Available only when you use the debug only project Pop up Menu Options Macro Recording Function Open lt file name gt Opens a file in the HEW editor Add File Adds files to a project Configure View Configures the workspace view Relocated file s
73. TOOL _INFROMATION TO Outputs the tool information UPDATE ALL DEPENDENCIES 1 UD Updates the current projects build dependencies 1 Available only when there is a toolchain installed 2 Support for this command depends on the debugging platform For the syntax of each command refer to the online help 352 2CENESAS 3 List of Commands 3 2 Command List Listed as the Functions HEW Application Control Commands Command Name ADD FILE CHANGE CONFIGURATION CHANGE PROJECT CHANGE SESSION CHANGE SUB SESSION 1 CLEAR OUTPUT WINDOW CLOSE WORKSPACE EVALUATE OPEN WORKSPACE QUIT RADIX REFRESH SESSION REMOVE FILE SAVE SESSION SAVE WORKSPACE TOOL INFORMATION Abbreviation AF CC CP CS CB COW CW EV OW QU RA RSE REM SE SW TO Description Adds a file to the current project Sets the configuration to the specified configuration name Sets the specified project file as the current project Sets the specified session as the current session Changes the current sub session when using multiple session debugging Clears the contents of the specified tab in the output window Closes the specified workspace file Evaluates an expression Opens the specified workspace file Exits HEW Sets default input radix Reloads the session file Removes a file from the current project Saves the current session Saves the current workspace Outputs the tool information 1 Support for this command depends on the debugging platfor
74. The custom version control support provides two placeholders User login name USERNAME and User login password PASSWORD When the command is executed these placeholders will be replaced with the current settings in the General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box In order to give the USERNAME and PASSWORD fields a value you will first need to login If you have not logged in before a command is executed which uses either of these placeholders then you will be prompted to do so before the command can be executed To login i e specify a username and password 1 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the General tab User details User JHARE ANNIN Pazzword 3 Click the Log In button The Log in dialog box will be displayed Log in Ed User name JHARK Cancel Password Pecos Confirm password by retyping it below Pretec 141 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Enter your username into the User name field Enter your password into the Password field Re type your password again into the Confirm password by retyping it below field oe oy A Click the OK button to set the new username and password If there is any inconsistency between the two versions of the password that you entered you will be requested to type your password again 8 11 Usage example of
75. Tools gt Macro Recording to Tools gt Stop Macro It is also possible to view this information while recording 217 2CENESAS 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility ol Of a at 20 27 2 e te 2 Record Macro Recording Build R4 build wait Stop Macro Finished recording Build Enter a macro name O gt A Build A Debug Find in Files Macro Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Options Toolbar button Function Clear Window CA Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons 218 sQENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility 16 Using the Test Support Facility The High performance Embedded Workshop HEW provide regression testing facilities for your application by the test support facility Regression test 1s re execution of a previous test after modification of the program to verify the result The test tool allows HEW macro and batch files to be executed and the system can then be compared to see if it matches the original captured data It is possible to
76. a HEW macro file Also see section 15 5 Functions that can be recorded into macro files where the HEW command line commands to be recorded are listed 1 Changing a project session or configuration 2 Compilation and build Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 3 Downloading a module changing a memory value or register value setting deleting a software breakpoint and running a program The macro recording support facility is available in the Tools menu and on the Macros toolbar The procedure from selection of Record Macro to that of Stop Macro consists one macro and one HEW macro file can record multiple macros a set of HEW command line commands A macro includes multiple HEW command line commands 15 1 Macro menu and toolbar The macro recorder has both a menu and toolbar integrated into the HEW The macro menu is available on the Tools menu It has the following standard menu items Macros Record Macro D Play Macro i Stop Meera The Macros menu item opens the Macro dialog box This allows management of the current macro files and functions The other menus items are the same as those seen on the Macros toolbar It is also possible to associate macro functions with a menu when you do this additional menu items are added underneath the standard macro menu items This is shown below Macros Record Macro D Play Macro le Stop Maen 1 Build Macro functors 2 D
77. a command even though this window is not included in the list of menus For details see section 15 5 2 Recordable functions dependent on the debugging platform 2 Data in some windows can be saved as test image data into test image files by the test support facility A save file icon in the Saving into Test Image File column of a menu item indicates that this data can be saved into a test image file For details see section 16 6 1 Functions that can be saved into test image files common to all HEW products Note that some functions of other windows dependent on the debugging platform can also be saved into test image files even though these windows are not included in the list of menus For details 344 2CENESAS 1 List of Menus see section 16 6 2 Functions that can be saved into test image files dependent on the debugging platform 3 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 4 The data of the Build tab or the Debug can be saved 1 4 List of Project Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Toolbar Macro Function Shortcuts Button Recording 1 Project Set Current Project a Set this project as the current project Insert Project CI Add project to workspace Dependent Projects Show dependent projects Edit Project Configuration 2 en Edit the project configuration Create Project Type Create a new project type Add Files Add files to project Remove Files Remove files from
78. a file with the editor the File Extensions dialog box allows you to associate any application with any file group so that when you double click on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window the appropriate application is launched with the file 42 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics File Extensions Ipp C list file Text editor cpp C source file Gancel cpu CPU information tile Add Word processor WI doc Documents a 2 exp Expanded assembly source file Thay ica hex Hex file Librarian ee Xlib Library file Oper with lbp Library information tile Z map Linkage map file BEARS Linkage symbol file No application obj Object file m d To associate an application with a file group 1 Select the Project gt File Extensions menu option The File Extensions dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the file group that you want to associate from the file extensions list 3 Click the Open with button The Modify File Extension dialog box will be displayed Modify File Extension File group Linkage map file Cancel Sssociated application Lp 3 ditor R D S a en Linkage map file with miele le oa iti Remove 4 Select None to remove any association Editor to open this type of file in the internal external editor or select Other to open this type of file with a specific application If you select Other you can either specify a new a
79. and output files produced in building To delete all files select Yes Otherwise select No or Cancel Confirmation Request ki 3 1 You are about to delete all intermediate files from project Demos Ht Do pou wish to continue T Don t ask this question again No Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 49 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Clean project checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK To delete intermediate and output files in all projects of the workspace Select one of the following operations e Select Build gt Clean All Projects OR e Right click on a workspace in the Projects tab of the workspace window Select Clean All Projects from the pop up menu A confirmation dialog opens for you to select whether or not to delete all intermediate and output files produced in building To delete all files select Yes Otherwise select No Confirmation Request Ei 3 You are about to delete all intermediate files from all projects in the workspace os Do you wish to continue T Don t ask this question again No Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To op
80. and the optimizing SupeiH RISC engine Standard Toolchain hin CiCes Assembly Link Libeay Standard Library CPU al sate abt Calegoy Sounce ha imien Se 4 Show entries for include ike chrenc horses H O Linkage symbol file Opliors CA cpussh object f OONFIGDIR FY FILELEAF obi debug gbe suto chgincpath ropalh global_volshle 0 Opt_range all intrube_loopeO del vacant_loope See section 2 7 Build configurations for more information about a configuration e Session What is session Sessions which have their own names are the units to manage various settings such as HEW debugger options used for debugging with connection to the debugging platform and options specific to the debugging platform and information on the Memory and Register windows and their positions The term session can also be referred to as debugger session 16 sQENESAS 1 Overview In the figure of the Standard toolbar shown as an example sessions SimSessionSH 4 and DefaultSession are available Information on each session is saved in an individual file in the HEW project NOTE There are various option settings such as the debugging platform to be connected with the HEW the object format for debugging download modules and the timing of connecting the HEW with the debugging platform or executing a command batch by the HEW Sessions created by the HEW When a project is created after se
81. arguments into the Command field Enter any arguments that you would like to pass to the command into the Arguments field Enter the initial directory in which you would like the tool to run into the Initial Directory field Click the OK button to add the menu option to the Setup menu Add Tool ki Define new user tool Tool details Name Cancel Explorer Command S0WINDIR sexplorer exe cee Arguments Cc l mLULGD Initial directory s TEMPDIR I Selection extetng svstem Hale H 115 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Note New menu options are added to the bottom of the list 1 e bottom of the Tools menu by default However the order of menu options in the Setup menu can be modified To modify a menu option 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Customize dialog box will be displayed Select the Menu tab 2 Select the menu option that you would like to modify and then click the Modify button Make the desired changes on the Modify Tool dialog box and then click the OK button ModifyT ool 7 Command S0WINDIF explorer exe l ene Arguments Cr Cc lk mLULmr Initial directory s TEMPDIR Db Browse Cancel To remove a menu option 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Customize dialog box will be displayed Select the Menu tab 2 Select the menu option that you would like to remove a
82. be modified accidentally To import a link to an existing session file and make it read only l eg a Choose the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Click the Add button The Add new session dialog box will be displayed Click the Use an existing session file radio button Enter a name for the session Browse to an existing session file location which you would like to import into the current project Click the Open and maintain link to session file checkbox Click the Make session file link read only checkbox This means that the HEW will be unable to save changes to this session and will only be able to read the data when the session is opened Use an existing session file Name Tutorial oesgion file path Browse W Open and maintain link to session file W Make session file link read only 4 Removing a session To remove a session Choose the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Select the session you would like to remove Click the Remove button Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box It is not possible to remove the current session 5 Making a session read only To make a session read only 268 Read only Choose the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Select the session you would like to view the proper
83. checkboxes are not selected by default 5 Click OK 16 7 Comparing a test image file To compare a test image file 1 Select the Test gt Compare Test Image File menu option The Compare dialog box is displayed Test image file ok gt Browse Compare test image file to f Curent system Test image file k gt ETRE 2 Enter the test file location that you want to compare in Test image file field This is a HIF HEW test image file file and contains details about the test image data Cancel 3 Then select what you want to compare the file you have selected with You can choose either the Current system or another previously saved test image file The Current system option is useful if you have manually executed a script and want to check the current test image data with some you saved previously 4 Click OK The results will be loaded into the test browser It is possible to compare test image file separately to test execution This allows you to compare manually the current system or two test image files at a later date to when the tests were actually executed You can also compare test image file from the workspace window pop up menu 234 sQENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility 16 8 Running tests This allows you to select tests and automate their execution To run tests 1 Select the Test gt Run Tests menu option The Run Tests dialog box is displayed
84. confusing so these have been listed below Tab Control Scope Toolbar All Each workspace Command All The whole system Menu Application wide tools The whole system Workspace wide tools Each workspace Placeholders Application wide custom placeholder The whole system 120 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Workspace wide placeholder Each workspace Debugger Debugger tool Each project Debugger location Default whole system and each project basis Command line options Each project Session file Each project Download module Each project Log All Each workspace Help All Each workspace Keyboard All The whole system 6 7 2 Scope of a control in the Options dialog box Scope of each control of each tab of the Options dialog box which is launched via Setup gt Options affects the whole system 6 8 Specifying workspace options The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to control several aspects of a workspace via the Options dialog box To invoke it select the Setup gt Options menu option and select the Workspace tab 6 8 1 Open last workspace at start up When you exit the High performance Embedded Workshop the last workspace you had open is stored On subsequently launching the HEW you may want the last workspace to be opened automatically To open the last workspace at start up 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the
85. debug options e Current debug target for the current project and configuration selection e Download modules for the current project and configuration selection The download module list displays the order in which the files will be downloaded to the target It is possible to Add Modify Remove Up and Down modules in this list To add a new download module 1 Select one of the following operations e Select the Debug gt Debug Settings menu option OR e Right click on a module or within the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Debug Settings 2 The Debug Settings dialog box will be displayed In the project tree select the project and configurations to which you want to add a download module 3 Click the Add button The Download Module dialog box is displayed 254 2CENESAS 10 11 17 Using the Debugger Download Module za Ose ERMINE z E Format EI Dwart2 Cancel Filename COMFIGDIAS PROJECT NAME abs Browse ACCess Size i l Download debug information only Perform memory verify during download T Download automatically on target connection All fields must be setup for the download module to be configured correctly The first field is Offset This is the memory address offset the module will be loaded at It defaults to 0 After the module has been added the offset value is shown on the right of the module name in the
86. define SR_ Init OxO000 2 Select Open lt file name gt from the pop up menu 4 18 Tooltip watch Use this function to know the value of a variable defined in the source program Open the editor window or disassembly window in source mode to view the source program and rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip pop up window will appear showing the watch information To use Tooltip watch 1 Select Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box is displayed 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Check the Enable tooltip watch check box 4 Click OK M Enable tooltip watch To view a tooltip watch on the editor window or disassembly window in source mode 1 Open the editor window or disassembly window in source mode showing the variable that you want to examine 2 Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip will appear near the variable containing basic watch information for that variable Source sortial printt Sorting results fori 1 0 141037 i jf printt alsd sld n 1 4 min af max d long 10 r 0000000 min nax change a Wak afO 101 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 19 Evaluate an expression Launches the Evaluate dialog box allowing the user to enter a numeric expression e g 205 2 and display the result in all currently supported radices To evaluate an expressions 1 Select t
87. describe the procedures to create a workspace make settings for version control create a repository register a module check out check the status compare register the result and view logs Step 1 Create a workspace Step 2 Selecting Custom Version Control System Step 3 Making settings for Version Control Step 4 Using the Version Control facility Create a Repository Step 5 Using the Version Control facility Register a Module Step 6 Using the Version Control facility Check out Step 7 Using the Version Control facility Modify the File Step 8 Using the Version Control facility Check the Status Step 9 Using the Version Control facility Compare Step 10 Using the Version Control facility Register the Result Step 11 Using the Version Control facility View Logs 1 Step 1 Create a workspace 1 Select File gt New Workspace to open the New Project Workspace dialog box 2 Create a workspace with the following conditions 147 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System ow ND 11 Workspace Name sampleCVS Project Name sampleCVS Directory C WorkSpace sampleCVS Exit the HEW Create a folder for CVS C src sampleCVS Move the file you wish to control from C WorkSpace sampleCVS sampleCVS to C src sampleCVS Start up the HEW and open the created workspace sampleCVS Select the Project gt Remove Files menu to open the Remove Project Files dialog box Select the file you wi
88. development or if you want to manage the tools being used in your projects more effectively you may need to register components yourself 103 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 5 2 HEW registration files When a HEW compatible component i e toolchain system tool or utility phase is installed part of its installation will include a file with the extension HRF This file called a HEW Registration File describes the component to the HEW see the figure below PR htyT oval E hfiTOOL HRF st pear lene neret sein Carns oar a The process of registration refers to loading a component s HRF file into the Tools Administration dialog box see the figure below In order to use a component with HEW it must first be registered see section 5 3 Registering a component for further information The Tools Administration dialog box shows all currently registered components To access it ensure no workspaces are open and then select the Tools gt Administration menu option If you attempt to access the Tools Administration dialog box when a workspace is open the Tools Administration dialog box is opened but cannot be modified When HEW 1s installed any new tools are automatically registered Day to day usage of the HEW though may mean you need to know more about the tools registration process HEW stores tool information in a tool database file which is stored in the root of the tool installation directory By default this i
89. dialog box will be invoked Enter into the Header and Footer edit fields the text required to be displayed All normal placeholders are available along with page numbering text justification and date fields These are all expanded before the page is to be printed Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect To set up print wrapping l pA 4 7 2 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box will be invoked Click the Wrap Text check box This switches on the wrap text facility when printing so no text is truncated and everything is visible Click OK for the new settings to take effect Changing tabs W Use spaces as tabs Tab size A To change tab size 1 2 3 4 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed Select the Editor tab Enter into Tab Size the number of desired tabs Click the OK button for the new tab settings to take effect When the TAB key is pressed in the editor a tab character 1s usually stored in the file However sometimes it is preferable to store spaces instead The representation of tab characters can be controlled via the Options dialog box To use spaces as tabs 1 2 3 4 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed Select the Editor tab Set the Use spaces as tabs checkbox as appropriate Click the OK button for the new tab settings to take effect 91 2CENESAS 4 U
90. directory c temp WINDIR Windows directory c windows WINSYSDIR Windows system directory c windows system EXEDIR Command directory v vc win32 USERNAME User login Version control JHARK PASSWORD User password Version control 214436 VCDIR Virtual version control directory c project is mapped to x vce project COMMENT Comment Version control Please Enter Comment dialog is invoked LINE Line number of an error warning 12 In the table above we are assuming that e a file path is c hew workspace project file sre e a workspace named workspace is located at c hew workspace e a project named project is located at c hew workspace project e a configuration named debug has a configuration directory located at c hew workspace project debug e HEW EXE is installed in c hew e a HRF file of a toolchain i e compiler assembler linker is located in c hew Tools Renesas Sh 9 0 1 1 This is referred to as TCINSTALL on the options setting dialogs and the New Build Phase dialog step 3 of the Build menu and as TOOLDIR on the Tools Administration dialog box e the Windows operating system is installed in c windows and the Windows system directory is located at c windows system e aversion control executable path is v vc win32 ss exe a user name and its password to login to the version cont
91. files of the selected project or configuration click the Clean button This does not execute the build 6 Results from the build are displayed in the Build tab of the Output window in the same way as in a normal build process 2 8 4 Stopping tool execution The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to halt the build process once it is under way To stop tool execution 1 Select one of the following operations e Click the Stop Tool Execution toolbar button E OR e Select the Build gt Stop Tool Execution menu option 2 The HEW will attempt to stop the tool immediately 3 The Build Stopped by User message appears in the Build tab of the Output window Note Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again 2 8 5 Deleting intermediate and output files produced in building You can delete intermediate and output files produced in building included in the current configuration in the project To delete intermediate and output files included in the current configuration in the project Select one of the following operations e Select Build gt Clean Current Project OR e Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the workspace window Select Build gt Clean Current Project from the pop up menu A confirmation dialog opens for you to select whether or not to delete all intermediate
92. high You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment 12 This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written approval from Renesas 13 Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document Renesas semiconductor products or if you have any other inquiries For inquiries about the contents of this document or product fill in the text file the installer generates in the following directory and email to your local distributor SUPPORT Product name SUPPORT TXT Renesas Tools Homepage _shttp www renesas com tools Introduction Introduction The High performance Embedded Workshop is a powerful development environment for embedded applications targeted at Renesas micro controllers The main features are e Aconfigurable build engine that allows you to set up compiler assembler and linker options by using GUI e An integrated text editor with user customizable syntax coloring to improve code readability e Aconfigurable environment which allows you to run your own tools e An integrated debugger which allows you to build and debug in the same application e Version control support The High performance Embedded Workshop has been designed with two key aims firstly to provide you t
93. if the OS is in its default state Before invoking the HEW you should take the procedures listed below to change the settings of the PC so that HEW system will be accessed via network When your server machine and client machine have Windows XP Service Pack 2 the settings are required for both machines e Fora server machine with Windows XP Service Pack 2 Step1 Firewall 1 Select Control Panel from the Windows start menu Click Network and Internet Connections in the Control Panel Click Windows Firewall in the Network and Internet Connections The Windows Firewall dialog box is invoked Click the Exceptions tab Click the Add Program button to open the Add a Program dialog box Se So Click the Browse button and select System Sec HewServer Hew3Server exe under the HEW installation directory Click the OK button and close the Add a Program dialog box Click the Add Port button to open the Add a Port dialog box 9 Enter DCOM in Name and 135 in Port Number and select TCP option button 10 Click the OK button and close the Add a Port dialog box 11 Click the OK button in the Windows Firewall dialog box 12 Close the Network and Internet Connections 13 Close the Control Panel a Step2 DCOM 1 Select Run from the Windows start menu 2 The Run dialog box is invoked 3 Enter dcomcnfg in the Open field and click the OK button 4 The Component Services window opens 5 Expand the tree If the Window Security Alert d
94. if you want to save the workspace and then re open it This is because the workspace must be re opened in the shared access mode If the changes are not saved then they will be lost Click OK to share projects by network facilities 7 When you re open the workspace and log into the system a dialog is displayed showing your current access rights For example if you are the admin user the level will be administrator When this dialog is closed the HEW server window is opened and the network facilities to share projects are enabled Network Network database access User Esam Pazsword Hacswadi Select server 10 3 Setting the administrator user s password To set the administrator users password 1 Continue from the previous sections step 4 2 Click the Password button This should have been enabled when the network data access was enabled 3 The Change password dialog box is displayed Change password Ei Admir Password Cancel Confirm Password 4 The user name is read only in the top field In this case it should be Admin 5 Type the new password into both of the fields and click OK 6 This should set the user and password on the Network tab of Options dialog box 10 4 Adding new users to the system The initial setting of the network database adds an administrator user and a guest user to the system The following levels of access are possible in the HEW system Administrat
95. into Test Image File column of an item listed in the View menu indicates that this data can be saved into a test image file 224 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility 16 6 1 Functions that can be saved into test image files common to all HEW products Among the functions common to all HEW products the test items listed below can be saved into test image files The following table shows these test items in the Create New Test Image dialog box Menu Menu Option Keyboard Toolbar Window Create New Test Image dialog box Shortcuts Button Test Test item Whether detailed setting specific group to the test item can be made View Output AIL O E Build tab ofthe Output Build Output No output window Window Debug tab of the Debug Output output window Window CPU Registers CTRL R Register CPU Register IO CTRLH IO IO Yes Status CTRL U Status Status Memory CTRL M Memory Memory Code Stack CTRL K lira Stack Trace Code Stack Trace Trace Test items cannot be selected when the HEW is not connected to a debugging platform When detailed setting specific to the test item cannot be made e Output Build Output Window Test image data to be saved into test image files All information in the Build tab of the output window Test result details Original Content of the test image file New Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Original New Building New Debug e Output
96. is added to the project if the file is checked out and if it is checked out and who did SO Removing files from Visual SourceSafe If you wish to take files out of Visual SourceSafe the files must be removed To remove files from Visual SourceSafe l 3 9 2 3 Select the files that you would like to remove from Visual SourceSafe in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof Select one of the following operations Click the Remove from VCS toolbar button h OR Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Remove from VCS menu option OR Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Remove from VCS Remove fram WS i lWorkepace Name hws GABE WW la Project Name hwp GAHE Cancel Froject_Hame c EH EW typedef ine h GAHE Midbsct c CH aa aoe PT The Remove from VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to remove and click the OK button Getting read only copy of files from Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time However it is possible for any user to obtain a read only copy of any file To get read only copy of files from Visual SourceSafe l Select the files that you would like to get from Visual SourceSafe in the Pro
97. is being modified the sample text below shows what the font will look like Click the OK button ok a ee Fort Font Courier Mer Point Size 10 HEW Sample Text 4 10 Syntax coloring To enhance code readability the HEW editor can display specific strings 1 e keywords in different colors For instance C source code comments could be shown in green and C types e g int could be shown in blue The coloring method used can be specified on a file group by file group basis For example you can define different color schemes for C source file C header file Assembly source file or Assembly include file Note When you create a new file syntax coloring will not be active as a new file does not initially have an extension new files are named arbitrarily by the editor without an extension In order to activate syntax coloring you must save the new file with a name and extension that the HEW recognizes See section 2 5 File extensions and file groups for information on file extensions 93 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 10 1 Changing text colors To change existing colors 1 Select the Setup gt Format Views menu option The Format Views dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the view you are interested in changing the font for If it is the editor expand the Source in the tree on the left hand side of the dialog box 3 Select the file type for which you want to edit syntax coloring from the Fil
98. memory unit depending on your Memory view display choice and dragging the mouse to the last unit The selected range is highlighted 0 1 2 3 4 oo Oo Oo Oo O0 O0 O0 O0 00 00 OO OO OO OO 0A ho O 0O 00 00 O Q 17 3 4 Filling an area of memory with constant data You can set the contents of a range of memory addresses to a value using the memory fill feature Select an address range to fill in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Fill option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Fill dialog box is displayed 287 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Fill Fix Start Address 00000000 End Address fono0007 F Data Data Type i Value C String Length li byte Pade Yerify Cancel Enter the data value or character to be filled in the Data field Select the Verify check box Support for verify function depends on the debugging platform If you did not drag the address range to be filled you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value When specifying the value Click the Value button in the Data Type group Specify the data length in the Length field When setting the character Click the String button in the Data Type group Specify the character code in the Code field When the display data length is
99. new phase is added to the bottom of the Build phase order list in the Build Order tab of the Build Phases dialog box 65 CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features 3 3 Ordering build phases In a standard build shown in figure below you could add a phase at four different positions before the compiler 1 before the assembler 2 before the linker 3 or after the linker 4 You may place your own custom phases or move system phases to any position in the build order It is important to remember that if the output of your custom phase can be input into another phase then the phase order must be correct if the build is to behave as intended COMPILE ASSEMBLE Select the Build gt Build Phases menu option The Build Phases dialog box will be displayed The build phase dialog box provides facilities for ordering build phases via the Build Phases dialog box It has two tabs which are concerned with the ordering of phases Build Order and Build File Order And then you can click OK button 3 3 1 Build Order tab or Build All E buttons is selected The check boxes to the left of each phase indicates whether or not the phase is currently enabled A phase can be toggled on off by checking unchecking its corresponding checkbox respectively Build Order Build File Order File Mappines Build phase order WSH C C Library Generator Add MISH OfO Compiler Modify WISH Assembler wlOptLinker Remove Pa hw Phase Move Up
100. of Register Code Switch display or non display of Code When the label register or code is shown the option is checked When the label register and code are hidden Address 0 1 2 A 4 5 68 7 8 49 4 B 40 0 E GF 00000000 oo 00 00 00 00O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OOO000I0 oo 00 OO OO 00O 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 OOO00020 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OD 17 3 21 Changing the number of digits displayed Choose Column menu from the pop up menu of the memory window The Set Column dialog box is displayed Set Column Ei Cancel Specify the number of digits in which you want data to be displayed 1 256 17 3 22 Switching display or non display of measurement result In the memory window a display of coverage measurement is set to Disable by default To enable the display select Coverage gt Enable menu from the pop up menu of the memory window In the Memory window the background of the executed lines is displayed in sky blue and the background of the unexecuted lines is displayed in gray During coverage measurement the default foreground and background colors of the executed codes are black and light blue respectively while those of the codes not executed are black and gray The colors in both cases can be customized in the Format Views dialog box For detail see section 17 3 27 Customizing the current colors 0 1 2 3 4 th E 7 h 9 A E E 0
101. of a project and SH 4 Simulator was selected as the target debugging platform You can switch between different configurations and sessions by selecting one in the drop down list box It is also possible to add or delete configurations or sessions as necessary e Configuration What is configuration Configurations are the build option settings e g output of debug information or optimization having their own names The term configuration can also be referred to as build configuration In the figure of the Standard toolbar shown as an example configurations SimDebug_ SH 4 Debug and Release are available 14 2CENESAS 1 Overview Configurations created by the HEW When a project is created after selection of the toolchain the HEW automatically creates configurations Debug and Release Selecting SuperH RISC engine from CPU family and Renesas SuperH RISC engine from Tool chain respectively Hew Project Workspace Workspace Mame l Application workspace Name F Demonstration Project Name ham ml Project Name 000 ep Import Wakelle ENP Library Directoy gt Debugger only ooonncan CMH workspace okspace_ Mame CPU farrily Super AIS engine Tool chan Renesas Supe Standard If you have selected a target debugging platform at creation of the project the HEW creates a configuration suitable for the debugging platform If you have selected SH 4 Simulator in Targets at c
102. of valid description blocks which use these commands CHANGEDIR cdc dirl dir2 SETENV set VARI1 valuel set VAR2 value2 set VAR3 value3 It does not matter that CHANGEDIR and SETENV are not file names They will be treated as files that do not exist and so the commands will always be executed 376 2CENESAS 13 HMAKE User Guide Sub command files If you wish hmake to generate a sub command file for you then the command part of the description block should be specified as follows this replaces lt commandn gt above lt command start gt lt lt lt sub command 1 gt lt sub command 2 gt gt lt sub commandn gt lt lt lt command end gt This will generate a sub command file in the windows temporary directory which will contain the lines lt sub command1 gt lt sub command2 gt etc This command file will be deleted once the make process has completed The name of the command file will be substituted for all the text between the two lt lt s You do not have to worry about the name of the sub command file This is generated by hmake For example c dirl filel obj c dir1l filel c c dir1 file1 h gt gcc lt lt c oc dirl filel obj c dirl filel c i i If the sub command file generated has the name c temp hmk111 cmd then the following would be executed by hmake assuming c dirl file1 obj is out of date gcc c temp hmk111 cmd The comm
103. on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click and select Add Folder 3 Enter the name in Folder of the Add Folder dialog box 4 Click OK 5 You can now drag and drop files into this folder to group them logically To drag and drop a folder Drag a folder in the active project from the Projects tab of the workspace window e Ifthe folder is dropped onto the active project the folder is directly added into the project e Ifthe folder is dropped onto a user folder in the active project the folder is added into the user folder You can also drag folders from the Windows Explorer and drop it into the Projects tab of the workspace window For details see section 2 3 2 Drag and drop of files and folders To remove a user folder 1 Select the folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Select one of the following operations the folder must be empty e Press the Delete key e Right click and select Remove Folder from the pop up menu To modify a user folder name 1 Select the folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click and select Rename Folder from the pop up menu 41 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics 3 Enter the new name in Folder of the Rename Folder dialog box 4 Click OK 2 5 File extensions and file groups The HEW can identify files by their extension The system defines certain extensions depending upon the tools that are being used For example if you are using a compiler
104. one of the following operations xi Click the Check out from VCS toolbar button OR Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check out from VCS menu option OR Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Check out from VCS Check out from WGS Files workspace Namehyws CNH EW A ak Project Name hwp OAH EW Project Name c OAH EW i typedef ineh CAHE Midbsct c CHEW and Aa m Comment lh The Check out from VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to obtain and click the OK button When the operation is finished the file has a red mark next to its name This means you as the current user of HEW has checked it out 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe See Project Name Od Assembly source file N Intpre src lowly Leric e vectiblerc w ee vhandlersre w BS C source tile o hE dbsetc w lowerc c w Project Name c w resetpre c w sbrk c w Download modules 1 Project_Name abs D000000O Dependencies B env inic w B lowerc h w 2 sbrkh w B atackacth w typedetine h w B YECLINC w 9 2 5 Checking in writable copy of files into Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places i
105. project File Extensions Display current project file extensions Components Load unload components 1 Operations with some menu items can be recorded as HEW command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu item indicates that this function can be recorded into a HEW macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all HEW products 2 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 1 5 List of Build Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Toolbar Macro Function Shortcuts Button Recording 1 Build Toolchain Sets options for a build phase 2 Build File CTRL F7 ets C Builds the selected files Build F7 kad i Builds out of date project files Build All i Builds project files regardless of whether the project files are out of date Build Multiple i Builds multiple projects Clean Current Project i Cleans the current configuration in this project Clean All Project w Cleans all configurations in all projects in this workspace Update All Updates a project s dependencies Dependencies Stop Tool Execution CTRL Break Stops tool execution Include Exclude Excludes a file from build or cancels the exclusion Build Build Phase Adds removes and modifies phase Build Configurations CI Selects the current configuration Linkage Order Customizes the HEW linkage order Genera
106. section list line in the right pane 13 1 14 Printing out the section list You can also print out the section list in the right pane To print out the section list 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Print 3 The standard print formatting and selection dialog box is displayed From here you can choose your printer and page setup options 13 2 Viewing symbols You can view symbols in each of the sections in the Map Symbol Information window Even 1f there are too many symbols the search or filtering function can be used to view necessary information only 195 2CENESAS 13 Map 13 2 1 Opening the Map Symbol Information window To open the Map Symbol Information window 1 Select one of the following operations e Click the Map toolbar button fu OR e Select View gt Map 2 The Select Map Window Type dialog box opens Select Map Symbol Information in the Map drop down list Window configuration Map Symbol Information amp dew ga 00000800 Link map list ea re ee ee ee File z _INTHan OOO00s00 popat None Global IN vwhar E A OOO00ODAE _ExpHan 0000000 QOOOO0000 None Local INT whar Been A 00000084 e OOO0008 58 DOOOUOO00 None Local INT whar baa oo gt fooooops4 _TUBmis 00000800 popao None Local INT whar ee A 00001000 _ITRQHan 0000ra DOOUOU00 None Local INT whar ce oo 00002000 _RESET 00000TS58 QOOOO0000 None Global WEC veet
107. see oe be Weatch S ins essiarnsH 4 Memory SimSessionSH 4 Check All te 0DE Status SimSessionSH 4 settings T kl Ei Clicking the Check All button selects all checkboxes while clicking the Uncheck All button deselects all checkboxes Click the Import button to open the Import the Test Image File dialog box Browse to the HIF file location The settings of an existing test image file is imported CENESAS 223 16 Using the Test Support Facility 4 Each component is listed in the dialog box Check the checkbox next to the component name to save data for that component 5 Select the component in the dialog and then click the Settings button A dialog box will be displayed that is dependent on the selected component This will allow you to customize the data that is saved to the file For details see section 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image data into test image files Clicking OK will dismiss the dialog and store the changes that you have set up The Save Test Image File dialog box is displayed 8 Save the data into the HEW test image file selected in the Add New Test dialog box or a new HEW test image file Only test image data of the selected test items with tick marks in checkboxes will be saved into the file You can also edit a test image file from the workspace window pop up menu 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image data into test image files Create New Test
108. shows the login user ID and password and database file in Visual SourceSafe 4 Youcan modify the user ID password or database in the Log in dialog box opened by clicking the Log In button 5 The Configuration file group box shows the configuration file in the current version control system 9 5 Specifying file locations You can view the current mapping in the project Select the project that you wish to view the mapping from the Show mappings for project drop down list The HEW workspace and project directory and Visual SourceSafe project directory are shown in the list Mapping of projects can be added modified or removed For detail see section 8 6 Specifying file locations Custom Commands Mappings General show mappings for project A C NHEW sworkepacesiworkepace workspace_Name Add CHEW S WorkspacesWorkepace Workspace_NamesProject_Nar loa it Renove 165 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe To define a new directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Mapping tab Click the Add button The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box will be displayed 4 Specify a HEW workspace directory or project directory in the Source directory field Select one of the following operations e Enter the directory name OR e Click the placeholder button Then select Project directory or Workspace
109. source code in the editor When you attempt an operation to display an error or warning the status bar shows this error or warning message You can also customize the Build tab so that the texts in the lines of error messages will be highlighted in a color different from that of the texts in other lines The figure below shows the error messages in red and warnings in green as an example Haoa Met o 9 Phase SH C C Compiler starting HED Workspaces DemoSH4 DemoSsH4 dbsct c HEW Workspace DemoSH4 DemosH4 lowsre c HEVN Workspace DemosH4 DemosH4 resetprg c HEW Workspace DemosH4 DemosH4 shrkE c HEN Workspace DemnosH4 DemosH4 DemosH4 c HEW Workspace DemoSH4 DemosHa DemosHd cie2 C4lsl Ei Wo type HED Workspace DemoSH4 DemosH4 DemosH4 cid0 C10l6 W Argqument C HEN Workspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4a DemosSH4 c 49 C10l6 W Argqument Phase SH C C Compiler finished Build Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Options Toolbar button Function Dl Highlights the next occurrence of error and shows the source code in the editor Ot Highlights the previous occurrence of error and shows the source code in the editor ENI Highlights the next occurrence of warning an
110. t ask this question again No Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Switch from disassembly to new source checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK 1 Viewing the code To view a source file s code click the View Source button Window configuration a DemoSH4 c View med mode View Source E View Disassembly Column Source Address Sa Breakpoints header 22 oooo2000 chs long min Max long J Ine l OO002Z006 printe Data 29 00002014 for i 0 ae 2 Line Humber column SAW Breakpontes column Source Source Address column e Clicking another toolbar button switches the display mode To view disassembly codes in mixed mode click the View mixed mode button To view disassembly codes in disassembly mode click the View Disassembly button e The columns listed in the table below are on the left of the Source field Column Name Description Line Displays the line number for the source file Source Address After your program has been downloaded the editor window displays the addresses for the current source file S W Breakpoints Display the PC location 5 breakpoints and bookmark Setting PC break
111. testing purposes or if the value is incorrect due to a bug in your program To change a watch item s value use the Edit Value function To edit a watch item s value 1 Enter a value directly in the window In another way select the item to edit by clicking on it you will see a flashing cursor on the item Choose Edit Value from the pop up menu 2 The Edit Value dialog box opens Edit Yalue Expressiori g Current H 0000EFd4 73FFFFAC Value New Value 3 Enter the new value or expression in the New Value field and click OK The Watch window is updated to show the new value e Deleting a watch item To delete a watch item select it from the Watch view and choose the Delete option from the pop up menu The item is deleted and the Watch view is updated To delete all watch item select it from the Watch view and choose the Delete All option from the pop up menu The all items are deleted and the Watch view is updated Watch items that you have set in the Watch window are saved in the session file f Modifying the radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the pop up menu g Saving the Watch window contents in a file To save the contents of the Watch window choose Save As from the pop up menu the Save As dialog box opens It allows the user to specify the name of a file and to save the contents of the Watch window in the file If the Append check box is selec
112. that allow modification these are named global 2 Select the command you wish to modify or add a new keyboard shortcut for in the Commands list The current shortcut is displayed in the Current keyboard shortcut field 4 Click the Remove button Changes are not saved until the OK button is clicked on the Customize dialog box To reset all the keyboard shortcuts 1 Click the Reset button All shortcuts revert to the default settings for the currently selected keyboard layout 2 Changes are not saved until the OK button is clicked on the Customize dialog box The keyboard shortcuts dialog box allows you to import and export keyboard settings to a defined file This allows you to easily transfer settings from one machine to another To export keyboard shortcuts 1 Click the Export button 2 A standard file dialog is displayed Choose the filename to save the settings of the currently selected keyboard layout to 3 Click OK To import keyboard shortcuts 1 Select the keyboard layout you wish to replace with your imported settings in the Default keyboard layout drop down list 2 Click the Import button A standard file dialog box is displayed Choose the filename to load the keyboard layout from 4 Click OK 6 7 Scope of a control in the setup 6 7 1 Scope of a control in the Customize dialog box The scope of each control in the Customize dialog box which is launched via Setup gt Customize differs This can be
113. that are being viewed or edited The title bar of the active window will appear a different color from that of the others dbsct c is the active window in figure bellow All text operations such as typing pasting text and so forth only affect the active window To switch to another source file window i e to make some other window the active window there are a number of methods e Click on it if it is visible OR e Press CTRL TAB or CTRL SHIFT TAB to cycle through the windows one after another OR e Select the window by name from the Window menu OR e Select its tab at the bottom of the editor window LE lo x it CAHE WYW orkspace D emoSH4 D moSh O x T Gale Tithe bar Toolbar Column header Column Source code teld we Title bar Toolbar Column header Column ae a lo oe a i te ee ae ap Shows information on files file name asterisk while editing and Read Only attribute If a file is included in a directory of the current project the file name is displayed on the title bar of the editor window Otherwise the title bar of the editor window displays the file name including its absolute path The toolbar is only shown while the debugging platform is connected with the session When one display mode is active clicking another toolbar button switches the display mode If you place the mouse pointer on a toolbar button the name of the button pops up You can a
114. the Custom Version Control System The custom version control system includes any version control system in which command line commands should be executed via the MS DOS command prompt The usage examples in this section use the following version control systems to be connected with the HEW e Connecting the HEW with RCS e Connecting the HEW with CVS 8 11 1 Connecting the HEW with RCS In this example the HEW is to be connected with RCS e RCS environment The following types of version control system can be used o GNURCS o GNU diff This procedure assumes that the version control system is located at C RCS e Workspace Create a HEW workspace in the following folder C WorkSpace rcs_sample Then create a folder for RCS C WorkSpace rcs_sample rcs_ sample RCS The following pages describe the procedures to create a workspace make settings for version control check in compare check out and view logs Step 1 Create a workspace Step 2 Selecting Custom Version Control System Step 3 Making settings for Version Control Step 4 Using the Version Control facility Check in Step 5 Using the Version Control facility Compare Step 6 Using the Version Control facility Check out Step 7 Using the Version Control facility View Logs 1 Step 1 Create a workspace 1 Select File gt New Workspace to open the New Project Workspace dialog box 2 Create a workspace with the following conditions e Workspace Name rcs sample e Pr
115. the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar e Drag the control bar of a docked window while pressing the CTRL key To hide the Workspace window or the Output window Select one of the following operations e Click on the close button which is located in the top right corner of the window OR e Right click anywhere inside a floating window and select the Hide option on the pop up menu Hide To show the Workspace window or the Output window Select the View gt Workspace or View gt Output menu option respectively 1 2 5 Editor window The editor window is where you will work with the files of your project The HEW allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them and to edit them in whichever order you want to By default the editor window is displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files see the figure below 14 include typede fine h pragma section DSEC static C nst SCruUCE 1 _UBYTE rom_3 atarit addregg of the _UBYTE rom E End address of the in _UBYTE ram 3 atarit SCGEess GE the DTBL z The editor contains a gutter column on the left hand side of the window The standard column allows the user to configure the position of bookmarks and software breakpoints quickly and easily If you are unsure what purpo
116. the Set Function Name list box The functions are set and the Select Function dialog box closes Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without setting the functions 328 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 4 Debugging an overlay program Programs making use of the Overlay function can be debugged This section explains the settings for using the Overlay function a Displaying section group When the Overlay function is used i e when several section groups are assigned to the same address range the address ranges and section groups are displayed in the Overlay dialog box Overlay Address Section Name OO2000 O02008 Open the Overlay dialog box by choosing the Debug gt Overlay menu option This dialog box has two areas the Address list box and the Section Name list box The Address list box displays the address ranges used by the Overlay function Click to select one of the address ranges in the Address list box Address Section Marne ed PsectO0l1 Psectil Bi O02000 O002008 Psecthe Psectile PsectO3 Psectis Lancel The Section Name list box displays the section groups assigned to the selected address range b Setting section group When using the Overlay function the highest priority section group must be selected in the Overlay dialog box otherwise the HEW will operate incorrectly Firstly click one of the address ranges displayed in the Address list box The section groups assigned to
117. the history of files in Visual SourceSafe 157 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 9 2 1 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe In the previous section a mapping between the workspace directory on your hard disk 1 e the working directory and the project directory in Visual SourceSafe 1 e the directory controlled by Visual SourceSafe has been established However the project directory and any subdirectories on your hard disk may contain many source files whereas the directory it is mapped to in Visual SourceSafe will be initially empty You need to add files to the Visual SourceSafe project To add files to Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the files that you would like to add to Visual SourceSafe in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof When selecting the project or workspace folder the HEW system files will be added to the selected file list For example selecting the project folder will also add the project file HWP to the Files list If the project file is then checked out and the version is newer than when it was last loaded you will be asked whether you want to reload the project 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Add to VCS toolbar button iz OR e Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Add to VCS menu option OR e Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Add to VCS 3 The A
118. the options listed in the table below are available Right click on an item in the left pane The following options with in the table can be selected Pop up menu options Toolbar Item button Root Address Section group Subsection group Overlay group Section aA E aa o oo Add Section Group rag i p p p E a Add Section P i p p p i Add Overlay Group 1 af ie p a Edit Selected Item ia p p a a ie Cut ab te ie be Copy W nd W Paste Epi i p p p ie Delete p p a a ie Move up t p Move Down 4 i Change Primary Section 1 EP p 1 This pane cannot be used when the linkage editor does not support overlay 2 Will be supported by SuperH RISC engine family C C compiler package V 9 00 Release 04 and H8 H8S and H8SX family C C compiler package V 6 01 Release 02 or later To exit the edit mode 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Section Edit Mode 3 The confirmation dialog box shown below opens To reflect the changes to the section settings of the linkage editor select Yes eckmap os 1 Set the edited linker section information 4 The HEW exits the edit mode The tick mark on Section Edit Mode has disappeared 13 1 3 Adding a section group In the edit mode you can add a section group To add a section group 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Add Section Group 3 The Add Section Group dialog box appears 191 2CENESAS
119. the same address of the cursor line as the Source mode You can view assembly language codes only when the debugging platform is connected to the session 273 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Window configuration a DemoSH4 c Disassembly Ghat ASM Disassembly Address 00002000 2FE 00002002 00002004 View mied mode View Source Ble Yew Disassembly C Column header Label column Obj code column Disassembly Disassembly Address column SAW Break points ASM column e Clicking another toolbar button switches the display mode To view disassembly codes in mixed mode click the View mixed mode button To view source codes in source mode click the View Source button e The columns listed in the table below are on the left of the Disassembly field Column Name S W Breakpoints ASM Description Display the PC location 5 breakpoints Setting PC breakpoint by double click Disassembly Address Display the disassembly address Open the Set Address dialog box by double click Enter the address to jump to Obj code Display the object codes Label Display the Labels This column is not available if no module has been downloaded e Double clicking the Disassembly field in disassembly mode opens the Assembler dialog box Enter assembly language codes Option Right clicking within the Disassembly field opens a pop up menu containing available options Pop up
120. the selected address range will then be displayed in the Section Name list box Click to select the section group with the highest priority among the displayed section groups 329 sQENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Overlay Address Section Name OO01000 001023 PsectoOl Psectil OO2000 002008 Pope tie Poet 12 Cancel Psectos3 Psectls After selecting a section group clicking the OK button stores the priority setting and closes the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without storing the priority setting Note Within the address range used by the Overlay function the debugging information for the section specified in the Overlay dialog box is referred to Therefore the same section of the currently loaded program must be selected in the Overlay dialog box 17 18 3 Looking at variables This section describes how you can look at variables in the source program If you are debugging ELF DWARF2 load modules created by using Renesas SHC or H8S compiler static member variables can be displayed together with other member variables when structures are expanded in the Watch or Locals window However it will take time to display the variables if the window contains a large amount of debugging information To select not to display static member variables when structures are expanded in the Watch or Locals window 1 Select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box 2 Select the Confirmation tab
121. time To do this you can substitute the specific name of the file for a general Placeholder c myedit myeditor exe FULLFILE Now whenever the HEW launches the editor with a file it knows that it has to replace the FULLFILE placeholder with the file you have selected 5 2 Inserting a placeholder To insert a placeholder select in any of the following operations Example 1 1 Place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder 2 Click the placeholder button A pop up menu will be displayed which lists all of the placeholders that are valid for the associated edit box 3 Select the desired placeholder from the pop up menu The equivalent placeholder will be inserted into the edit box Filename Confieuration directors Project directory Workspace directory HEW installation directory Workspace name Project name Configuration name 357 2CENESAS 5 Placeholders Example 2 1 Select the required placeholder other than Custom directory from the drop down list box and specify a sub directory relative to the directory shown by the placeholder 2 Ifyou select Custom directory specify an absolute directory path in the Sub Directory field Relative to Configuration directory Sub Directory Example 3 1 Place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder 2 Select the required placeholder from the drop down list box 3 Click Insert
122. to edit 3 Select the macro function in the Macro functions that you want to edit 4 Click the Edit button 5 The Macro dialog box is dismissed and the file opened in the HEW editor 15 8 Assigning a macro It is possible to assign a macro to either a custom menu item toolbar or keyboard shortcut This allows you to quickly access macros which you often use It is possible to assign a single macro to a Tools menu Macros toolbar and keyboard shortcut all at the same time if you want A custom menu and a toolbar button are shown in alphabetical order 216 2CENESAS 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility To assign a macro to a toolbar button l os Te ee Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed Select the macro file which contains the function you want to assign Select the macro function in the Macro functions list that you want to assign Click the Assign button The Macro assign dialog box 1s displayed Select the Assign to Toolbar check box You can now modify the macro description in the Description field This will be used as the toolbar tool tip if you assign the macro to a toolbar button Now you can decide whether you will use the default macro toolbar button or specify your own toolbar button image from an existing bitmap file bmp To specify your own image simply click the browse button to open a standard file browser This will allow you to manually locate the fi
123. two bytes two bytes worth of a character can be specified Please use the Set dialog box to specify the character string Select menu Set 17 3 5 Copying an area of memory You can copy an area of memory using the memory copy feature Select a copy source address range in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Move option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Move dialog box is displayed start Address jononoono End Address o0o0oo7F Move Address fs Length libyte Verity Cancel Enter the copy destination start address in the Move Address field Select the Verify check box Support for verify function depends on the debugging platform 288 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger If you did not drag the copy source address range you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value Drag and Drop Type of dropped data Operation Selected range on the Memory Window s Data area Copy the contents of a selected range of data to an area starting from the dropped position 17 3 6 Comparing the memory contents The contents of two memory blocks can be compared Select a source address range in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Compare option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Compare Memory dialog box is displayed Compare Memory Start Address ponon
124. up menu item associated with display of error messages the line of the error message will be highlighted and the editor will show the source code of that line if the line has any source code Double clicking the line of an error message will also show the source code in the editor When you attempt an operation to display an error or warning the status bar shows this error or warning message Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation 1s allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Options Toolbar button Function Ol Highlights the next occurrence of error and shows the source code in the editor Ot Highlights the previous occurrence of error and shows the source code in the editor i Highlights the next occurrence of warning and shows the source code in the editor At Highlights the previous occurrence of warning and shows the source code in the editor Display next Error Warning Info aa Displays the editor that generated the next build error or warning Display previous Error Warning Info at Displays the editor that generated the previous build error or warning Help a Shows the help information about the line Go to Error Warning Info Goes to the associated source line Clear Window E Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the con
125. use an application wide or workspace wide placeholder Click the Add button which is adjacent to the list you require The Add New Placeholder dialog box is displayed 4 Inthe fields provided choose a suitable name for the placeholder and a description of what the placeholder means 5 Choose a directory which relates to this placeholder It is possible to use placeholders that are already defined in this field such as PROJDIR Note In HEW V 2 01 or later version the user defined directory can be set as the custom placeholder which can be used for setting the toolchain option When the directory path is specified specify an absolute path in Directory as shown in figure below Hew Custom Placeholder kiti Placeholder K USE RDIR Cancel Description User define directory Directory C AUser Sre Browse 6 4 Using the workspace and project log facilities The HEW has workspace and project logging facilities integrated into the application These facilities can be switched on via the log tab on the Tools customize dialog This option is especially useful when the network database is in operation This is because user names and changes are logged to this file 117 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Log M Generate build log Path shWORKSPDIRMStWORKS PAAME log gt Browse I Generate workspace log I Generate log for projects When the Generate workspace log is click
126. will reset any custom positions that you may have setup during your session To show or hide toolbar tooltips 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed 2 Set the Show Tooltips checkbox as desired 114 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 2 Customizing the Tools menu The Tools menu can be customized to include your own menu options To add a new menu option l ow e a ae Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed Select the Menu tab The first thing you need to decide is whether you are adding a global application wide tool which will be available to all of your workspaces or whether you wish to add a workspace wide tool which is only valid for the current workspace Once you have chosen choose the relevant section of the dialog Menu Application wide tools Hame Version IE OL E Moditp Eemarve workspace wide tools Add Madiiy Remove ji Click the Add button The Add Tool dialog box will be invoked If you would like to add an existing system tool to the menu then select the Select from existing tools radio button choose the tool from the drop down list and then click the OK button Alternatively if you would like to add a tool of your own then follow the remaining steps Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the command excluding
127. window is read only and cannot be edited The Disassembly window pop up menu will contain a menu item to open the current file for editing When debugging and stepping through source code the Disassembly window will automatically switch to the relevant source file which contains the current PC address making this simple for you when debugging Whilst the Disassembly window is open there will be no standard editor windows opened the source files will be opened within the Disassembly window view as necessary When stepping into an area of disassembly that has no associated source code line the source mode will switch to disassembly mode You can use disassembly source mode as primary debug view If this facility is available the following actions will be performed If the Disassembly window is open and in Disassembly mode then when a break occurs at a known source address the Disassembly window will switch to source mode If the Disassembly window is open then when a break occurs no other editor windows are When a break occurs the window order will not be changed automatically If you wish to continue step in Disassembly mode of the Disassembly window select the Debug gt Step mode gt Assembly After a break occurs the HEW displays the location of the program counter PC In some cases for example if a project has been moved from its original path the source files may not be automatically 270 2CENESAS 17 Using the De
128. workspace where you wish to generate a makefile if the workspace includes two or more projects the active project must be one in which you wish to generate a makefile 2 Select a configuration for generating a makefile Select the Build gt Generate Makefile menu option 4 The Generate Makefile dialog box is displayed 75 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features Generate Makefile Ei Generate makefile for the current configuration in the currently active project Cancel i fall configurations in the currently active project all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace Makefile name PROJECTNAME CONFIGNAME mak gt Makefile format HM ake i Relative paths Workspace directory and below only Use static sub command files M Scan dependencies whilst building make file 5 Select a makefile type in Generate makefile for e the current configuration in the currently active project e all configurations in the currently active project e all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace 6 Enter the file name in the MakeFile name edit box To insert a placeholder place the cursor at the position where you wish to insert the placeholder click the placeholder button fay and select Placeholder from the pop up menu The default makefile names are as follows e When the current configuration in the currently active project is selected PROJECTNAME CO
129. 0 B E INTHandler YECTTBL IntPRG PResetPRs F i BSEC c DISEC D Power layPRG E F 5 RSTHandler aooaa OOOOODS QOOO00DSS OOOOOTSS OOO00DSs4 OOOOODS QOOOO1000 OOOOLOEF QOOOO0Z000 OOOOETED adderet OOODEB4AS OOO06B44 OOOO6B4B QOOUBB4c OOOOEBS QOOU6BSS OOOUEBES OOO0Z000 OOOOZOSF 70000000 FOOO0SEB FTOOOOSEC YOOOOSF TSFFFBFO Y3FFFFEF AQOOOOOO AQOOO01B OOO00558 gogz e oooo00004 oooo0070 OOO047BE OOO00384 Oooo0000s oooo00o00 oooo000n0 OOOOO0O0S0 F GHOOGESEC oooo00n0 OoOoOo00400 GOGREULe The map information and section settings of the linkage editor e The left pane shows the map information and section settings of the linkage editor Section settings of the linkage editor are displayed tg ty Section Name Start Address End Address Size Overlay The section settings after a build While in the edit mode locations of subsection groups overlay groups and sections can be changed by drag and drop If anything is dropped into a different section group this item is added to the last of other items in the section group A section dropped into a section group subsection group or overlay group is added to the next of the item where dropped e The right pane shows the section settings after a build Nothing is displayed in this pane if there is no linkage list file map output by the linkage editor You can adjust the column width by dragging the mouse on a column header Moreove
130. 1 Templates When developing software it is often necessary to enter the same text repeatedly for instance when typing a function definition for loop or a comment block for a function The HEW editor allows you to specify a block of text or template which can be inserted into the currently active Editor window Thus once a template has been defined it can be automatically inserted without the need to re enter it manually Figure below shows a list of templates which is located on the Templates tab of the Workspace window File oe E Toolchain Templates E Templates Any new templates which have been added to the HEW are displayed under the Templates folder The Toolchain Templates folder is for templates which are read only and have been provided for use in the HEW system by the current toolchain Templates in this view can be dragged for insertion into an editor file It is also possible to drag an area of text from the editor into the templates folder for quick template creation Right clicking on the Templates folder opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Function Add Adds a new template Remove Removes the current selection Edit Edits the current selection 4 11 1 Defining a template To define a template 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Define Templates dialog box e Click the Define Template toolbar button CIP OR e Select the Edit gt
131. 11 2tENESAS 5 Tools Administration 112 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 Customizing the Environment 6 1 Customizing the toolbars The High performance Embedded Workshop provides standard toolbars as detailed in the Toolbars topic In addition to these you may also construct your own toolbars Toolbars Toolbars W Show Tooltips Mew Reset ea Reset Positions Version Control Default Window Iw Debug Aun ae H Toolbar name Editor To create a new toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed 2 Click the New button The New Toolbar dialog box will be displayed Enter the name of the new toolbar into the Toolbar Name field 4 Click the OK button to create the new toolbar Note When a new toolbar is created it will appear undocked i e floating and empty To add buttons to a toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed Select the Commands tab 2 Browse the available buttons by selecting the button categories from the Categories list Select a button from the Buttons area to display information on its operation 3 Click and drag a button from the dialog box onto the toolbar 113 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Command Categories Debug Bookmarks Select a category then click a button to see its descript
132. 2 Defining Version Control Commands uu cceccccecceeeececcecceeccccceeceeececceecceeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeees 136 8 3 DOC Chr y ma ct CUI INES sssr sane socseotonace vane E eae 137 8 4 Specitymg conNeEN S serssserassdai nii deed E ANE E aN ANENE 137 8 5 Executable rri Codo erai EE E E dedansaassaunndeediauenstoennsasl 137 8 6 Specityme Nle locAl ons ressa 138 8 7 Specifying file locations example secrecions ni eTa EEE NENNT 139 8 8 Specii ne CNY iron essri nea EEE AEAEE EEEE EEEE EE E EET 140 8 9 Controlling execution of a Version Control System cccccccccccccccccccccececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 2CENESAS Table Of Contents 8 10 Specifying a user name and password c cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceccececeeececececeeececeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeees 141 8 11 Usage example of the Custom Version Control System ccccccccccccccccecececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 142 S11 Connectine the HEW With RCS c ciscscstecvesessotanaciencanatseisrnadsanndstadenadetncnnadeadeenecatecseadssens 142 8 11 2 Connecting the HEW with CVS 2 0 ccccccesssesesesessssesseesseesseseseeeeesssssssssessagaaaaas 147 9 Usine Visual Sour eSa Cen E E E E 155 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a workspace neenesesenseseseseseesenreneeeeeerreereerrrrrrrrerrreee 155 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands cccccceesssssscceceeeeeeeeeeesseeeesssssneeeeeeeeeeeeseseeseeeesssaaaaaaaaeees 157 9 2 1 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe cccccccsccscsccccccccccee
133. 3 Select a directory and then click the Open button Any files that could not be found in this directory will invoke the Locate Files dialog box allowing you to search for the unlocated files You can also relocate files via the pop up menu item shown for files To relocate a file to a different directory 1 Right click on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Select the Relocate file s menu item Selecting this will bring up a standard windows file open dialog box Please select new location of file EI EY Ci Es Look in Sy Debug Emulator E File name Files of type ztdlib h od Cancel 3 This dialog will only allow you to select a file of the same name 4 Select a file and then click the Open button You can select multiple files to be relocated this will bring up the Locate Files dialog box with the files to be relocated in the files to find section 5 Displaying main functions on download The HEW automatically displays the source file including main functions in source mode within the HEW editor after downloading modules To display main functions on download 1 Select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box 2 Select Debug tab 3 Select the Displaying main functions on download checkbox By default this checkbox is not selected 4 Click OK 5 Download a module For details on download see section 17 1 5 2 Downloading modules 264 2CENESAS
134. 5 Relative projects paths in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop when you add a project you can choose to add the project to the workspace using a relative path This allows you to position a file above the workspace directory and it will still be relocated correctly if you relocate the HEW workspace The project is always relative to the workspace so 1f the project is one directory above the workspace before it is moved the HEW will try to find the project in the same relative location after the relocation procedure This is especially useful if you are using a project shared between more than one workspace In older versions of HEW this project would not have been relocated and would have still tried to access the original file path The older version of HEW could only relocate the projects which were in a sub directory of the workspace directory This is still the standard behavior for the High performance Embedded Workshop To add the project to the workspace using a relative path 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click on the selected project to invoke a pop up menu 3 Select the Properties option 4 Click the Project relative file path checkbox to switch the relative file path feature 5 Click OK Project file specified as a relative path in the HWS file 60 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features 3 Advanced Build Features This chapter explains the advanced build concepts 3 1 The bui
135. 6 17 3 27 Customizing the current colors cccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeess 296 17 4 Displaying memory contents as an Mae ccccceessseesssssssseseeseeesseseeeeeeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeas 297 17 4 1 Opening the Image Window cccccccccccccccccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 297 17 4 2 Automatically updating the window Contentts cccccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 299 17 4 3 Updating the window Contents ccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 300 17 4 4 Displaying the pixel information cece ccccccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 300 17 5 Displaying memory contents as Waveforms cccccceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 300 17 5 1 Opening the Waveform Window ccccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 300 17 5 2 Automatically updating the window Contentts cccccccccccccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 302 17 5 3 Updating the window contents ccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 302 USA Zoomin display eee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee eee eee ere 302 BY Zoom ou t display xcocsacasenessacssnsaiwsnascardonkenenessca enaesaeiaiaskesearees eaene ae ieee 302 17 536 Resetting the zoomi display s eccireirern i eRe EE NEAN a 302 17 5 7 Settme th zoom MASI C
136. 69 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features like a build phase to take files output from a previous build phase these files are called intermediate files then you must define this in the File Mappings tab of the Build Phases dialog box Build Order Build File Qrder File Mappings Intermediate file mappings for build Add oH Assembler QptLinker Object tile SH GCG Gom SH Assembler Assembly source file Moditi SH O4G Com OptLinker Object tile SH G4G Libra OptLinker Library file F Eemove A File Mapping means that you would like the output files of a certain type produced by one build phase referred to as the Source phase to another build phase referred to as the Destination phase Such intermediate files are then passed in addition to the project files To add a file mapping 1 Click the Add button The Define File Mapping dialog box will be invoked 2 Select an existing file group to use for the new mapping from the File group drop down list 3 Select the source phase 1 e the phase that generates the files from the Source phase drop down list 4 Select the destination phase i e the phase that takes these files from the Destination phase drop down list 5 Click the OK button to create the new mapping Define File Mapping Sie e re e m Cancel EH ssembler Destination phase OptLinker To modify a file mapping 1 Select the mapping to be modifi
137. 7 12 7 Multiple steps Sometimes you may find it useful to step through several instructions at a time You can do this by using the Step Program dialog box The dialog box also provides an automated step with a selectable delay between steps Open it by choosing the Debug gt Step menu option The Step Program dialog box is displayed 314 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Step Program Sheps i Delay 25 seconds Cancel Step over calls lM Source level step cI a i x Steps Number of steps to be executed By default this value is 1 Delay Delay between steps when the program is automatically stepped No Refresh Prevents the update of the windows or 0 to 3 seconds can be selected in 0 5 second units By default this value is 2 5 seconds Step over calls Selecting this box steps over function calls By default this checkbox is not selected Source level step Selecting this box steps the program at the source level By default this checkbox is selected Click the OK button or press Enter to start stepping 17 13 Stopping your program This section describes how you can halt execution of your application s code This section describes how to do this directly by using the Halt toolbar button CS and by setting breakpoints at specific locations in your code 17 13 1 Halting execution When your program is running the Halt Program toolbar button is enabled Ci and when the program has stopped it is disab
138. 97 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 11 2 Deleting a template To delete a template 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Define Templates dialog box e Click on the Define Template toolbar button CIP OR e Select the Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates menu option OR e Right click on the Templates in the Templates tab of the workspace window and select Edit from the pop up menu OR e Right click in the editor window and select Templates gt Define Templates from the pop up menu 2 Use the Template Name drop down list to select the name of the template you wish to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Clicking the OK button saves the changes and closes the dialog box To remove selected templates using the Templates tab of the Workspace window 1 Select the templates that you want to remove in the Templates tab of the Workspace window Multiple templates can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key 2 Right click on the Templates within the Templates tab of the workspace window and select Remove from the pop up menu 4 11 3 Inserting a template To insert a template 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Insert Template dialog box e Click the Insert Template toolbar button I OR e Select the Edit gt Templates gt Insert Template menu option OR e Right click in the editor window and select Templates gt Insert Templates from the pop up menu 2 Us
139. AL ON sipasssinovscravnsarcvevnsnsaneuendriacwasdesveveedsadapnedsananmadraactesseweatiends 302 17 5 8 Setting the horizontal scale 0000000neennnnnnnnnenesesessessrressrrreerrrerererrererrerrrrrrrrerrerereereens 302 17 5 9 WN on display Of CUTSOT isos ctciesessnciiiesedecieantiende dene ENESENN NEE NENNE ENEA 302 17 5 10 Displaying the sampling information ccccsseesssessesseseesssesessessssesssssssesseseeaeaas 303 17 6 Looking at VO Memory cccccccccccecesssseseeseeeseeseseesseseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 303 17 6 1 Opening the 1O Win scsesactinsveatadocsiresetstenusenteraciedeeeentaitea ees 303 17 6 2 Expanding an I O register display c ccccccccccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 304 17 6 3 Updating the window contents cccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 305 IOA Loading an TOTI arres E E E NENNEN 305 17 6 5 Printing the currently displayed Contents ccccccccccccccccceceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 305 17 6 6 Saving the currently displayed contents cccccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 305 17 6 7 Modifyme VO register COMING cesictscctevesedeetesensientsavacmenaxss sedate 305 Uea Looking A isterS a cats cece case ninne a E a EAE E AE EEEE E E 305 17 7 1 Opening the Register WindOw sciciccccissccsccecdectocetsendecdactnddicniesaneen E a 306 17 7 2 Changing the register disp
140. AS 17 Using the Debugger 17 1 5 Downloading modules 1 Setting the downloading a program Once you have made sure that there is memory in your system in which to download your code you can then proceed to download a program to debug The initial selection of download module is automatic with regard to an application generator as it is the output from the linker However with regard to the debug only project generator it is possible for you to browse to the module that you wish to download This is outlined in the section 17 1 2 Selecting a debugging platform Debug Settings Ei Ea SimSessionSH 4 Target Options ae SH4demo Default debug format Elt D wart Download modules HCONFIGDIRIHPARO QOOO0000 EID wart It is also possible to manually choose download modules after the project creation This is achieved via the Debug Settings dialog box This dialog box allows you to control the debug settings throughout your workspace The tree on the left of the dialog contains all of the current projects Selecting a project in this tree will then show you the settings for that project and the configuration selection in the Configuration drop down list In this list box it is possible to select multiple configurations or all configurations If you select multiple configurations you can choose to modify the settings for one or more configurations at once The Debug Settings dialog box displays the following
141. Build out of date download modules checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK 258 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 4 Showing a source tree on download debug only project While a debug only project 1 e Debugger only xxxxxx is in use a tree of source files for a download module are automatically shown in the Projects tab of the workspace window once the module has been downloaded The files for a download module are retrieved when the module is downloaded If the files are not full paths and are relative or short file names they will automatically be searched for relative to the download module directory Files that cannot be found after the initial search will be shown to you in the Locate Files dialog box However you can choose not to open the Locate Files dialog box at downloading To prevent opening of the Locate Files dialog box at downloading 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu item The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Do not show Debug only workspace browse dialog on download checkbox This checkbox is not selected by default 4 Click OK e Debuggers supporting the feature of showing a source tree This feature is only supported by the debuggers that can create debug only projects The condition of the support however depends on the debugger as shown below Debugger Condition of the Support SuperH RISC engine or H8SX H8S H8 f
142. CKSPACE Delete current word CTRL BREAK Stop build CTRL INSERT Copy CTRL TAB Switch windows in the editor CTRL HOME Returns the cursor in the editor to the beginning of the current file CTRL END Sends the cursor in the editor to the end of the current file CTRL UP ARROW Scroll window up and leave the cursor in the same place in the editor CTRL DOWN ARROW Scroll window down and leave the cursor in the same place in the editor CTRL LEFT ARROW Move the cursor to the previous word in the editor CTRL RIGHT ARROW Move the cursor to the next word in the editor CTRL ALT 1 4 Switch virtual desktop CTRL ALT PAGE UP Move to next tab For example output window CTRL ALT PAGE DOWN Move to previous tab For example output window CTRL SHIFT 8 Show white space characters in the editor CTRL SHIFT G Open image window CTRL SHIFT K Open TCL toolkit CTRL SHIFT L Line deletion in editor CTRL SHIFT M Match braces CTRL SHIFT S Save all CTRL SHIFT T Insert template CTRL SHIFT U Change into a uppercase letter all the texts chosen in the editor CTRL SHIFT V Open waveform window CTRL SHIFT Y Display PC position 365 2CENESAS 8 Keyboard Shortcuts CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT ALT None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None N
143. Debug Object Files When you create your project the initial setup will normally be configured for debug Notes e Make sure you have the debug option enabled on your compiler and linker when you generate an object file for debugging e If your debug object file does not contain any debugging information for example the S Record format then you can still load it into the debugging platform but you will only be able to debug at the assembly language level 17 1 2 Selecting a debugging platform Selecting the debugging platform is very dependent on the installation of the HEW If the HEW has a toolchain installed then the application project generator will be able to set up both the toolchain and the debugger targets simultaneously This allows the options for targets and toolchain to be matched closely so that no inconsistencies occur If there is no toolchain installed you will only be able to select debug only project types By default HEW will display a debug only project generation type for each CPU family in the New Project Workspace dialog box 239 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Hew Project Workspace Projects Project Workspace Mame Project Types m Application Tutorial Demonstration Froject Name F Empty Application Tutorial ta Import Makefile Dedan l Library Debugger only seonoce C SHE WS Tutorial Browse CPU family SuperH RISC engine Tool chain gt Renesas Super Standard
144. Debug Output Window Test image data to be saved into test image files All information in the Debug tab of the output window Test result details Original Content of the test image file New Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Original Connected New Step Normal End e Output Register Test image data to be saved into test image files All information in the Register window Test result details Failed at register Name of the unmatched register Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at register R11 Sre 0x00000000 Dest Ox00000fff When detailed setting specific to the test item can be made If you double click on a test item in the Create Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens 225 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility e CPU IO Test image data to be saved into test image files Test result details To make detailed setting Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the IO window acquired with this setting No I O register is specified by default Failed at Srce Dest Example Name of the unmatched I O register Content of the test image file Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Failed at IPRC register value is different Sre 0000 Dest FFFF 1
145. Double clicking the register display line opens a dialog box which allows you to change a register value Macro Recording e You can change a flag value by clicking the button corresponding to the flag Macro Recording e The right click menu allows you to change the display radix point and the register bank Change of the register bank can be selected only when the target platform supports this function Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Macro Recording Function Radix Hex Display in hexadecimal Dec Display in decimal Oct Display in octal Bin Display in binary Banko Display registers of bank 0 Bank Display registers of bank 1 Layout Radix Switches display or non display of radix FLAGs Switches display or non display of flags display area Settings Chooses a register to be displayed Edit D Changes a register s contents Split Splits up the window Display Save To File Saves register contents in a text file Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 7 2 Changing the register display radix You can change the display radix by register To do this click the mouse right button on the register to be changed and select the display radix from the pop up menu which is opened The followings can be selected Hex Display in hexadecimal Dec Display in decimal Oct Display in octal Bin Display in binary
146. E E There are five standard types of component Toolchain A Toolchain is a set of build phases e g compiler assembler linker and librarian These components provide the build capability System Tool A System Tool is an application EXE that can be launched from the Tools menu These are often provided as extra applications which support the toolchain e g an external debugger like the Hitachi Debugging Interface or an interactive graphical librarian Utility Phase A Utility Phase is a ready made build phase which supports some specific build functionality e g analyze complexity of source code count lines of source code etc These components provide added functionality to the build that is not toolchain specific Debugger Component A Debugger Component is a component that supports some specific debugger functionality e g CPU DLL Target platform Object reader etc Extension Component An Extension Component is a component that provides key functionality in a certain area of the HEW system These components cannot be unregistered when installed e g The HEW builder debugger and flash support 5 1 Tool locations The HEW maintains the locations of HEW compatible components automatically as each new tool is installed After installation the HEW stores information about the component including its location This is referred to as Registration Although initial registration is automatic during the course of
147. E E E OE T eee 360 O TOPE O a E E E A A E S E E E A 361 T SymbolPFile OCIA ase caesocnucosvoaeyete sodlvcossearsennscunscousanesete EEE EE EEEE TEE EEEE EEEN ia eiA 363 6 Keyboard ShoriCiig sosser ne ne E EES 365 9 Drag and Drop in the HEW Debugger eeeeenennnnnesennnsnnnsnsnsssnscsssssssssnsssssssnssssssseeees 367 10 Using Labels to View Your Cod e cccccccccccsseeeseseessssssessesssesessseeeseseseeeseeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeesaaas 369 11 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View ccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 371 12 To Build in Toolchain for HE W1 X cccccccsssssesssesseeseeesaeseseseneeeaeeeeeaeeaeaaeceaesesssseesseseessseees 373 13 HMAKE User pM ccs cae snot sec aces csc eee mcm ene accom cra buen ea maaan 375 e a me 070000071020 1h Coane een O ser Pat HONE CET eT EsTT oD ene ne scene 375 RZ BS A TE TE T E A T A E A A N E seers 375 13 3 Description blocks nnnnnnnnnnnnusunsenererrrsrrrererrrerrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrerrererrrrreseeeeseeeseseeeeereereeeeeres 376 Pak O a E E E A A sees 377 I5 Message COMMMIANG SS aeeienereisirenr Ern e nran n E a EERE EEO Ean r EERE Eada 378 X 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 Overview The functions for High performance Embedded Workshop HEW version V 4 03 00 are explained in this manual This chapter describes the fundamental concepts of the HEW 1 1 Workspaces projects and files Just as a word processor allows you to create a
148. EW must be connected to the Visual SourceSafe system Add the two files you wish to compare to the Visual SourceSafe system in advance Select one of the following operations Select a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Right click on the selected file to Open a pop up menu Select Show Differences OR Click the Compare Files toolbar button Pld OR Select the View gt Differences menu Right click within the window to open a pop up menu Select Compare The Compare Files dialog box is displayed Compare Files Reference file Jorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 dbsct c Browse a ance C Compare with file on drive Target file Advanced Browse i Compare with version control Click the Compare with version control radio button This radio button is selectable 1f the HEW has been connected to the Visual SourceSafe system Enter the name of a file to be compared to in Reference file If you have opened the Compare Files dialog box via the workspace window at step 2 the file name is already entered in Reference file Select a previously used file from the drop down list box or click the Browse button to browse a file Clicking the Advanced button displays the Compare Files Advanced Options dialog box This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog Click Compare The Difference win
149. HEW macro file Also see section 15 5 Functions that can be recorded into macro files where the HEW command line commands to be recorded are listed 1 Changing a project session or configuration 2 Compilation and build Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 3 Downloading a module changing a memory value or register value setting deleting a software breakpoint and running a program The macro recording support facility is available in the Tools menu and on the Macros toolbar Macros toolbar e c n o If the Macros toolbar is hidden select Setup gt Customize to open the Customize dialog box Select the Macros checkbox on the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box Tools Menu Macros Toolbar Function Macros Opens the Macro dialog box This dialog box has the following features and lists the macros recorded in each of the selected HEW macro files Creating a new blank macro file Importing an existing macro file Starting a macro record operation Starting a macro play function Editing a current macro file Assigning the selected macro Removing the selected macro Macro Recording i Starting a macro record operation Play Macro gt The Select Macro Function dialog box opens Choose which macro you wish to execute 00 Pausing the current macro operation Stop Macro O Stopping the current macro operation 18 2CENESAS 1 Overview The procedure from selection of Record Macro to
150. Hemave Down LLL Then click Add The debugger will then display the add Command Line File dialog box Command Line File Tax Filename gt Browse HK Initial Directory gt Browse Cancel F Apply to all timings Enter the command batch file name in the Filename field If you wish to insert a placeholder into the Filename field click the placeholder button faa and select the placeholder from the pop up menu To browse a file click the Browse button In the Initial Directory field enter the name of the directory where you wish to execute the command batch file By this setting you can also use command batch files that have relative paths If you wish to insert a placeholder into the Initial Directory field click the placeholder button E and select the placeholder from the pop up menu To browse a directory click the Browse button Selecting the Apply to all timings check box adds the batch file to every timing At target connection Before downloading the modules After downloading the modules and After reset Click OK to add the batch file Once added it can moved into the correct place in the order by using the Up and Down buttons This is only valid if you are adding multiple command line batch files Other options Option Description Do not perform automatic If this checkbox is selected the target is not connected until you select Debug gt Connect target connection 1 By default this
151. Import Session H Lo T Ste fun ia Description This dialog box allows instant selection of either the default HEW keyboard shortcuts or the PD debugger shortcuts To change the entire keyboard layout select an item in the Default keyboard layout drop down list By default it uses the High performance Embedded Workshop settings A number of operations are possible on this dialog box To add a new keyboard shortcut 1 Select the main menu category of the command you wish to modify Itis only possible to modify the commands that have a menu Only some cases are special that allow modification these are named global 2 Select the command you wish to modify or add a new keyboard shortcut for in the Commands list 3 The current shortcut is displayed in the Current keyboard shortcut field 119 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 4 Enter the new shortcut in the New keyboard shortcut field Various combinations of buttons can be used here For example CTRL J or CTRL SHIFT 0 etc If the chosen shortcut is already in use it is displayed below the New keyboard shortcut field 5 Ifyou are happy with your selection click the Assign button 6 Changes are not saved until the OK button 1s clicked on the Customize dialog box To remove a keyboard shortcut 1 Select the main menu category of the command you wish to modify It is only possible to modify the commands that have a menu Only some cases are special
152. Loading a memory area from a file Split Saving an area of memory Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 3 2 Modifying memory contents To change the contents of memory follow the procedure below 1 In place edit in the data display area code display area 00 00 O Data display area Code display area 2 To change the contents of memory open the Set dialog box by selecting one of the following operations e Double click the data display area code display area you want to change OR e Select the data you want to change and choose the Set option from the pop up menu 286 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Address O0000000 z ral Data m Data Type o ie Value tring Length byte Enter the value value or character to be set in the Data field Select the Verify check box Support for verify function depends on the debugging platform When setting the value Click the Value button in the Data Type group Specify the data length in the Length field When setting the character Click the String button in the Data Type group Specify the character code in the Code field 17 3 3 Selecting a memory range If the memory address range is in the Memory view you can select the range by clicking on the first
153. M Mork SDebug nlysDebug_E mulatos Tutorial abs 00000000 a C PERS file J hoc libh CAH EW Workspace Debugi0aly 0 ebugilnlySourcesbrk h CAHEW Ww orkepace Debugnly D ebugllnlysS ourcesort h vee CANHEW Mrorkspace Debuglnly 0 ebuglnlw Sourcestacksct h a machine h feras stddef h hun stdio h A stdlib h Ey a C source file oe E CAH EW ork spacesDebuglnlysDebugl nly S ourcesdbsct c poo hu E CAREW Workspace Debug nly D ebug nly S ourcesbrk c i a C source file Eevee E CAREW Workspace SD ebuglinlyDebuglnlysS ource esetprg cpp bese E CAREW Workspace DO ebuginly0 ebuglnly Sourcesort cpp fae E CAH EW Workspace Debug nly D ebugllrlyS ounce Tutorial cop bese E Dependencies If you wish to relocate files in the download module to a different directory this is possible via pop up menu c Relocating files to a different directory If you wish to relocate the whole module 1 e want to relocate all files in the module to a different directory this is possible via the download module pop up menu To relocate all files in the module to a different directory 1 Right click on a download module in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Select the Relocate Module menu item Selecting this will bring up a standard windows directory open dialog box Please select new location of module files EI EY Look irr E Debug _Ernulator de t i i Cancel 2 263 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger
154. MP C 4 Temp Cancel To add a new environment variable 1 Click the Add button The Environment Variable dialog will be invoked 2 Enter the variable name into the Variable field 3 Enter the variable s value into the Value field 4 Click the OK button to add the new variable to the Environment tab To modify an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment tab 2 Click the Modify button The Environment Variable dialog box will be invoked 3 Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields 4 Click the OK button to modify the environment variable Environment arnable EI EY Variable OF pm K Cancel Value l Placeholder SIT OOLDIR sbin pop up Hen To remove an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment tab 2 Click the Remove button Note Placeholder pop up menus are included to ensure that the environment can be specified as flexibly as possible For further information about using placeholders see Reference 5 Placeholders 107 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 5 6 Uninstalling a component The HEW provides a built in Tools Uninstaller which can remove unregistered components To run the Tools Uninstaller 1 Select the Tools gt Administration menu option 2 Click the Uninstaller button The Uninstall HEW Tool dialog box is displayed Uninstall HEW Tool 7 Select the di
155. NFIGNAME mak e When all configurations in the currently active project is selected PROJECTNAME mak e When all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace is selected WORKSPNAME mak 7 Select a makefile format in the Makefile format drop down list HEW is capable of generating GNUMake HMake and NMake compatible files 8 In the Relative paths drop down list select how directories within the makefile should be expressed Workspace directory and below only is the default option See the table below for details Option Workspace Directory and below Outside the Workspace Directory None Absolute path Absolute path Workspace directory and below only Relative path Absolute path All Relative path Relative path Note While a SuperH or H8 family toolchain is in use this option is fixed to Workspace directory and below only 9 Selecting the Use static sub command files checkbox will generate separate command files in the make destination directory By default this checkbox is not selected Note While a SuperH or H8 family toolchain is in use the Use static sub command files checkbox has a fixed tick if you have selected GNUMake in Makefile format 10 Selecting the Scan dependencies whilst building make file checkbox will execute a dependency scan before creation of a makefile This checkbox is selected by default 11 Click OK 76 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features The HEW will c
156. Navigation tab to display a pop up menu Select Go to Definition To jump to the declaration Select either of the following ways e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu and check that Jump To Definition On Double Click is unchecked Double click a navigation item on the Navigation tab 182 2CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu Select Go to Declaration To list the member variables and functions in the alphabetical order 1 Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu 2 Un check Group by Access This option is unchecked by default To group the display of public private and protected member variables and functions together 1 Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu 2 Check Group by Access This option is unchecked by default Note that Group By File and Group By Access cannot both be on at the same time Switching one on will switch the other one off Another useful facility is the capability of viewing the base or derived classes for a certain selection To view the Base or derived classes 1 Right click on class on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu 2 To see the derived classes for the selection click the Show Derived Classes menu item To see the base classes for the selection click the Show Base Classes menu item
157. OK If the confirmation is selected not to be shown again the default behavior will be Yes To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Show dialog to search on OK for directory browse dialog checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK If you select the OK button after selecting a directory and not selecting search a confirmation box will be shown as below Confirmation Request Pi x 1 The directory CASHEW MYorkspace D ebuglinlysDebugdnlyS ounce has been selected but not searched Would you like to search this directory for the remaining files T Don t ask this question again If you select Yes a search will be made and the Locate Files dialog box will remain open allowing you to stop the search if needed Selecting No will invoke the message box and close the Locate Files dialog box If the confirmation is ticked not to be shown again the default behavior will be No To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Show message when canceling for directory browse dialog checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK 261 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger b Showing a source tree Files retrieved from the download modu
158. OL KS DACC ecroienssnoradieuiane noiai aa a O E aa a O E 12 1 6 Opening GW OTKS PACE sisisccsanesxersanseneeeaheczneschasaneeaheteeeiabseaeeoeheanneichhacteaahesweeiaphareanehesaeicbbannanaens 13 Se SUNS 0 6 7018 Cc or elo eee ee ee Re ene een rene eee ee eee eter E eee er ee eee een EE ee 13 1 8 Savine AW OR SD AC oi scissacrrasatte sasmansamacncesbentesautcsea se remnscaancansesbnednscntaaausesbisasseasaatenbaceaiamucumdieadene 13 1 9 Closing a workspace eeccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 14 O E ito e E WV a E A E EET A EE E EEE 14 L11 Component SYSTEM OV CLVICW saieisss cincesvecdesnssesencvsviednanaseednodensadnadasnsincaebiaduadachadwodesaadeadaaateucensie 14 1 12 Overview of Configurations and SeSSIONS cccccccccceccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 1 13 Overview of Macro Recording Support facility and Test Support facility eee 18 Pld Exampleof test PrOCCIUR CS a incsacdvncesasuscsodmceveserasusanegncereserasarsnountsdeiensanssagacsensancsoencdesiaend 21 1 13 2 Step 1 Recording a Macro cece cccccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 1 13 3 Step 2 Editing a macro viewing records ceecececccccccccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 24 kiA Dtp Ploomi amac Oese nie a a G EAN 26 1 13 5 Step 4 Creating a test suite cccccccccccscseseseeeeesceceeeeecsceessnsnssensnsnsns
159. OR 55 CENESAS 2 Build Basics e Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select the Build gt Update All Dependencies option from the pop up menu 2 10 Configuring the Workspace window If you right click anywhere inside the Projects tab of the Workspace window a pop up menu will be invoked Select the Configure View menu option to modify the way in which information is displayed The following four sections detail the effect of each option on the Configure View dialog box Show Dependencies Under Each File If you check the Show dependencies under each file checkbox the dependent files are shown under the including source file as a flat structure i e the files themselves become folders as in figure ii below If this option is not selected then a separate folder contains all dependencies as in figure i below 0 at Workspace Of x ti at Workspace OF x Sieg Demo EH Assembly source file I a Assembly source file oc 2 lowlvl sre bbe lowlvl src 5j C source file a C source file an E dbset c ow dbsct c Dema 6 Demo c ae intprg c A intprg c me lows e vecth resetprg c 2 lowsre c shrk ic lowerc A i vecttbl c resetpra c Dependencies E stackscth E lowesre h E sbrk c E sbrk h ED sbrk h L E stackscth B E vecttbl c H E vecth n E vecth Ol Projects Show Standard Library Includes
160. ORKSPNAME HEW Installation directory HEWDIR 14 9 Selecting all the window contents Choose Select All from the pop up menu to select all contents in the Command Line window 14 10 Copying the selection onto the clipboard Choose Copy from the pop up menu to copy the selected text block onto the Windows clipboard Only available if the test block is selected 14 11 Cutting out the selection to the clipboard Choose Cut from the pop up menu to remove the selected text block and copy them onto the Windows clipboard This option is available only when you have selected the text block currently being input at the latest cursor position 14 12 Pasting the contents of the clipboard Choose Paste from the pop up menu to insert the content of the Windows clipboard at the current cursor position This option can only be used when the cursor is at the last line 14 13 Clearing the window contents Choose Clear from the pop up menu to clear the contents of the Command Line window 14 14 Undoing the last operation Choose Undo from the pop up menu to undo the last operation at the latest cursor position on the text currently being input 204 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line 14 15 Checking brace matching While the Brackets Opened Indicator toolbar button is displayed users can see if brackets match The button cannot be operated Once an opening bracket or 1s input and the nesting follows the Brackets
161. Open the Watch window 2 Choose Add Watch from the pop up menu 3 The Add Watch dialog box opens Add Watch Varable or expressiory Cancel m EE x 4 Enter the name of the variable that you wish to watch and click OK The variable is added to the Watch window A variable can be dragged from the editor window or disassembly window in source mode and dropped into the Watch window Note If the variable that you have added is a local variable that is not currently in scope the HEW will add it to the Watch window but its value will be Not available now 333 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger c Expanding a watch item If a watch item is a pointer array or structure then you will see a plus sign expansion indicator to left of its name this means that you can expand the watch item To expand a watch item click on it The item expands to show the elements in the case of structures and arrays or data value in the case of pointers indented by one tab stop and the plus sign changes to a minus sign If the elements of the watch item also contain pointers structures or arrays then they will also have expansion indicators next to them To collapse an expanded watch item click on the item again The item s elements will collapse back to the single item and the minus sign changes back to a plus sign d Editing a watch item s value You may wish to change the value of a watch variable e g for
162. Opened Indicator toolbar button is visible a until J or is input as the closing bracket Example of a TCL Function Input in the State Toolbar Button is Visible Command Line Window gt set bit 1 None a 1 None an gt set value None ea 1 None B gt setr 1 None B 1 None B gt if bit amp value Opening brace is input B gt setr O r None ial gt else Opening and closing braces are input ial gt setr 1 r None ial gt Closing brace is input ial None B 205 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line 206 2CENESAS 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility The macro recording support facility allows you to record operations which are associated with the HEW system applications 1 build 2 and debugging 3 as HEW command line commands or to execute these recorded commands Files to record the operations HEW macro files are command line batch files that have hdc as the extension and can be modified These files are stored in the Macro directory under the HEW installation directory By default the file Default hdc is created Note however that HEW is not capable of recording all operations in the HEW system corresponding to the HEW command line commands For the operations that can be recorded a macro record icon is shown in the Macro Recording column of the menu list This indicates that this operation can be recorded into
163. SS sf Component Result Details ei CPU Memory SinSessionsH 4 SUCCESS Ba Symbol Watch SimsessiansH 4 SUCCESS Ts 32 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics 2 Build Basics This chapter explains the general basic functions of the High performance Embedded Workshop HEW whilst the more advanced features can be found in chapter 3 Advanced Build Features 2 1 The build process The typical build process is outlined in the figure below This may not be the exact build process that your installation of HEW will use as it depends upon the tools that were provided with your installation of HEW you may not have a compiler for instance In any case the principles are the same each phase of the build takes a set of project files and builds them if every file builds successfully then the next phase is executed INPUT OUTPUT Rea BUILD a 4 COMPILER Se C sek Files S a ASSEMBLER PROJECT a ka Files an UNKER ONER he Files Files module In the example shown in the figure above the Compiler is the first phase the Assembler is the second phase and the Linker is the third and final phase During the Compiler phase the C C source files from the project are compiled in turn During the Assembler phase the assembler source files are assembled in turn During the Linker phase all library files and output files from the Compiler and Assembler phases are linked together to produce the loa
164. TE E E eee eee 101 AAD Eyasi AMCCX PLCS S100 eersirsirri ierni siran iard ii EOE Ea EE EAEE E a 102 Toob Admins ratO esaera ia aa ai 103 5al Tooo O e a E E saunter taasnatoesnaeeetnnes 103 5352 HEW Te GIS ATION TIES lt 2 craneasnsronnsdosnonesteamnanasnermacasuctoasesnsaanesteasnadaseennadasuanensasebuenantaumhasaseenades 104 5 3 RGESISICHNG A compone ercer E a N aii 105 iii Table Of Contents 5 4 Unregistering a COMPONENL ccc eeeeeeeeeeseesssssssseeesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessssssssasssssaeaaaaas 106 5 5 Viewing and editing component properties 0 0 eccccccccesecceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeecececceeeceeseeceeeeeeeeess 106 5 6 Un Stalin a compone Messierin a a a E O i 108 5 7 Technical s0ppor crescini eee eee ei rE EEEE eee ener ener AE TEREE 109 5 8 Using On Demand component ccccceeesesssssessesseseseesessessssaesaaessssassssaaeassaeaeesasasaaaaaas 110 5 9 CS COTM PEO FC CL Ly E T E T E E E 111 Customizing the Environment ssseoesseeseseeeesesssssessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssnssnsssnssnnnnnssnnneno 113 6 1 Cu stomizing the TOOL AES paisicasiccrscsacteceats tia vataianacecedaavcadesanacsiadnecanteeuicsssdadsectasnddsit sano aces 113 6 2 Customizing the Tools MCI s siscncsasesscdansasieavnadsiadsnaassacanaasadequeatiuateadsiedguadiaaasasasadeaneaieoxt eee 115 6 3 Using custom placeholders 2 ccc lt scssccccscsceeacsessacecteaseeocsseaacsessanenedaeesaseateasdencsessacscasansmadoesaases 116
165. Templates gt Define Templates menu option OR e Right click on the Templates in the Templates tab of the workspace window and select Edit from the pop up menu OR e Right click in the editor window and select Templates gt Define Templates from the pop up menu 96 2CENESAS Define Templates shortcuts El 4 Using the Editor ree erie uf User Input F Click the Add button The Add Template dialog box is displayed which asks you to enter your chosen template name This name must be unique otherwise a duplicated template name message will be displayed and the template will not be added If you want to modify an existing template use the Template Name drop down menu to select which template you want to modify Enter the desired text into the Template Text area You can copy text from another Editor window and then paste it into this dialog box using CTRL V Enter the following placeholder to insert special information when the template is inserted Menu Entry File path name File name File leaf Workspace name Project name Line number Time Date text Date day month year Date month day year Date year month day User name Cursor position Placeholder FULLFILE FILENAME FILELEAF WORKSPNAME PROJECTNAME LINE TIME DATE_TEXT DATE DMY DATE MDY DATE_ YMD USER CURSOR Replaced With Filename including full path Filename excluding path including ext
166. The dialog box operates like a standard Windows Open file dialog box select the file and click Open 99 to start loading The standard file extension for symbol files is sym 325 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 7 Saving labels into a file Choose Save As from the pop up menu to open the save symbols dialog box The save symbols dialog box operates like a standard Windows Save As dialog box Enter the name for the file in the File name field and click Save to save the HEW s current label list to a symbol file The standard file 99 extension for symbol files is sym See Reference 7 Symbol File Format for symbol file format Once a file is specified by the Save As menu the current symbol table can be saved in the same symbol file just by choosing Save from the pop up menu 8 Searching for a label Choose Find from the pop up menu to open the Find Label dialog box Find Label Address Cancel W Match whole word only Match case 1 Enter the label name that you wish to find into the Name field or select a label name that you have searched before from the drop down list box 2 Enter the address of the label that you wish to find into the Address field or select an address that you have searched before from the drop down list box 3 To find the label having the name entered in the Name field select the Match whole word only check box When this option is not selected the HEW search
167. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http Awww renesas com Send any inquiries to hitp www renesas com inquiry CENESAS 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is granted
168. User GO User click STEP in session 1 STEP No activities must STEP manually by User User click STEP in session 2 No activities must STEP manually by User STEP User click ESC in session BREAK Still executing if previously executing User Target Program User click ESC in session 2 Still executing if previously executing User BREAK Target Program BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or due Still executing if previously executing User to illegal User Program Target Program Still executing if previously executing User BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or Target Program due to illegal User Program RESET CPU in session 1 RESET CPU No activities RESET CPU in session 2 No activities RESET CPU Note Another difference to the standard debugging system is that it is possible to view the download modules in the workspace window for all synchronized sessions This allows modules to be downloaded for any of the available sessions easily 17 18 Debugging functions dependent on the debugging platform The debugging functions listed in this section are not common to all HEW products included in tool packages User s manual and help information just include descriptions of these debugging functions as the previous version did This section covers only some of the functions available with SuperH RISC engine family or H8 H8S and H8SX family debugging platforms
169. Using the Debugger When the radix and flags are displayed Value Radix RO OOOO001L0 Hex Rl OOOO00FO Hex Ra OOO40001 Hex bi MD RE EL FD M Q IMASE Is IMSE Iz a Sa Pale 33k 1 l IMASE 1 IMASE IO 5 T FR 52 PR ON 1 1 01l 1 CAUSE Ej CAUSE V CAUSE z CAUSE 0 CAUSE U T T 0 0 0 CAUSE IJ ENABLE Y ENABLE 2 ENABLE O T 0 0 j ENABLE U ENABLE I FLAG FLAG 2 FLAG O 0 0 0 0 0 FLAG U FLAG I RM1 RAO T 0 0 1 17 7 5 Choosing a register to be displayed To choose a register to be displayed in the Register window choose Settings menu from the register pop up menu This dialog box is shown in following figure Settings 7 Registers A RIO IMACH sae Mint IMACL MIRI IPR IRI WISSA MIRT MISPC MIRIS IRO_BANK IPC IR1_BANK ish IR2_BANK IGER IR3_BANK MVEA MIRA BANK Unselect all Cancel rele ale IMA IS i T MIMAKI IW FR A MASE WSZ MASE I0 308 sQENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 7 6 Modifying register contents To change register contents follow the procedure below Enter a value in the Value field of the register you want to change MDORBBL To change a register s contents open the Set Value dialog by selecting one of the following operations e Double click the register you want to change OR e Select the register you want to change and choose the Edit option from the pop up menu PO Set Wa
170. View Workspace View Disassembly Commpare Wiel Command Line files Output er ke l a S Standard toolbar Build Stop Build Launch Launch T H r oie Fier Gescion External Slave Build File Bui ontiguration Debugger HE D p besa Debug z SimSessonS H 4 T At det Version Control toolbar This toolbar is only available when a version control tool is being used in the current project Check Out Files Remove Files Check In Files Add Files Get Files Status OF Files Ph So o A a 2CENESAS 1 Overview Map toolbar Macros toolbar You can add a customized button to which a created macro has been assigned on the right to the standard macro buttons on the toolbar as shown below Play Macro Pause Macro Record wero stop Macro hd C u o Debug toolbar This toolbar is only available when a session is being used which has a target attached Enabler Disable Breakpoint Toggle Decimal Bman Disconnect Hex Octal Connect Ap i 2 PR Breakpoint Debug Run toolbar This toolbar is only available when a session is being used which has a target attached Reset GPL step Over io to Cursor step Out Reset Go set PG to cursor io Step In Halt Display PC l Bij BI Bii Y Ty P STOF Ie ec When the Standard toolbar is docked it has a Control bar as shown in the figure below If you want to move the docked Standard toolbar click and drag its Control bar to the new location The figure belo
171. You must save your own files before you perform a Build Build All or Build File operation 6 10 Customizing the font in your views The HEW contains many components which you may wish to make look differently It is possible to change the font and text coloring for the views To change the look of your windows 1 Click the Setup gt Format Views menu item 2 Select the view you are interested in changing the appearance of To change all views select the All views category 3 Expand the item in the tree to see all items you can change the look of 4 Select the item Notice the tab changes on the right of this dialog box 5 Change the font or text color 6 Click OK to save the changes and the views will be automatically updated with the new coloring 126 2CENESAS Format Wiews D aed ie Text E Source EI Command Line El stack Trace H FS 10 Fl Ef Register H EE TOL Toolkit E tatus Difference E Memory FES Cutout it Mod ity 6 Customizing the Environment a Font Font Cour ler Hew Point Size fio HEW Sample Text The Format Views dialog box allows you to customize the color and font of text shown in the windows Item Source Difference Register Memory Output Disassembly All Category Selected Text PC Line Highlight Other keyword groups based on the syntax of respective file types LHS Different Lines LHS Moved Lines
172. a new compare window so that some new files can be compared and the differences displayed This opens a dialog which allows you to choose a file to export the current difference results to a textual format The ignore white space option which is on the advanced options dialog can be toggled via this menu item Displays a standard find dialog This uses the same find dialog as the HEW editor Finds the next previous string that meets the find requirements Finds the next string that meets the find requirements Automatically jumps the view to the next previous difference Automatically jumps the view to the next difference Refreshes the view to manually run the difference comparison again This can be used if either file has been modified since the last comparison Shows or hides the toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons 177 2CENESAS 11 Comparing Files 178 2CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities 12 Navigation Facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop HEW has a number of new integrated navigation facilities Workspace Be H xj 5 ni Navigation entries f Classes i Navigation category By Crish IU Class se a CFishi 7 a CFishi mi ap GetClassNamefwoid f nagg m_nLivein ater Sl S CGreathhite i CGreatwhitel E CGreathite Navigation The Navigation tab of the workspace window contains categories for all supported navigation types In HEW the following navigation compon
173. able below outlines the basic operations that are provided by the editor Operation Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Clear Select All Effect Reverses the last editing operation Repeats the last undone editing operation Removes highlighted text and places it on the Windows clipboard Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Removes highlighted text it is not copied to the Windows clipboard Selects i e highlights the entire contents of the active window Action Select Edit gt Undo Press CTRL Z Select Edit gt Redo Press CTRL Y Click the Cut toolbar button de Select Edit gt Cut Select Cut from the pop up menu Press CTRL X Click the Copy toolbar button BS Select Edit gt Copy Select Copy from the pop up menu Press CTRL C Click the Paste toolbar button amp Select Edit gt Paste Select Paste from the pop up menu Press CTRL V Select Edit gt Clear Press Delete Select Edit gt Select All Press CTRL A If you edit the file the title bar of the editor window shows an asterisk This asterisk remains until you save the file If you undo all the changes made in the file the asterisk disappears Selecting text in the editor It is possible to select text in the same manner as all editors However to access column selection
174. ace operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field Enter the text that you want to replace the search string with or select a previous replace string from the drop down list box If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then click the Match whole word only checkbox When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string If you would like your search to be case sensitive 1 e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case checkbox If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions checkbox See Reference 4 Regular Expressions for further information If you clicked the Find Next button the editor will search for the first occurrence of the search string Click the Replace button if you want to replace it Click Replace All button to replace all occurrences or click the Cancel button to stop the replace action If you select Selection in the Replace In field the replace action will be performed in the range of the selected text If you select Whole file the replace action will be performed on the whole file If you select All open files all files that are currently open in the editor will have the replace operation carried out on them Jumping to a specified line To jump to a line in a file l 2 3 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to repla
175. aches the address at which you set the PC breakpoint execution halts with the message PC Breakpoint displayed in the Debug tab and the source or disassembly view is updated with the PC breakpoint line highlighted Note The line or instruction at which you set a PC breakpoint is not actually executed the program stops just before it is about to execute it If you choose to Go or Step after stopping at the PC breakpoint then the highlighted line will be the next instruction to be executed When multiple targets are debugged it is possible to specify either or both of them is stopped For details see section 17 17 Synchronizing multiple debugging platforms To change the PC breakpoint setting by using the Breakpoints dialog box The breakpoint dialog can be displayed by selecting the Edit gt Source Breakpoints menu option It allows you to view the current breakpoints set in the workspace and view the code associated with each one From this dialog it is also possible to remove one or all breakpoints To toggle PC breakpoints It is possible to toggle PC Breakpoints either by double clicking in the breakpoint BP column of the line at which the PC breakpoint is set or by placing the caret on the line and using the F9 key The display will cycle through the available standard breakpoint types a red circle will be shown in the gutter 17 14 Viewing the current status To check the configuration and status of the debuggin
176. added with read only rights To change the access level select the user you wish to modify and then click the required radio button Then click OK to save the access rights changes To remove an existing user to the system l Se oe Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box is displayed Select the Network tab Click the Access rights button The User access rights dialog is displayed Select the user you wish to remove in the users list Press the Remove button Then click OK to save the access rights changes User access rights EES User access rights Access level Admin Admin Add Remove ACCESS C Administrator Full read write access C Readrwrite file access only f Read only access 173 2CENESAS 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities 10 5 Changing your password To change your password 1 Log into the HEW network database you are changing your password for Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box is displayed Select the Network tab Click the Password button Enter your new password and confirm it in the second edit box Click OK Then click OK to save the password change oe Ee a 10 6 Note on using the network facilities to share projects When you share a networked project for the first time the HEW automatically connects you to the correc
177. ag and drop navigation items It is possible drag and drop navigation items of defines C functions or C classes shown in the Navigation tab of the workspace window The Category C Defines C Functions and C Classes Globals Folder and File items will not be draggable Drag and drop of navigation items into a file that s currently open in the editor This makes it easier for you to write code as you will be able to drag the relevant items into the file instead of having to type them Z zl Al e cel CLOSEALL HELFSIZE INT OFFSET TOS TRE AM a Documenti e Multiple items can be dragged at the same time these will appear on separate lines e The navigation item names will be inserted in alphabetical order e Note that if you drag a function only the function s name will be dragged 184 CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities 12 5 Smart edit capability in the HEW editor Another feature of the High performance Embedded Workshop is its smart edit facility This is enabled by default for all C source files This feature allows the HEW editor to access C navigation information and provide auto completion help when using C functions defines C classes and member functions The HEW editor accesses C functions defines and C navigation information and shows the smart editor s list in a pop up window To use the Smart edit facilities 1 Click on the Setup gt Options menu item The Option
178. ain If the selected tool is not registered with the HEW the Confirmation dialog box will be displayed when the Uninstall button is clicked This dialog displays all of the files and folders that will be deleted If you are certain that these files and folders can be deleted then click the OK button To abort the uninstallation click the Cancel button 108 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration Confirmation Ei The following files and folders will be deleted CAHEW T oolstA enesast Shit x a bin C NHEW Tools AenesassSh x_ W Ctemp CNHEW Tools AenesasS he A hew CAHEW T oolstA enesast Shit include CAHEWA T ools A enesast Shi R ALIB CNHEWT oals A enesast ShA OR O sh XM hrf CNHEW Tools Aenesas ShA W sh A hut CAHEW T oolstA enesass Shin n a hy tenw bat CAHE WA Tools A enesast Shi x bna S MSH EE CAHEW T oolstA enesass Shh XX bins badriash act CAHE Ww T oolstA enesast Shi A a bins badriash exe CAHE WAT ools A enesast Shi A W Soin helfcnv ere CAHE WA T oals A enesast ShA R U bin lbgsh ere C NHEW Tools AenesassS heat Sbinsiibinic pak CAHE W T ools Aenesas Shin W r Sbinslibsre pak CAHEWAT ools AenesassS hx W Soi LnkS pawn exe CAHEW T oolstA enesass Shh XX Sb OPTLNK ESE LIC L T e Rw LLL yr ar rL LEL LLunlLi nm Are you sure you want to delete the above files and folders Cancel 5 Technical support The Tools Administration dialog box is capable of displaying information regarding hidd
179. ain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronic
180. alog box Shortcuts Button Test Testitem Whether detailed setting specific group to the test item can be made View CPU Simulated Ctrl Shift I Simulated CPU Simulated Yes I O I O I O Code Coverage Ctrl Shift O Eg Coverage Code Coverage If you double click on a test item in the Create Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens e CPU Simulated I O Test image data to be saved into test image files Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Simulated I O window acquired with this setting No I O simulation range is specified by default Test result details Failed at Line Unmatched line number Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at Line 1 Sre Data Input Dest a 1 21468 To make detailed setting 1 Opens the Edit Test Simulated I O dialog box 232 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility Edit Test Simulated 170 ki Simulated 1 0 Start Line End Line Cancel Moditp m Hes ae Hemose 2 Click Add button in the Edit Test Simulated I O dialog box 3 The Add Simulated I O dialog box is displayed Add Simulated 1 0 Ei Options a all Cancel C Line No 4 Specify the I O simulation range by All or Line No 5 Click OK 6 Select the Edit or Remove button in the Edit Test Simulated I O dialog box as required
181. als the address indicated by the current text cursor position Changes the value of the Program Counter PC to the address at the row of the text cursor Launches the Run Program dialog box allowing the user to enter temporary breakpoints before executing the user program Opens the editor or Disassembly window at the address of the PC Executes a block of user program before breaking Executes a block of user program before breaking If a subroutine call is reached then the subroutine will not be entered Executes sufficient user program to reach the end of the current function Launches the Step Program dialog box allowing the user to modify the settings for stepping Steps only one source line when the editor window is active When the Disassembly window is active stepping is executed in a unit of assembly instructions Executes stepping in a unit of assembly instructions Steps only one source line Stops the execution of the user program Disconnects the debugging platform and connects it again Connects the debugging platform Disconnects the debugging platform Saves the specified memory area data to a file Verifies file contents against memory contents Downloads the object program Unloads the object program 1 Operations with some menu items can be recorded as HEW command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu item indic
182. ame gt 2 Download all module Download A New Module Download module Download module debug data only Unload module Download A New Module Download module by double clicking Build lt File name gt 2 Toggle Breakpoint Enable Disable Breakpoint 2CENESAS Recordable HEW Command Line Commands CLEAN BUILD BUILD_ALL CLEAN CHANGE PROJECT BUILD FILE FILE LOAD See Dialog boxes FILE LOAD FILE LOAD FILE UNLOAD See Dialog boxes FILE LOAD BUILD FILE SET SOURCE SOFT BREAK STATE SOURCE SOFT BREAK S W Breakpoints column Editor and Pop up menu Disassembly mixed disassembl y mode S W Breakpoints ASM column Register Value Flag register 2 Pop up menu Memory Value Pop up menu toolbar button IO Value 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility Go To Cursor Set PC Here Insert delete a breakpoint by double clicking Go To Cursor Set PC Here Toggle Breakpoint Enable Disable Breakpoint Insert delete a breakpoint by double clicking In place edit Edit by clicking Edit In place edit Set Fill Move Compare 2 Save Load In place edit Open the edit dialog box by double clicking 1 Refer to the help of an emulator or simulator 2 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform e Dialog boxes GO_TILL REGISTER SET 1 SET SOURCE SOFT BREAK GO TILL REGISTER SET 1 SET DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK STATE DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK SET DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK
183. amily emulator debugger The HEW has become V 4 02 or later due to an update M16C M32C M32R family emulator debugger The HEW included in the product package is V 4 02 or later 259 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger a Locating files Files that cannot be found or do not exist after the initial search will be shown to the user in the Locate Files dialog box in the Files to find list Locate Files EI EY Last searched directory CNHE WS WDebuglnlysDebugi0rlyDebug Emulator Files to find Search status 0 t 13 foundunfound hoc lbh dbschc machine A reselorg cpp sbrk c abrk h H 2 System H 2 Tools ei Workspace I Elia Debug lrly Ei Debuglrly ay Debug Ernulator nef Source T Look in subdirectories T Qo not show on download Uk Cancel ae To locate files 1 PA 260 The Last searched directory holds the last directory that was searched for these module files The Search status field shows the number of files that were found against the number that have not this is only relevant to the files in the dialog and do not account for any previous searches The Files to find list holds a list of all the files that could not be found they will appear in short filename format and will be searched for in this manner The Browse section allows the user to select a directory in which to search the remaining files for The Look in subdirectories check box will look for the files in all su
184. and disabled in others Click the OK button for the new column settings to take effect To switch off a column in one source file i om Open the editor window of the file which you wish to remove a column from Select one of the following operations Right clicking the column header displays a pop up menu A tick mark right next to an entry indicates that this column is displayed Clicking an entry will switch showing hiding the column OR Right click in the Editor window and select the Columns menu item The cascaded menu item appears Each column is displayed in this pop up menu If the column is enabled it will have a tick next to its name Clicking on the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not You can adjust the column width by dragging the mouse on a column header 4 16 Showing hiding the column header The editor window has a column header You can select to show or hide the column header To switch showing hiding the column header l pA 100 Right click within a field in the editor window showing source or disassembly codes A pop up menu opens Select Turn Header On Off 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 17 Opening a file within the editor The HEW allows you to open a file within the editor window To open a file shown in the editor window 1 Right click on the file name in the Source field in the editor window Source include aak inc lude s5tacksct h Open typedefine h
185. and file c temp hmk111 cmd would contain c o c dirl filel obj c dir1 filel c It is possible to include more than one command in the description block and to use combinations of the standard and sub command file commands 13 4 Comments A character signifies a comment When this character appears as the first character on a line the rest of the line up until the next new line character is ignored There follows examples of valid comments My hmake file Variable declaration OUTPUT c dir1 filel obj Descriptor OUTPUT c dirl filel c c dir1 file1 h set VAR1 valuel gcc c dirl filel c A comment must occupy its own line in the hmake file It is not possible to put comments on the end of other statements 377 2CENESAS 13 HMAKE User Guide 13 5 Message commands The message command is used to output a line of text to standard out whilst a make file is executing These text lines will be output in the order they appear in the make file in amongst output from any executables being executed as appropriate No buffering of output text will take place A message command has the following syntax IMESSAGE lt text to output gt A new line character is assumed to come after the last character in lt text to output gt Any white space between MESSAGE and lt text to output gt will be ignored There follows an example of a valid message command IMESSAGE Executing C Compiler 378 2CENESAS Hig
186. are debugging your code it is very useful to be able to step a single line or instruction at a time and examine the effect of that instruction on the system In the source view a step operation will step a single source line In the disassembly view a step operation will step a single assembly language instruction If the instruction calls another function or subroutine you have the option to either step into or step over the function If the instruction does not perform a call then either option will cause the debugger to execute the instruction and stop at the next instruction If you choose to step into the function the debugger will execute the call and stop at the first line or instruction of the function To step into the function e Click the Step In toolbar button amp OR e Choose the Debug gt Step In menu option 313 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger If you choose to step over the function the debugger will execute the call and all of the code in the function and any function calls that function may make and stop at the next line or instruction of the calling function To step over the function e Click the Step Over toolbar button F OR e Choose the Debug gt Step Over menu option During debugging there are occasions when you may have entered a function finished stepping through the instructions that you want to examine and would like to return to the calling function without tediously stepping through all t
187. ates that this function can be recorded into a HEW macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all HEW products 2 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 346 2CENESAS 1 7 List of Setup Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Shortcuts Toolbar Button Macro Recording 1 Setup Customize Options Format Views Radix Hex Decimal Oct 1 List of Menus Function Customizes the HEW application Sets option of the HEW application Configures fonts colors keywords and so on for the window Sets radix to base Hex Sets radix to base Decimal Sets radix to base Octal Sets radix to base Binary Operations with some menu items can be recorded as HEW command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu item indicates that this function can be recorded into a HEW macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all HEW products 1 8 List of Tools Menu Menu Menu Option Tools Administration Change Toolchain Version Version Control Select Configure Add to VCS Remove from VCS Get from VCS Check out from VCS Check in VCS Get VCS status Launch External Debugger Launch Slave HEW Macros Record Macro Play Macro Stop Macro Keyboard Toolbar Shortcuts Button Function Controls the components Changes toolchain version S
188. ay a pop up menu Selecting Sample Information from the pop up menu displays the Sample Information dialog box If you double click the coordinate where you wish to view the sampling information the Sample Information dialog box appears Sample Information Data Size obit Channet Jo Mong xpo oms A Value Displays the sampling information of the cursor location in the Waveform window The following information is displayed Data Size Displays 8bit or 1 6bit Channel Displays the data channel Value X Displays the X axis of cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of cursor location displays Y axes for both the upper and lower plots when Stereo is selected 17 6 Looking at I O memory As well as a CPU and ROM RAM a micro controller also contains on chip peripheral modules The exact number and type of peripheral modules differ between devices but typical modules are DMA controllers serial communications interfaces A D converters integrated timer units a bus state controller and a watchdog timer Accessing registers which are mapped to the micro controller s address space programs the on chip peripherals Since the setting up and use of these on chip peripheral registers 1s usually very important in an embedded micro controller application it is useful to be able to look clearly at the contents of these registers The Memory view only allows you to look at data in memory as byte word long word single precision f
189. ayed Session Hame Session name Cancel 2 Enter the new session name 3 Click the OK button 7 Reloading session information To reload a session Select File gt Refresh Session Clicking this will lose any changes to your session currently and the reload the current session into HEW 8 Debugging multiple targets For the method to debug multiple targets in synchronization see section 17 17 Synchronizing multiple debugging platforms 269 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Seecione Synchronized Debug J Enable synchronized debugging Debus Target Ee demol E e demol SH 4 Simulator 0 DefaultSession E Igy demoz DefaultSession oimoessionsH 4 SH 4 Simulator Un synchronize session 17 2 Viewing a Program This section describes how to look at your program as source code and assembly language mnemonics The source code will be shown in the source mode in two types of windows The main features are Editor Window A source file opened in the Editor window can be edited When debugging and stepping through source code each source file which contains the current PC address will be opened in a separate window as you step through code from one file to another When stepping into an area of disassembly that has no associated source code line the source mode will switch to disassembly mode Disassembly Window Note Any source file opened in the Disassembly
190. ays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located in the Pixel Information dialog box Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Macro Recording Function Auto Nonrefresh Not refresh the window contents Refresh Stop Automatically update the window contents when user program execution stops Real time Real time updated the window contents Refresh Now Updates the window contents Properties Opens the Image Properties dialog box 17 4 2 Automatically updating the window contents Checking Auto Refresh gt Nonrefresh in the pop up menu will not refresh the window Checking Auto Refresh gt Stop in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops 299 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Checking Auto Refresh gt Real time in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be real time updated 17 4 3 Updating the window contents Selecting Refresh Now from the pop up menu immediately updates the window contents 17 4 4 Displaying the pixel information Double clicking within the window displays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located in the Pixel Information dialog box Pixel Information Color mode J Monechrome Piel ee Position Buffer Size Width con Height Image Size Width Height This dialog box displays pixel information on the cursor location
191. b directories for the chosen directory The Do not show on download check box will not bring up this dialog box on download if there are files that can not be located This checkbox is also present in the Confirmation tab of the Options dialog box and can be turned off and on here Pressing Search will look for the files in the Browse list in the chosen directory files that have been found will be removed from the Files to find list Any searched directories in the Browse section will be shown by a folder and magnifying glass icon f Once the user has selected Search this button will be changed to a STOP button allowing the user to cancel a search Any files that had been found before the search was cancelled will return to the unlocated state Clicking OK then the files that were searched for and found will be located to that directory accept all searches and close the dialog box 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 9 Clicking Cancel completely cancel all searches that have been done and close the dialog without changing anything If you had done some searches and they clicked on cancel a confirmation box will appear as below Confirmation Request ea 1 Are you sure you want to cancel all file relocations and discard changes T Don t ask this question again If you select Yes this will invoke the Locate Files dialog box and close the dialog box If you select No the dialog box will remain open allowing you to select
192. be viewed in the System Status view s Memory pane The Device Configuration area shows how the memory in the device s address space Note Due to page length limitations in some emulators the range addresses may not exactly match the entered addresses 3 Setting up the HEW debugger Normal operation of the HEW debugger means that your target and download modules will be automatically configured in the project generation process However in some cases it may be necessary for you to manually configure your debug session This is often the case when using old toolchains and project generators that do not support the latest HEW interfaces To check your debug session setup display the Debug Settings dialog box Select one of the following operations e Select the Debug gt Debug Settings menu option OR e Right click on the download module or within the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Debug Settings from the pop up menu 251 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Debug Settings 2 SimSessionSH 4 Target Options sees l SH4dernia Default debug format El Dwarf bi Download modules Elf Duwark2 CONFIGDIR E PAO OOOU0000 Target Default debug format or Download modules can be selected on the Target tab of the Debug Settings dialog box Moreover the Options tab provides options of accesses to command line batch files accesses with connection to the
193. been made select None in Generate main Function and after making the project add the file containing the main function to the project Note that if the name of the function to be included is different the function calling section in resetprg c must be modified Be sure to refer to the hardware manual of the CPU for actual values of the sample file contents such as the vector table definition and I O register definition which are generated by the project generator To move to Step 4 click the Next gt button in Step 3 Hew Project 4 9 Setting the Standard Library w new Performs memory allocation and ctype A Handles and checks charac math A Performs numerical calculatia matht h Pertorme numerical calculatie stdarg h Supports access to variable iw stdio h Performs inputoutout handlir iw stdlib h Performs C program standard string Pertorms string comparison i jios EC gt Perhormns inputoutpuk proc complex EC gt Performs comples nu string E C Pertorms string manipule Enable all Disable all lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 4 Specify the configuration of the standard libraries used by the C C compiler in Step 4 243 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger The functions defined in the checked items and the runtime functions are included Enable all Selects all standard library functions Disable all Does not select all standard library functions Note that only th
194. before SAVING SCSSIOM wg siscesedensvewansesinenenewsicweaneadenedewdeas ANTANN ENANTA Naa ANEETA 123 6 8 7 Enable auto backup facilities lt 2 crnsccssanmsnsnnngiesitseanasdedecaaetaceasneamaarnesnedcsecsnseeiacsedesseneseet 123 6 8 8 Change the default directory for new workspaces cccccccccccccccecccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 124 69 Using an external editor esiseciseniiiritsneurieniu ieena AE NENNE NANE ENEAN NANE EEANN 124 6 10 Customizing the font in your VieEWS eeeeseseessessseseseseseesessrerneesrosesrererererrrrrerrerreereeeeeeerereno 126 6 11 Using the virtual desktop nenneneenenenenennnesseessseseseseeresenesserrerrrrrrerrererererrrrrrrrerresereerreeens 127 Ts OTN C O a A 129 7 1 Selecting a Version Control System ssssssssesseesssessssssssssesssssssssssenecenenensnenenenees 130 7 2 Importing and exporting a Set UD ccccccceesseseeseeeesseeeeeesessesssssssssesesssssssssssssseeesssaaassaaaas 131 Using the Custom Version Control System ccccccccccccsccccceecceeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeees 133 8 1 Defining Version Control Menu OptiOns ccccccccccccccceseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeess 133 8 1 1 SyStem defined Menu OPtiOns cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeey 134 8 1 2 User defined menu OPO OLS pis sisecccanesoninacesesenanesensteaisunacinedenseanasesenanepearessbacelosemsseaes 135 8
195. beonsnaseansawctacsmssansans sodebeonannsoests 47 2 8 3 Building multiple projects c cc ccceccceceeeeceeeesseeseesssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesseesseeaaas 48 2 8 4 SLOP PN TOO CXC CUMOMG arisia ir erea aE a aai i iE adai 49 2 8 5 Deleting intermediate and output files produced in building c cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 49 2 8 6 Configuring the Build tab of the Output Window ccccccccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 2 841 Controlling the content of the Build tab of the Output window ccccccccccccceeeeeeeees 52 2 8 8 Displaying out of date files in the Workspace window ccccccccecseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 52 29 12909 fo 09 66 ss 02 ol ee ee eee eee ee eee 53 2 10 Configuring the Workspace window ccccccccccccccececeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 2 11 Inserting a project into the workspace cece ccc cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees oi A2 Seime the curent projet arcs setae onstage scence ese 58 2 13 Specifying dependencies between projects cccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 59 2 14 Removing a project from the workspace cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 60 2 15 Relative projects paths in the workspace cccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 60 Advanced Usd Foam es s1sscincencasicdemsnndcan
196. box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing ESC will close the dialog box Note The assembly language display is disassembled from the actual machine code in the debugging platform s memory If the memory contents are changed the dialog box and Disassembly view will show the new assembly language code but the source view will be unchanged This is true even 1f the source file contains assembler 10 Disassembly find in range The disassembly find in range can be used to find a certain text string in the disassembly view between two addresses Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode or mixed mode and select Find in Range The Find in Range dialog box is displayed Find in Range Ei Ei Find Start Address Bl Cancel End Address al Enter your search string the start and end address that should be searched Click OK The view then selects the first instance of that string in the range Note Subsequent find operations will find strings only in the paged disassembly area not the complete range 11 Saving disassembly text The contents of the disassembly view can be saved by using the Save Disassembly Text menu from the Disassembly field in disassembly mode or mixed mode pop up menu 282 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger When Save Disassembly Text is selected the Save Disassembly Text dialog box is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to save Save Disassembly Text Ei Ei
197. bugger found In this case the HEW will open a source file browser dialog to allow you to manually locate the file this path will then be used to update any other source files in this debug project 17 2 1 Opening the Editor window To view a source file s code double click on its icon in the file tree or right click on the source file and click the Open option on the pop up menu The HEW opens the file in the editor Toolbar View Source View mired mode Yew Disassembly S ounce old mainl void i long min Wax The editor in version 4 00 onwards has been enhanced to include an integrated disassembly view This integrated view has a toolbar which allows the switching of mode When each mode is available it is possible to click the button and change to the new view Three different modes are possible these are listed below Mode Function Source mode This mode is the standard HEW editor It allows source file editing and keywords are highlighted correctly if you are viewing source files This view allows line numbers addresses breakpoints bookmarks and source codes to be viewed Mixed mode The mixed mode facility in a source file is different to the disassembly window mixed mode Instead of showing the continuous disassembly it shows the disassembly that is related to each line of source code This view cannot be edited and is only available when the module is downloaded This view allows line numbers breakpoints
198. can choose a version of the toolchain on the Change Toolchain Version dialog box To invoke the dialog select the Tools gt Change Toolchain Version menu option Choose one of the versions from the Toolchain version drop down list and click the OK button to enforce your choice Change Toolchain ersion Toolchain name Renesas SuperH RISC 7 Curent versions 3 0 0 0 CPU Family SuperH RISC engine Cancel Toolchair Renesas Super RISC engine Sta Latannirationn Toolchain wersion jonn st i s s S C C sCd 3 0 0 0 Toolchain build phases EMRA OptLinker SH Assembler r 00 01 SH CrC Compiler 3 00 01 SH CtC Library Generator To show information about toolchain components select a tool from the Toolchain build phase drop down list on the Change Toolchain Version dialog box and click the Information button A tool information dialog box will show you information about the tool Click the Close button to close the dialog box 3 8 Generating a makefile The HEW allows you to generate a makefile associated with your workspace HEW is capable of generating hmake nmake and gmake compatible files The make tool to execute makefiles is operated in the DOS command prompt and thus the use of makefiles allows you to build projects without HEW The generated makefiles can be executed in the HEW For details see section 3 9 Using a makefile inside the HEW system To generate a makefile 1 Open a
199. cccccccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEE 4 2 5 File extensions and file groups sccssccsasinsievaasensinacancsansnasesacadcdadsiancaeiscadeceiadseeiesecadssedthenesvakxccaeadts 42 2 5 1 Associating an application with a file QrOUD ccccssssssessssssssssssssssssssssssssesssesseaaeaes 42 2 5 2 Creating a new file extension and file group uu eccccccccesceccceecceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeseseesseeeeeess 44 29 Creating a new file extension accpez siete i cdecsk cxcecceasiauenavacteedecadanests ENNE ONENE NAAN NETEN Naa 45 2 6 etina Duild OPONI c ccciscassssdaaredasecsussedecwnsdeseesmsonenadaceaanadssaatnidaeaaseedsadamhad EEEE AT i 45 2 7 Build Configurations cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 46 La Selecting a build configuration 525005 sccenesessessecseadsnadssavsnedevanswatesaesversnadsnedsoaxsntssvadeweteoncts 46 22 Adding a new build configuration cccccceeeseeeeseseeseeseesseeesessessessssssssssssssseesseaaagags 47 2 7 3 Removing a build Configuration ccccceeesseseeseeseeseeseeesessnsssssesssssessssssssssseesssaaaaaas 47 2 Dualde aP lt 1 8 eee ee en ee E ee eee er ee ee eee eee 47 2 8 1 Building immdividual TES io csacuassscecencetssturssoone mcacancqaaesscdunantsuaaneaseceunarsceceendstedwnsdaceeaneasase 47 2 8 2 Building PEO CCU ccecccacssscetecssesecacseseteeenascauacsssnetocsnesacsans sete
200. ce is the active window Select one of the following operations to display the Goto dialog box Press CTRL G OR Select the Edit gt Goto Line menu option OR Select Goto Line from the pop up menu in the Editor window Line number il Cancel Enter the number of the line that you want to jump to into the Line number box and then click the OK button 4 The insertion cursor will be placed at the start of the line number specified 88 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 5 Bookmarks When working with many large files at a time it can become difficult to locate specific lines or areas of interest Bookmarks enable you to specify lines that you want to jump back to at a subsequent time One example of its use is in a large C file where you may want to set a bookmark on each function definition Once a bookmark has been set it exists until it is removed or the file is closed To set a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the line to mark 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Toggle Bookmark toolbar button bll OR e Press CTRL EF2 OR e Select the Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark menu option OR e Right click and select the Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark menu option from the pop up menu 3 A bookmark icon E will be placed on the bookmarked line to indicate that it is an active bookmark To remove a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the marked line 2 Select one of the fo
201. ce before executing any phases To display a prompt before saving the workspace 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Prompt before saving workspace checkbox 4 Click the OK button If Prompt before saving workspace 122 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 8 6 Prompt before saving session Checking this option will force the High performance Embedded Workshop into displaying a prompt before the session is saved to disk To display a prompt before saving the session 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Prompt before saving session checkbox 4 Click the OK button J Prompt before saving session 6 8 7 Enable auto backup facilities The HEW supports the facility to backup the workspace project and session files at regular intervals This means that if your application or development system should fail you will not lose so much work Any changes you have made will be saved to temporary files When re opening the workspace you will be prompted and asked if you wish to auto recover the files that were not saved during your last session To enable auto file backup facilities 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Save Auto Recovery info checkbox a
202. checkbox is not selected Download modules after If this checkbox is selected the user program will be automatically downloaded after a build build By default this checkbox is selected Reset CPU after If this checkbox is selected the target will be automatically reset after downloading the user program download module 1 This checkbox is only enabled if the feature is supported by the selected target Selecting a new target will reset this option to the default setting for the target Default for this checkbox depends on the debugging platform Remove breakpoints on If this checkbox is selected the breakpoints will be automatically removed after downloading the user download program Default for this checkbox depends on the debugging platform Disable memory access When this checkbox is selected if a command batch file to be automatically executed at connection until after target to the target has been specified the memory in the target will not be accessed until execution of the connection command file command batch file is finished This option is useful when initial setting of memory is necessary at execution connection to the target By default this checkbox is not selected Limit disassembly Disables reading data from memory outside the displayed range in disassembly mode Default for this memory access checkbox depends on the debugging platform 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 253 2CENES
203. ching 1 To view the details of unmatched data double click a test item with a red icon in the bottom pane 2 When Symbol Watch xxxxxx is double clicked for example the Test Comparison Details dialog box appears as shown below This dialog box shows the values of both the saved test image information Src xxxxxx and the result of this test Dest xxxxxx regarding elements in arrays Test Comparison Details Test Suite Derma Symbol Wwratch SimS essionsH 4 Export Information Failed at symbol a Src long H O0002 704 7000001 8 Dest longH 0000i 3 Clicking the Export button saves the test result into a text file 4 Click the OK button 1 13 10 Step 9 Modifying the program back and executing the test again Modify the program to restore the number of times to store data in the array and then execute the test 1 Return the number from 8 to 10 and build the program Click the Save File button lal on the Editor toolbar Right click on the Test Demo test icon to display a pop up menu Select Run Test Case to start the test oo eX oe ae When the test is completed the Test Browser window opens 31 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 13 11 Step 10 Viewing the test result matched You can view the test result in the Test Browser window Make sure that the test result now matches the saved test image information og J Test Name Description Result Pel Test_Dema Demonstration SUCCE
204. cified session file 318 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger After a build if the download module has been updated the HEW will switch back to the debugger to enable immediate debugging Whilst using an external debugger double clicking in any editor window will switch back to the HEW with the source file open at the line that was double clicked 17 16 1 Configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW The following details the information required to setup the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW and launch from the external debugger option in HEW External debugger selected Hitachi Debugger Interface version 4 or greater jig Debugger settings HDI location as se Session file ny fs Download module P Browse To configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW 1 Firstly the location of the debugger executable must be specified This must be version Hitachi Debugging Interface 4 0 or greater otherwise its behavior is not guaranteed This may have been configured by the installation program or a project generation utility 2 The second item of data is the session file This tells the debugger which session to load when it is launched 3 Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to the debugger when the download module changes after a build 17 16 2 Configuring the PD debugger to integrat
205. click the Add button the Environment Variable dialog is displayed Enter the variable name into the Variable field and the variable s value into the Value field and then click the OK button to add the new variable to the list To modify an environment variable select the variable from the list and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click the OK button to add the modified variable to the list To remove environment variables select the variable that you want to remove from the list and then click the Remove button Environment arnable Ei Variable OF ae k Value __ Cancel gt If the tool you are adding can display its output whilst the tool is running then use the Read Output on Fly option This will display the tool output as each line of output happens If this option is set to off then the HEW will store all output that is being displayed by the tool and display it in the Output window when the tool has finished its operation This can be a problem when the tool is running an operation that might take many minutes as it is difficult to see the progress of the current execution Note Using Read Output on Fly can cause problems when using certain tools on certain operating systems If you are having problems with tools locking up or freezing in HEW then un check the Read Output on Fly option Click the Finish button to create the new phase By default the
206. clicking WATCH EXPAND Value In place edit WATCH_EDIT Locals Pop up Edit WATCH ADD menu toolbar WATCH_EDIT button WATCH DELETE Value In place edit WATCH ADD WATCH_EDIT WATCH DELETE e The simulator debugger for the SuperH RISC engine family and the H8SX H8S H8 families of MCUs While recording a macro if you perform in place edit double click a column click on a pop up menu or make any setting in a dialog box opened by clicking the pop up menu as shown in the table below the command in HEW command line commands recorded into macros will be recorded into a macro file Menu Menu Option Keyboard Shortcuts Toolbar Button Recordable HEW Command Line Commands View CPU Simulated I O CTRL Shift I See Windows Code Coverage CTRL Shift O Trace CTRL T Eventpoints CTRL E 214 2CENESAS e Windows Window Simulated I O Coverage Trace Event Software Break Event Software Event Target Pop up menu toolbar button Pop up menu toolbar button Pop up menu toolbar button Pop up menu toolbar button Pop up menu toolbar button 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility Function Handling Erase All Enable All Clear All Add Range Edit Range Enable Clear Data Save Data Load Data Acquisition Add PC Breakpoint Break Access Break Data Break Register Break Sequence Break Cycle Edit PC Breakpoint Break Access Break Data Break Register Break Sequence Break Cycle Enable Disable Delete
207. commands Version control commands are listed in the Define Commands dialog box You can define as many commands as you want to and specify the order in which they execute Existing commands can be modified or removed To define a new version control command i Click the Add button on the Define Commands dialog box The Add Command dialog box will be invoked Add Command Ei Command Version control executable lv Wee SWINK Vosexe Browse Cancel Arguments History SCVODIRG FILENAME YCUSERNAME P gt Initial directory S FILEDIR3 gt Browse Executable return code Return code of executable is not meaningful C Command has failed if the retum code is Not Equal To E Enter the full path of the command into the Version control executable field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Enter the arguments for the command into the Arguments field Enter into Initial directory the directory from which you would like to run the executable or browse to it graphically by clicking Browse In most cases this should be set to the FILEDIR placeholder which means that the command should be executed from the same directory as the file Set the Executable return code options as appropriate see section 8 5 Executable return code Click the OK button to define the new command To modify a version control command 136 l Select the command to be modifie
208. containing basic watch information for that variable sortial printt Sorting results fori 1 U 1410 i jf printf alsd sld4n 1 4 min af max longo 70000000 min OU hax change a 2 Instant watch Display the source file containing the variable that you want to examine on the editor window or disassemble window in source mode Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine and choose Instant Watch from the pop up menu the Instant Watch dialog box will appear and display the variable at the cursor location Instant Watch a 1 3FFFFBO long 10 331 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger shown to the left of the variable name indicates that the information may be expanded by clicking on the variable name and indicates that the information may be collapsed Clicking Add registers the variable in the Watch window Clicking Close closes the window without registering the variable in the Watch window 3 Watch window The HEW allows you to open Watch windows which contain a list of variables and their values a Opening the Watch window To open a Watch window click on the Watch toolbar button A or choose View gt Symbol gt Watch if it is visible A Watch window opens Initially the contents of the window will be blank Window configuration Watch Toolbar R E e f x Ez j E i TAFFFFBU ilong i
209. create many tests and scripts and automate the testing procedure Then once the testing has been completed the results are displayed in an easy to understand format in the test browser window This can significantly reduce the work needed to execute many regression tests The test tool uses the TCL command line batch files as its method of executing the features and functions of HEW These functions can be created easily using the macro recorder feature or by manually editing them yourself If you need to automate the execution of the actual tests the test tool also supports command line operation Many commands are available that allow you to open and close suites run and compare test data The first step towards using the test tool is to create a test suite This is available on the main test menu Then you must edit the test suite to create some actual tests Then you can execute the tests using the Run tests menu item Note however that HEW is not capable of acquiring test 1mage information of all functions in the HEW system For the items from which test image information can be acquired see section 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image data into test image files 16 1 Creating a test suite A test suite is a set of tests A test suite has a very similar concept to a workspace The test suite can contain may tests which in turn can contain many macros to be executed Test Suite Test suites are independent to the curren
210. cribes how you can execute your program s code You will learn how to do this by either running your program continuously or stepping single or multiple instructions at a time 17 12 1 Continuing run When your program is stopped and the debugger is in Break Mode the HEW will display a yellow arrow 5 in the gutter of the line in the source and disassembly views that correspond to the CPU s current Program Counter PC address value This will be the next instruction to be executed if you perform a step or continue running To continue running from the current PC address e Click the Go toolbar button E OR e Choose the Debug gt Go menu option 311 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 12 2 Running from reset To reset your user system and run your program from the Reset Vector address choose the Debug gt Reset Go menu option or click the Reset Go toolbar button EM The program will run until it hits a breakpoint or a break condition is met You can stop the program manually at any time by choosing the Debug gt Halt Program menu option or by clicking the Halt toolbar button Note The program will start running from whatever address is stored in the Reset Vector location Therefore it is important to make sure that this location contains the address of your startup code 17 12 3 Running to cursor Sometimes as you are going through your application you may only want to run a small section of code that would
211. ct the Workspace tab Enter the directory in which to create new workspaces into the Default directory for new workspaces field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Click the OK button Default directory for new workspaces EH EM Browse 6 9 Using an external editor The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to use an external editor Once an external editor has been specified it will be launched when the following actions are performed 124 Selecting a file in the Open File dialog box opened by selecting File gt Open menu Selecting the File gt Recent Files menu Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Double clicking on an entry in the Navigation tab of the workspace window Double clicking on an error warning in the Build tab of the output window Double clicking on an entry in the Find in Files tab of the output window Right clicking on a file within the Projects tab of the workspace window and selecting the Open lt file gt in external editor option from the pop up menu 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment e Clicking the Edit Code button in the Breakpoints dialog box opened by selecting Edit gt Source Breakpoints menu e Drag and drop into the HEW window When a file is dragged from the Windows Explorer and dropped into the HEW window note that however a drag and drop of a file onto the current project and user folder into the Proj
212. ctl filel c Arguments a Si VCDIR 4 FILENAME a _ E e olo O a xi vciswsappiproajectl filel c 8 8 Specifying environment Command Select the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box to view the current settings To add a new environment variable 1 Click the Add button beside the Environment list the Environment Variable dialog box will be invoked Environment Yarnable Ei E4 Varnable OK k Value Cancel Placeholder popup menu 2 Enter the variable name into the Variable field 3 Enter the variable s value into the Value field 4 Click the OK button to add the new variable to the Environment list To modify an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment list 2 Click the Modify button beside the list 3 Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields 4 Click the OK button to add the modified variable back to the list To remove an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment list 2 Click the Remove button beside the list 140 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 8 9 Controlling execution of a Version Control System The General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box allows you to control the way in which the version control system is executed It also shows the full path to the current version control configuration file T
213. cuting your OE OS AIM siseses isun nen a EEEE EEO aE a EEA 311 17 12 41 0 21011010 0001 258 G0 0 epee ee einne EE TNA RAR iA 311 17 12 2 WS ITT TOT tegelase E E 312 17 12 3 POE TOMO Ol A E E E E E E E T 312 17 12 4 Running from a specified address cccccccessssessesssesssesssseseessseeessseseeseeseeeeeeeereeaas 312 17 12 5 Continuing execution to a main function at a FeSet cc cccececeeeceeeeceeceeeeeeseeeeees 313 17 12 6 BSS SU ears ETENEE tnd sass E T E E E E T E E E aces 313 APA IU PONG 2S 6G 95 ore E ANEA OANE O E EONO 314 17 13 Stopping YOUR PRO CTA essenin einne iNe Nanne thee 315 17 13 1 Haine exec It esae a a E ATE AE A EE A A 315 17132 Standard PC breakpoints nnnnennnnnnnnnnnesessseesssesssrserrsssesrsrsrsrsrsrsssrsrrssrsrsrrrrreereen 315 17 14 Viewing the current status 0 0 0 0 cccccccsssssssssssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 316 17 15 Viewing the function call histOry ccccceseesssesssesssesseseseeseeeseeeseeesessseessseeeeeeeegaas 317 17 15 1 Opening the Stack Trace Window cccccccccssssccccccccccccccccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseesseeeess 317 17 15 2 Viewmg the source progra aisian EE en EESE ETERRA E EEREN en ENa 318 17 15 3 PC Uy ME ys oa aasciccacstacamigssueamaasadanmadssuecunadstecamigacusamaasaca se aseausd A 318 17 16 Using an external debugger cc cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 318 17 16 1 Configur
214. d excluding the quotes Key Key Used to indicate required key presses For example CTRL N means press the CTRL key and then whilst holding the CTRL key down press the N key Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Visual SourceSafe is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation IBM and AT are registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation All brand or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations 2CENESAS Introduction 2CENESAS Table Of Contents Table Of Contents Ds rege tae ep E nea Dostana ese dase han eancea npucdue E E 1 1 Workspaces projects and files nnnnnnnnnnnnnnensnessnsseseseseesssseseerrerrrrererrrereeeerererrerererrerereeens l KA NENON a E E ated l 1 2 1 ARL E AME PE hn AE E EE A E I A A OE A T saat AA AA T E eesiatees 2 1 2 2 Menu Dal sp saatoa eerste td cite eneee eE Era E Ee E aE a 2 1 2 3 TOO s E E E E 2 1 2 4 Workspace WOW cerere ene aE E EEEE E E eacentcnaeaiacaeaes gt 1 2 5 Editor window seessesseeeeeesssssssssssssssrreeeessssssssssssssrereeeeesssssssssssoserreeeeessssssssssserrrreeeeesssss 7 1 2 6 GGT 0 01 a tg 1 6 03 ener ere me ee en ere ere RR eer nee eee 8 1 2 7 PWS be K PE E PEA E EE EE E TE T A E E TT 11 1 3 Help SyS eee ee eee eee EE E 11 kA En nae E WN e E aaeseteagessoessessotungeesiay 11 1 5 Creatine a new W
215. d from the Commands list of the Define Commands dialog box Click the Modify button The Modify Command dialog box will be displayed Modify the information as necessary and then click the OK button 2CENESAS To remove a version control command 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 1 Select the command to be removed from the Commands list of the Define Commands dialog box 2 Click the Remove button To change the ordering of version control menu options 1 Select the menu option to be moved from the Commands list of the Define Commands dialog box 2 Click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary 8 3 Specifying arguments It is obvious that arguments must be specified correctly otherwise the version control tool executed will not function as intended However it is also important when using custom version control support to specify the arguments in a flexible way as a single version control command can be applied to more than one file To facilitate this the Arguments field has a placeholder button see Reference 5 Placeholders for an in depth discussion of placeholders which when clicked on invokes a pop up menu of all available placeholders An explanation of each version control placeholder and how their values are derived can be found in the table below Pop up menu User login name User login password Version control directory Comment File path name Filename File leaf File extensi
216. d in Files menu option 86 2CENESAS 4 4 3 4 Using the Editor Find In Files EAE Find In files types abs asm bin ble co cpp cpu esp T Cancel Directory C AHEW Workspace DemoSH4 DemoS Browse Match case M Search sub directories Regular expressions Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you selected text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find field Enter the file extensions of the files you would like to search into the In files types field If several extensions are specified be sure to separate them with a comma e g C H Enter the directory that contains the files to search into the Directory field Alternatively you may browse to the desired directory graphically if you click the Browse button If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case checkbox If you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it then check the Search sub directories checkbox If you just want to search the single directory specified in Directory field then ensure that this checkbox is not checked If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions checkbox See Reference 4 Regular Expressions for further informat
217. d in the version control submenu Selecting this menu executes the defined command Output information on execution of this command will be shown in the Version Control tab of the Output window This section introduces the definition of Properties command as an example Custom Commands Mappings General Commands Add loa iti Renove Move Up L Marse dant Command Execution M Prompt before executing command T Run in DOS Window e Execution control of version control commands 1 Select the Prompt before executing command checkbox 2 Deselect the Run in DOS Window checkbox This is because the RCS commands must be input via the MS DOS prompt 3 Select the User forward slash as version control directory delimiter checkbox Visual SourceSafe uses this format For detail see section 8 9 Controlling execution of a Version Control System e Setting up commands 1 Click the Add button The Add Menu Option dialog box appears 2 Enter Properties in Option and click the Add button The Add Command dialog box appears 167 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe Add Command Command Version control executable C Program Files Microgott Visual Studio S S wena 5 EXE Browse oe Greuments Properties yH USERNAME PASSWORD i VGDIRV CF ILI LA hitial directory E FILEDIF b Brosse Environment Command return code f Return code of comman
218. d is not meaningful C Command has failed if the return code is Not Equal To r a Enter the executable file SS EXE for version control system in Version control executable 4 Enter Properties y USERNAME PASSWORD 1 VCDIR FILENAME in Arguments 5 Enter FILEDIR in Initial directory Click the OK button Click the OK button in the Add Menu Option dialog box For detail see section 8 2 Defining Version Control commands e Command Execution Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Properties menu option 2 Select the file in the Properties dialog box and click the OK button 3 Output information on execution of this command will be shown in the Version Control tab of the Output window 168 2CENESAS 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop HEW is capable of sharing workspaces and projects across a network This allows users to concurrently work on shared projects and see each other s changes as they happen This system can be used in conjunction with version control The major difference with using this system is that each user can modify and update the workspace and project without making all of the other users reload their project and potentially lose all their changes This system is implemented by making one of the machines attached to the network the server machine All other client machines then use the serv
219. d module The build process can be customized in several ways For instance you can add your own phases disable phases delete phases and so on These advanced build issues are left to chapter 3 Advanced Build Features 2 2 Configuring the Projects tab of the Workspace window The Projects tab shows the current workspace projects and files You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its icon 33 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics Workspace Project i Current project 2a C source file Folder es E dbect c Project file bene nE lowsre c pee 2E resetpre c n E sbrk c i A SH4_Democ E a Download modules oOo ha 1 Active_project abs e Dependencies Download modules Folder Download module Dependencies Folder erv ine Dependent file H E lowerc hA sbrk h B stackecth bese vectine el Project Loaded project ae Unload project Unloaded project a Gy Projects Right clicking on a workspace opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Insert Project Load All Projects Collapse Clean All Projects Version Control Configure View Properties Macro Recording Function Adds a project to workspace Loads all projects to workspace Collapses the tree below a workspace icon CI Deletes intermediate and output files from configurations in all projects in this workspace Executes a version control system Con
220. d shows the source code in the editor At Highlights the previous occurrence of warning and shows the source code in the editor Display next Error Warning Info aa Displays the editor that generated the next build error or warning Display previous Error Warning Info at Displays the editor that generated the previous build error or warning Help a Shows the help information about the line Go to Error Warning Info Goes to the associated source line Clear Window CA Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons The Build tab also shows an icon corresponding to the error message output by build execution Icon Name Icon Error Message Level Build Error amp Error Build Warning fig Warning Information giy Information 51 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics You can also customize the Build tab of the Output window so that the texts in the lines of error messages will be highlighted in a color different from that of the texts in other lines To customize the current colors 1 Select Setup gt Format Views to open the Format Views dialog box 2 Select the Output item from the tree in the left hand section of the dialog box and expand it 3 Select the category for which you wish to change the color from the table below Category Foregr
221. d tab of the Output window Lines of information messages shown in the Build tab of the Output window The line at the PC program counter in the editor window and disassembly window in mixed mode or disassembly mode or Disassembly window while the Enable line highlight for PC position checkbox is selected in the Editor tab of the Options dialog box Source codes shown in the editor window and disassembly window in mixed mode Text shown in the windows 6 11 Using the virtual desktop HEW has implemented the concept of the virtual desktop This allows window configurations to be defined that can be switched with the click of a button When a particular button is clicked the windows are hidden or displayed depending on the current settings of that window configuration It is possible to have a maximum of 4 desktop configurations in use When the session is saved the window positions for each configuration are saved to the session file You can then switch simply 127 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment between each configuration to gain access to the other windows The toolbars and windows are dependent on the virtual desktop configuration Source files are independent of the virtual desktop system and will remain in view To rename your configuration to a more meaningful name l a a E Click the Window gt Virtual Desktop menu item Select is cascaded menu Select the Desktop Manager dialog box Select the window configurat
222. d test cases Each test case has a name and can have a detailed description that you have defined to explain the tests purpose Clicking the Add button on this dialog box displays the Add New Test dialog box this is shown below Add Hew Test 2 x Test name IT est Dera Test description Demonstration Tests to execute Cancel il File Fath Demo Default Hemave Mareta top Marve up Mare daw Mare ta batan Test image file E SHE W Workspace DemoSH44 Test Suite Dermno_Test Dero hit Browse Selecting the test and clicking modify allows you to edit currently defined details for the selected test These details are also shown in the same dialog as that used for Add new test If you click Remove the test is removed The Add New Test dialog box allows you to configure tests for execution later This is discussed in Adding tests to the test suite You can also edit a test suite from the workspace window pop up menu 221 sQENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility 16 4 Adding tests to the test suite Once your test suite has been created the next step is to add some tests This operation allows you to access the Modify Test Suite dialog box and will allow you to add tests which will then be executable To add tests to a test suite l 2A Select the Test gt Edit Test Suite menu option The Modify Test Suite is then displayed Click Add The Add New Test dialog box is displayed Add He
223. data into test image files The typical test procedure is outlined in the figure below See section 1 13 1 Example of test procedures for a test procedure 19 2CENESAS 1 Overview 7 Create Hew Test Suite E Save specityed information oeoo te ule HEW Test Suite File HTS Edit Test Suite Add Test Specifies playing macro S cu yc Ea ee ae 3 IS 2 TELTET Specifies HEY Test Image HEW Macro File File tor comparison after test execution HEWN Test Image File AIF JL Create Hew Test Image File Test tem The memory value ot Test Image range U FF Test Image The register value SS Allthe texts of Debug tab etc Test Image 7 Run Test Play Macro specified with Edit Test Suite ol ct TT JL Test Result Browser Test Image Display a comparison Test Image result on Test Browser Test image HEW Test Image File HIF The test support facility is available in the Test menu and in the pop up menu of the Test tab of the workspace window The first step towards using the test support facility 1s to create a test suite a set of tests This is available on the Test menu Once a test suite is created following operations can also be done in the Test tab of the workspace window Modify the test suite and specify macros to be executed during the test and the test image file for comparison Then select some test items to be saved a test image file Acquire and save test i
224. dd to VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to add and click the OK button Add to Wiles wl Workspace Name hiws Froject_MName hwp EH E W Wh Project Name c EAH EW ih typedef ineh GAHE Midbsct c CMH oral a eee Cancel Comment When you add files to Visual SourceSafe the local versions in your working directory will become read only If you select the Keep checked out checkbox in the Add to VCS dialog box before you check the files into Visual SourceSafe these files can be writable even when they are added To check that the Add to VCS operation was carried out as you expected or to quickly review the status of all of the files in a project 1 Select the project folder whose files you want to check in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Get VCS status toolbar button BD OR e Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Get VCS status menu option OR 158 2CENESAS 9 2 2 9 Using Visual SourceSafe Right click the selected item to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Get VCS status The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the output window or the File s Status dialog box For setting of location where the status is to be displayed see section 9 3 Visual SourceSafe command options The information shown includes whether the file
225. destruction or for the purpose of any other military use When exporting the products or technology described herein you should follow the applicable export control laws and regulations and procedures required by such laws and regulations 4 All information included in this document such as product data diagrams charts programs algorithms and application circuit examples is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website http Awww renesas com 5 Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document 6 When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application Renesas makes no representations warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular application and specifically disclaims any liability a
226. dialog box without modifying the setting Set Batch File ki Batch File gt Browse OK 202 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line 14 3 Executing a command file Click the Play button in the Set Batch File dialog box or choose Play from the pop up menu to execute the command file The Play menu is displayed in gray while the file is running and can be used when the command file execution stops and control returns to the user The message box shown below appears when a user attempts to close the Command Line window during execution of a command file ecxucmdline x The batch file will be aborted Cancel To terminate the execution of the command file and close the Command Line window click OK To continue the execution click Cancel This does not close the Command Line window 14 4 Stopping command execution Choose Stop from the pop up menu to stop command execution The Stop menu becomes valid during command execution 14 5 Specifying a log file Choose Set Log File from the pop up menu to open the Open Log File dialog box in which a log file to store the command execution results can be specified Open Log File Log File p Browse gt Cancel Enter the name of a log file log The logging option is automatically set and the name of the file is shown on the window title bar Opening a previous log file will ask the user if they wish to append or overwrite the curren
227. directory 6 Then click Close on the Macro dialog box and the macro file is ready for use 15 4 Recording a macro There are a number of ways to record a macro file in the HEW these options are discussed below Note that not all functions in the HEW system can be recorded currently For HEW V 4 03 the recording function is limited to workspace project and session management some build features and all debugging features for targets that support the feature To record a macro from the toolbar or menu 1 Click the Record Macro button or menu item on the Macros toolbar or the Tools menu To indicate that a recording operation is taking place the mouse cursor is modified to include the record icon te When the macro is being recorded the Pause Macro Ml and Stop Macro O buttons and menus are enabled When the macro is being recorded the pause and stop buttons DM and menus are enabled 2 Ifyou are using a debugging platform that does not support the macro facility a warning is displayed that states the following Warning The target does not support macros Recording will be limited Do you wish to continue If you click yes the record operation will continue 3 Recording will continue until you click Stop Macro For details see section 15 5 Functions that can be recorded into macro files 4 When Stop Macro is clicked a dialog is displayed that allows you to enter the macro name 5 Clicking OK saves the name and add
228. directory from the menu OR e Click the Browse button to open the Browse to Source Directory dialog box Select the directory and click the Select button 5 Enter the name of the Visual SourceSafe project directory to be mapped to the source directory in the Version Control Directory Mapping field 6 Click the OK button To modify a directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Mapping tab Select the mapping to be modified from the list and then click the Modify button The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box will be displayed Version Control Directory Mappine Source directory E HEW Morkepace Workspace Mam gt Browse x Version control directory sw orkspace Name 4 To modify a mapping make the same setting as required for adding a mapping in the Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box 5 Click the OK button Cancel To remove a directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Mapping tab Select the mapping to be removed from the list and then click the Remove button 166 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 9 6 Adding Visual SourceSafe commands In the Custom Commands tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box you can add a menu defining a Visual SourceSafe command not include
229. displayed 2 Select the macro file the function exists in 3 Select the macro in the function list you wish to remove 4 Click the Remove button Pressing the Close button closes the Macro dialog box It 1s not possible to cancel operations on this dialog box 209 2CENESAS 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility 15 3 Importing a macro file with existing macros If you want to import an existing HEW macro file from another machine which already has a number of macros this is easily achieved by the following operations One method is to simply copy the new macro file into the Macros folder in the HEW root directory HEW will automatically detect the new file and add its information to the HEW macros dialog box The new file will not be the default file for use so you will then have to enter the macro dialog box to switch the default macro file to the newly copied one Another method for importing macro files 1s from the macro dialog The instructions are shown below To import an existing macro file into HEW 1 Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Import button 3 A standard file browser is opened for you to select the existing macro file you wish to import Select the file and click OK 4 The file is now imported It automatically becomes the default macro file in the Current macro file drop down list 5 The file is also copied into the Macro folder in the HEW root
230. displayed as an image in the Image window 17 4 1 Opening the Image window Click the Image toolbar button i or choose View gt Graphic gt Image to open the Image Properties dialog box Image Properties ea Color Informatio Mode SOOO AnoOdoRcAGodenaacoeoKoneooNoOONoAD Bipi obit rides Color F Samplina 4 4 4 fa w CE Earmmat chunky ag Buffer Information Data Address ooooo0o0 El Baletesddiess foononon0 z al Width Height SizelFisel Buffer Size Hex Width DO000000 Byte ro 3 Height View Information View Mode Full Size Piston A Position C Part Size 0 7 Postion D Start Positior Toth Height ste PiKell f Top swith T Bottom Height The Image Properties dialog box is used to specify the display method of the Image window The following items are to be specified Color Specifies the color information of the image to be displayed Information Mode Specifies the format MONOCHROME Displays in black and white RGB Displayed in R red G green and B blue BGR Displayed in B blue G green and R red 297 sQENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Buffer Information View Information 298 YCbCr Displayed by Y brightness Cb color difference in blue and Cr color difference in red Bit Pixel Specifies Bit Pixel according to the selected Mode Valid when RGB or BGR is selected Sampling Specifies the for
231. displayed on these views standard sy Mic SESS 0 IFT a Em Sims essionSH 4 5 Enable Disable Synchronized debugging session list synchronized debugging Session combo when synchronized debugging is switched on There are a number of capabilities that are synchronized when this facility is enabled The following tables display the capabilities when synchronized debugging is switched on The example shows what happens in the two synchronized sessions Debugging function Target Debugger Session 1 Target Debugger Session 2 User click GO in any Session GO GO User click STEP Into out over in any Step Step Session User click ESC in any Session BREAK BREAK BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or Stop running Same Effect of pressing due to illegal User Program ESC 2 Stop running Same Effect of pressing ESC BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or due to illegal User Program RESET CPU in any Session RESET CPU RESET CPU 322 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger The following tables display the capabilities when synchronized debugging is switched off The example shows what happens in the two synchronized sessions Debugging function Target Debugger Session 1 Target Debugger Session 2 User click GO in Session GO No activities GO can only be executed manually by User User click GO in Session2 Neo activities GO manually executed by
232. djust the column width by dragging the mouse on a column header Moreover right clicking the column header displays a pop up menu A tick mark right next to an entry indicates that this column is displayed Clicking an entry will switch showing hiding the column If you place the mouse pointer on a column header the name of the column pops up You can also select showing hiding the column header itself There are several spaces columns on the left of the source code field If you place the mouse pointer on a column the name of the column pops up 81 CENESAS 4 Using the Editor Source code field This field includes codes highlighting the syntax The maximum number of characters per line shown in the editor is 8 192 Right clicking within this field displays a pop up menu containing available options 4 2 Working with multiple files The file area is where you will work with the files of your project The editor allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them in different configurations and to edit them in whichever order you want to The operations that you can perform upon the windows are typical of most Windows applications and they can be found under the Window menu Menu Option Operation Window gt Cascade Arrange all open windows so that they overlap with the top left of each Editor window visible Window gt Tile Horizontally Arrange all open windows horizontally so that they occupy th
233. dow is displayed 176 sQENESAS Window configuration Difference 11 Comparing Files x Toolbar Pr ach m a e 4 CNHE WS Morkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 dbsct c SOUrCe oate version pragma section DSEC Static const struct f _UBYTE rom 3 _UBYTE rom e _UBYTE ram 3 DTBL b I pragma section DSEC static const struct f oe Start _UBYTE rom 3 oe Star End ad _UBYTE rom e End Stare _UBYTE ram 3 f Star I sectopr D secend D te C l m DIL sectopr D secend T po Reference file Target file e Inthe Difference window the left and right panes respectively show the files to be compared e Their names are at the top of each pain e Ifyou hover the mouse cursor on the boundary of the two panes the cursor turns into a double sided arrow To adjust the widths of the panes drag the mouse to a desirable position Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Compare Export results to file Ignore white space Find Find previous Find next Previous difference Next difference Refresh comparison Toolbar display Customize toolbar Toolbar button Macro Recording Function This opens
234. dress Cancel Enter the address or label name in the edit box and either click the OK button or press the Enter key The Disassembly view updates to show the code at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 6 Modifying assembly language code You can modify the assembly language code in the disassembly view in disassembly mode by double clicking on the instruction that you wish to change The Assembler dialog box will be displayed 275 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Assembler Ed Address Code 0002408 01 5F Mnemonic Eanes MOW L fa H 01 C 8 PC A1 The address machine code and disassembled instructions are shown Type the new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonic field Pressing Enter will assemble the instruction into memory and move on to the next instruction Clicking the OK button will assemble the instruction into memory and close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing ESC will close the dialog box Note The assembly language display is disassembled from the actual machine code in the debugging platform s memory If the memory contents are changed the dialog box and Disassembly view will show the new assembly language code but the source view will be unchanged This is true even if the source file contain
235. e Detail options By default the HEW generates two configurations Release and Debug If a debugger target is selected a configuration for the selected target is also generated an abbreviation including the target name This configuration name can be changed in Configuration name Sets the debugger target options To modify an option select Item and click Modify If the selected 1tem cannot be modified Modify remains gray even when Item is selected Simulator I O System call for standard I O or file I O from the user program is enabled Enable or disabled Disable Simulator I O addr Address for above system call Bus mode Currently cannot be used by the simulator debugger To move to Step 9 click the Next gt button in Step 8 247 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Hew Project 9 9 Changing the File Names to be Created The following source files will be generated Ext Description dbsct C Setting of B A Section typedefine h Aliases of Integer Type sbrk C Frogram of brk lodetine h Definition of I O Aegis Intprg EIC Interrupt Program vecttbl IC Initialize of ector Tab VECH Inc Definition of Vector ery Inc Define Interuput Ever vhandler sre Resetelnterupt Hand resetprg c Reset Program Tutorial C Main Program brk hi Header file of sbrk file stackect h Setting of Stack area gt T a re 9 The files to be generated by the HEW based on the settings made so far i
236. e Add Iw SH CrC Compiler WSH Assembler UptLinker The remainder of this chapter details the various functions that the Build Phases dialog box provides 3 2 Creating a custom build phase If you want to execute another tool before during or after a standard build process then this can be achieved by creating your own i e custom build phase To create a new custom build phase 1 Select the Build gt Build Phases menu option to invoke the Build Phases dialog box 2 Click the Add button This will invoke the New Build Phase wizard dialog box 3 Follow the 4 steps below To move forward and backward between steps click the Next gt and lt Previous buttons respectively Step 1 The first step asks whether you want to create an entirely new phase or whether you want to add a system phase A system phase is a ready made phase which 1s already defined within the toolchain you are using e g compiler assembler linker librarian etc or a utility phase e g file copy complexity analyzer etc The Add an existing system phase button is inactive if no more system phases are available Select the Create a new custom phase button to create your own build phase 62 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features Hew Build Phase Step 1 of 4 What type of phase would you like to add 7 Create a new custom phase E Addl an existing system phase System Phase Cancel Step 2 The second step asks what type o
237. e contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Removes highlighted text it is not copied to the Windows clipboard Selects i e highlights the entire contents of the active window Finds text in the current file Finds text in multiple files Replaces text in the current file Jumps to a line in a file Finds a matching brace 343 1 List of Menus Bookmarks Toggle CTRL F2 Eo Sets a bookmark at the current line or clears a Bookmark bookmark at the current line Next F2 cu Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file Bookmark from the current line Previous SHIFT F2 cL Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current Bookmark file from the current line Clear All cr Clears all bookmarks in the current file Bookmarks Templates Define ir Defines a template Templates Insert CTRL SHIFT T T Inserts a template Template Toggle Breakpoint F9 A a Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enable Disable CTRL F9 ally a Enables or disables the current software Breakpoint breakpoint Define Column Format Sets the status of editor columns Source Breakpoints CTRL B Opens the Breakpoins dialog box Evaluate Evaluates simple and complex expressions 1 Operations with some menu items can be recorded as HEW command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recordin
238. e current workspace Creates a new session Imports an existing session Saves the current session Saves the current session with a new session name Reloads the session file for the current session Downloads a new module Saves the active document Saves the active document with a new file name Saves all modified documents in the workspace Changes the printing options Prints the active document Opens this document Opens this workspace Opens this test suite Downloads this module Exits HEW 1 Operations with some menu items can be recorded as HEW command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu item indicates that this function can be recorded into a HEW macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all HEW products 1 2 List of Edit Menu Menu Edit Menu Option Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Clear Select All Find Find In Files Replace Goto Line Match Braces Keyboard Shortcuts CTRL Z CTRL Y CTRL X CTRL C CTRL V Delete CTRL A CTRL F F4 CTRL H CTRL G CTRL SHIFT Toolbar Macro Button Recording 1 fue Sec Function Reverses the last editing operation Repeats the last undone editing operation Removes highlighted text and places it on the Windows clipboard Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Copies th
239. e data is for comparison after a test A sequence of operations before comparison such as from the start to end of a test is managed as a test case You can repeat evaluation of a test by re testing and comparison of data Before creating a test case a test script file to be executed in the test must be prepared This test script file is in the HEW command line command format You can also use the macro recording support facility to save some of the user operations such as those done while debugging into files in the HEW command line command format Use these files as test script files to be executed in tests e Macro recording support facility The macro recording support facility allows you to record operations which are associated with the HEW system applications 1 build 2 and debugging 3 as HEW command line commands or to execute these recorded commands Files to record the operations HEW macro files are command line batch files that have hdc as the extension and can be modified These files are stored in the Macro directory under the HEW installation directory By default the file Default hdc is created Note however that HEW is not capable of recording all operations in the HEW system corresponding to the HEW command line commands For the operations that can be recorded a macro record icon is shown in the Macro Recording column of the menu list This indicates that this operation can be recorded into a
240. e differs Sre F PowerON Reset PC OOOOO80E Dest F PowerON_Reset_PC 0000081C To make detailed setting 1 Opens the Edit Test StackTrace dialog box Edit Test StackTrace kl E3 Nest level 1 64 p Symbol Parameter Local Variable Cancel Ignore address 2 The range of stack trace information to be saved into the test image file is determined by the number of nest levels specified in Nest level 3 To compare parameters or local variables select checkbox Parameter or Local Variable These checkbox are not selected by default 4 Ifyou do not wish to compare the address of the selected register select the Ignore address checkbox This checkbox is not selected by default 5 Click OK 16 6 2 Functions that can be saved into test image files dependent on the debugging platform Among the HEW functions dependent on the debugging platform the test items listed below can be saved into test image files 228 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility e The emulator simulator debugger for the SuperH RISC engine family and the H8SX H8S H8 families of MCUs The following table shows these test items in the Create New Test Image dialog box Test items cannot be selected when the HEW is not connected to a debugging platform Menu Menu Option Keyboard Toolbar Window Create New Test Image dialog box Shortcuts Button Test Test Whether detailed setting specific to group item t
241. e displayed Select the Projects tab Click the Add button which is next to the Version Control Directory Mappings list The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box will be displayed 4 Specify a HEW workspace directory or project directory in the Source directory field Select one of the following operations e Enter the directory name OR 138 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System e Click the placeholder button Then select Project directory or Workspace directory from the menu OR e Click the Browse button to open the Browse to Source Directory dialog box Select the directory and click the Select button 5 Enter the version control directory into the Version Control Directory field 6 Click the OK button To modify a directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed Select the Projects tab 2 Select the mapping to be modified from the Version Control Directory Mappings list and then click the Modify button The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box will be displayed 3 Make the necessary changes to the two directories and then click the OK button to confirm the new settings Version Control Directory Mapping Source directory i OK work ohared gt osa Version control directory Cancel cowie Wwe Wshared To remove a directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configu
242. e end of a build phase 10 Use the Add Modify and Remove buttons to add modify and remove output syntax line formats respectively 11 Click the OK button when all modifications have been made 68 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features Note You can only change the environment of a system phase via the Tools Administration dialog box To remove a custom phase 1 Select the phase to be removed and click the Remove button 2 Click the OK button to confirm the new settings To import a custom phase 1 Click the Import button The Import Custom Phase dialog box is displayed which allows you to browse to an existing project from which you want to import a custom phase 2 Choose the location of the project from which you want to import a custom phase Once selected the Import Phase dialog box is displayed which lists the custom phases in the imported project 3 Once you have decided which phase to import highlight it in the list and click the OK button The phase will then be added to the Build Phases dialog box at the bottom of the build order 3 3 2 Build File Order tab If you were to select a C source file from the Workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File or click the Build File toolbar button you would expect the file to be compiled Likewise if you were to select an assembly source file from the workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File you would expect the file to be assemb
243. e entire Editor window without any overlaps Window gt Tile Vertically Arrange all open windows vertically so that they occupy the entire Editor window without any overlaps Window gt Arrange Icons Line up all minimized windows at the bottom of the Editor window Window gt Close All Close all open Editor windows The files within the editor can be displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files To show files in a notebook style M Show files in notebook Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed Select the Editor tab Select the Show files in notebook checkbox as appropriate Click the OK button ge eS 4 3 Standard file operations 4 3 1 Creating a new file To create a new editing window Select one of the following operations e Click the New File toolbar button L OR e Press CTRL N OR e Select the File New menu option The new window will be given an arbitrary name by default You can provide a new name when you save the file 82 2CENESAS 4 3 2 Editing a file 4 Using the Editor The HEW editor s standard editing functionality is available through the usual methods i e the menu toolbar and keyboard shortcuts and is additionally supported via a pop up menu that 1s local to each Editor window Right click in an open Editor window to invoke the pop up menu The t
244. e file from project checkbox on the Confirmation tab By default this checkbox is selected 2 3 4 Excluding a project file from build A file in a project can be excluded from build on a configuration by configuration basis To exclude a project file from build 1 Click on the file that you want excluded from build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window It is also possible to select several files by using a mouse or inputs through the keyboard as follows e To select several files Click the files while pressing the CTRL key e Select several files as a range Click a file as the start of the range Then keep pressing the SHIFT key and click another file as the end of the selected range 2 Take either of the two ways listed below A red cross will appear on the file s icon and the file will be excluded from build e Select Exclude Build lt file gt where lt file gt is the name of the selected file from the pop up menu opened by right clicking lt file gt is not displayed if several files are selected e Select Build gt Include Exclude Build menu option 2 3 5 Including a project file in build A file that has been excluded from build can be included again To include a project file in build 1 Click on a file that has previously been excluded from build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window It is also possible to select several files by using a mouse or inputs through the keyboard as
245. e group list and then expand and select it 4 Select the category are interested in The tabs on the right side of the dialog box change depending on the selection 5 Select the Color tab 6 Modify the Foreground and Background color lists as desired The System color refers to the current window foreground and background settings in Control Panel 7 Click the OK button for the new color settings to take effect El fe Source a Color Font Keywords Comments H D Selected Text ee k Test Foreground D PE Line Highlight rai E CPU information file CJE Abszolute file Fee ereint Stack information file Profile file system C list file Linkage map file C source file C header file File type C source file ee Comments keppard e oe k Contra group oe D LOPE l D Declaration A Operator HEW Sample Text a PreProcessor Y P F 4 10 2 Creating new keywords To create new keyword groups 1 Select the Setup gt Format Views menu option The Format Views dialog box will be displayed Expand the Source view icon in the tree 2 Select the file type for which you want to create a new keyword group from the tree on this dialog box 3 Click the Add button underneath the tree The Add Category dialog box will then be displayed Enter the name of the group into the Category Title field Click the OK button to add a keyword group To modify the name of the group select the keyword gr
246. e master HEW The slave HEW is notified of the following actions done in the master HEW to ensure synchronization of the slave HEW and the master HEW e Reset go e Go e Stop debugging Note The master HEW can initiate multiple slave HEW applications but slave HEW applications cannot be nested no slave HEW can initiate another slave HEW 17 17 2 Internal HEW synchronization The HEW also supports internal multiple target debugging This will allow you to connect to multiple target components in the same HEW application These targets can then be debugged simultaneously The system allows the user to setup a number of sessions with different targets Then when debugging the sessions can be synchronized so that certain events in one session can trigger the same events in the others This is very similar to that seen in the External HEW synchronization section above This facility though has the added advantage that it is easy to swap sessions and see what is happening in the same application To setup internal HEW synchronization 1 Select the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box is displayed 2 Select the Synchronized Debug tab 3 Select the sessions you wish to synchronize All currently available sessions in the workspace are displayed 4 Click the Synchronize session button The icons for these sessions should changed to checked rather than unchecked 321 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugge
247. e minimum required functions runtime and new are selected To move to Step 5 click the Next gt button in Step 4 Hew Project 5 9 Setting the Stack Area 5 Specify the stack area in Step 5 This is done by setting the initial value of the stack pointer and the stack size The initial value of the stack areas depends on the CPU selected in Step 1 Note The stack area is defined by stacksct h which is generated by the HEW If stacksct h has been modified by an editor it cannot be modified from Project gt Edit Project Configuration in the HEW To move to Step 6 click the Next gt button in Step 5 244 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Hew Project 6 9 Setting the Yector Powerlh Reset H OO0 Power Un Rese _ Manual Reset H 020 Manual Reset 6 Specify the vector in Step 6 Vector Definition Files Checking generates a vector definition file and a vector table setting function definition file Vector Handlers Handler Displays the handler program name of the reset vector To modify the handler program after selecting the handler program name by clicking on it enter the new handler program name Note that if the handler program is modified a reset program resetprg c is not generated Vector Displays a description of the vector Note Since the generated reset program interrupt functions reset vector handlers and interrupt source register definitions are samples be sure to refer to the CPU hardware man
248. e options that you want to apply to the selected file s You can also choose which configurations are being viewed In the configuration list each configuration is listed along with a special entry named Multiple configurations If you select Multiple configurations then the Select project configurations to modify dialog box is displayed which allows you to select more than one configuration This method is used throughout HEW for modifying multiple configurations at once 3 4 1 Options tab This tab allows you to define the command line options that will be passed to the phase The Command field displays the command that was entered when you defined the phase Enter into the Options field the command line arguments that you would like to pass to the command If you want to insert a placeholder select the relevant placeholder from the Placeholder drop down list and then click the Insert button See Reference 5 Placeholders for more information on placeholders Options Output Files Dependent Files Command E Too le My Tool exe Opt iors b4FULLFILE Placeholder File path name Insert button for placeholder Insert 71 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features 3 4 2 Output Files tab This tab is where you can specify the output files that will be produced by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the output files are of a less recent date than the input file If s
249. e section settings tree in the left pane To print out the section settings tree 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Print 3 The standard print formatting and selection dialog box is displayed From here you can choose your printer and page setup options 194 2tENESAS 13 Map 13 1 11 Viewing unallocated areas You can view areas where no section is allocated By default this function is not selected To view unallocated areas 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Show Unallocated Area 3 There is a tick mark on Show Unallocated Area The right pane shows all areas where no section is allocated which is indicated by Unallocated Area in the Name column 13 1 12 Viewing sections of size 0 You can view sections of size 0 By default this function is not selected To view sections of size 0 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Show No Size Section 3 The right pane shows all sections of size 0 At this time the End Address column does not show the end addresses 13 1 13 Viewing the source code for the address The source file for the address in the selected line will be opened in the editor window To view the source code for the address Select one of the following operations e Right click on the section list line in the right pane to open a pop up menu Then select View Source OR e Double click on the
250. e setup options 13 2 3 Finding symbols You can search for the linkage editor symbols To search for symbols 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Find 3 The Find Symbol dialog box appears 197 2CENESAS 13 Map Find Symbol Ed Marne main Match case Cancel wild card 4 Enter a symbol name you wish to find in Name or select one from those you have previously searched for in the drop down list box To distinguish uppercase and lowercase characters select the Match case checkbox 6 To use wild cards or select the Wild card checkbox 2 A character a A string 7 Click OK When a symbol is found a line that contains the symbol is highlighted in the right pane To find the next occurrence of the symbol select Find Next 13 2 4 Filtering the symbol information You can view the filtered symbol information of the linkage editor To filter the symbol information 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Filter 3 The Filter Symbol dialog box appears Filter Symbol Ea I Enable Filter PATO a E e Filter Column Attribute Set All Clear All Cancel 4 Select the Enable Filter checkbox By default this checkbox is not selected 5 Select a column in Filter Column 6 Select a filtering condition in Filter Item 198 2CENESAS 13 Map Filter Column Filter Item Function Attribute symbol attribute F
251. e specified project file as the current project CHANGE SESSION CS Sets the specified session as the current session CHANGE SUB SESSION 2 CB Changes the current sub session when using multiple session debugging CLEAN CL Deletes intermediate and output files produced in building CLEAR OUTPUT WINDOW COW Clears the contents of the specified tab in the output window CLOSE TEST SUITE CTS Closes the current test suite CLOSE WORKSPACE CW Closes a workspace COMPARE TEST DATA CTD Compares test data and create results CONNECT 2 CN Connects the debugging platform DEFAULT OBJECT FORMAT DO Sets the object format to be used by default DISCONNECT 2 DN Disconnects the debugging platform ERASE ER Clears the Command Line window EVALUATE EV Evaluates an expression FILE LOAD FL Loads an object program file FILE LOAD ALL LA Loads all object program files FILE SAVE FS Saves memory to a file FILE UNLOAD FU Unloads an object program file from memory FILE UNLOAD ALL UA Unloads all object program files from memory FILE VERIFY 2 FV Verifies file contents against memory GENERATE MAKE FILE 1 GM Generates a build makefile for the current workspace GO GO Runs program GO_RESET GR Runs program from reset GO_TILL GT Runs program until specified addresses HALT HA Halts program HELP HE Displays help for Command Line or help on a command INITIALIZE IN Initializes the debugging platform system LOG LO Controls command output logging MEMORY COMPARE
252. e the Template Name drop down list to select the name of the template to be inserted and then click the OK button The dialog box is closed and the chosen template is added to the current Editor window Alternatively you can press ALT along with the number of the template to be inserted e g ALT 4 to insert template 4 You can define these shortcuts on the Defile Templates dialog box A drop down list is available at the bottom of the Defile Templates dialog box 4 12 Brace matching Complicated source code can often become unwieldy especially when blocks of C C code are deeply nested within each other or when complex logic statements are expressed within a large if clause To help in such situations the High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides a Brace Matching feature which highlights text between braces of type and 98 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor To find a matching brace 1 Ether highlight the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Match Braces toolbar button 7 OR e Press CTRL SHIFT M OR e Select the Edit gt Match Braces menu option OR e Select the Match Braces menu option from the pop up menu To check the structure of an entire file place the cursor at its start and then repeatedly invoke the match brace operation The editor will successively highlight each pair of braces in turn until there are no more left t
253. e using the SuperH or H8 toolchains then it is possible to configure the simulator again using the project generator This feature is not enabled for the demonstration project type 1 Click on the Project gt Edit Project Configuration The Edit Project Configuration dialog box is displayed 2 Click on the Target tab 3 Select the target you wish to use and then click OK 17 1 4 Configuring the debugging platform Before you can load a program into your debugging platform you must set it up to match your application s system The items that must be set up are typically device type operating mode clock speed and the memory map It is particularly important to set up the memory map as you must have memory in the debugging platform into which your user code will be loaded In the High performance Embedded Workshop the project generation process will have completed much of this work However if you are using a different configuration of board from the standard types then some customization will be essential 250 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 1 Setup To set up the debugging platform configuration choose the Setup gt Simulator menu option or the Setup gt Emulator menu option Under this sub menu will be the menus which can be used to configure your debug platform In the case of the SuperH family Simulator the available menus are the System and Memory resource These options both allow the simulator to be customized and
254. e with HEW The following details the information required to setup the PD debugger to integrate with HEW and launch from the external debugger option in HEW 319 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger External debugger selected Debugger settings PO debugger location P Browse PO profile file location P Browse Command line options gt Download module o Braise To configure the PD debugger to integrate with HEW l Firstly the location of the debugger executable must be specified This may have been configured by the installation program or a project generation utility The second item of data is the profile file This tells the debugger which profile file to load when it is launched This file stores the debug setup information The third item of data are the command line options This field allows additional options to be specified which can modify the behavior of the external debugger Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to the debugger when the download module changes after a build 17 16 3 Configuring an external debugger to integrate with HEW The following details the information required to setup an external debugger which is not Hitachi Debugging Interface or the PD debugger to integrate with HEW and launch from the external debugger option in HEW 320 External debugger selected Other external debugger
255. eated by HEW V 4 01 or a later version the Build menu will not be displayed by default The Build menu is displayed however if the debug only project Debugger only xxxxxx has been created by HEW earlier than V 4 01 1 2 3 Toolbars The toolbars provide a shortcut to the options that you will use the most often There are ten default toolbars Editor Search Templates Bookmarks Default Window Standard Version Control Map Macros Debug and Debug Run as shown in the figures below With the default session the HEW does not initially display buttons of Version Control and peripheral functions on the toolbar If you use a debug only project Debugger only xxxxxx created by HEW V 4 01 or a later version Editor Search Templates Bookmarks Default Window and Standard will not be displayed by default CENESAS 1 Overview Toolbars can be created modified and removed via the Tools gt Customize menu option see section 6 1 Customizing the toolbars for further information Editor toolbar save File Copy Match Braces Open File Save All Cut Paste New File Print Dega ae Search toolbar Find In Files Find Find Previous Search String Find M ext a JA A A Templates toolbar Define Templates Insert Template Template Selection l T AT Bookmarks toolbar Mest Bookmark Previous Bookmark Toggle Bookmark Remove All Bookmarks lla ma ma ma Default Window toolbar
256. ects tab of the workspace window only adds this file to the project and does not open the file To specify an external editor External editor Madii 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Check the Use external editor checkbox The External Editor dialog box will be displayed External Editor Ed Command OK C AWINNT NOTEPAD EXE Browse Cancel Arguments to open file SFU LLFILE Advanced gt gt Arguments to open file at lire siFu LLFILE P 4 Enter the path of the executable without any arguments into the Command field 5 Enter the arguments required to open a file into the Arguments to open file field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened 6 Enter the arguments required to open a file at a specific line into Arguments to open file at line field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened and the LINE placeholder to represent the line number at which the cursor should be initially positioned 7 Clicking the Advanced gt gt button allows you to select the external or internal HEW editor for use when you attempt to open a file by any of the following operations e File open menu When a file is selected in the Open File dialog box By default the internal editor 1s selected e Workspace window double click When a file in
257. ed To change the order of a module to be downloaded to the target 1 Open the Debug Settings dialog box 2 Select a module in the Download modules list and click the Up or Down button Any changes made in the Debug Settings dialog box are only changed when you click OK The default debug format is set to the first download module in the list by default Only one default debug object format can be specified for each session All currently installed debugger formats are listed here 2 Downloading modules Download the object program to be debugged To download modules Select one of the following operations e Select the module which you wish to download from the Debug gt Download Modules submenu OR e Double click the module in the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window OR e Right click on the module in the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Download or Download Debug Data Only The HEW shows the most recently downloaded four modules on the submenu of File gt Recently Download Modules This is useful when you wish to download a module that you recently used To download all modules Select one of the following operations e Select Debug gt Download Modules gt All Download Modules OR e Right click within the Download folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Download all modul
258. ed Expansion of watched items to be recorded is collapsed The radix for watched items to be recorded 1s changed A new item to be watched is added to the sheet selected for recording The order of watched items to be recorded is changed Automatic update of watched items to be recorded 1s canceled The Watch window is closed 4 Locals window The local variables and their values can be displayed in the Locals window a Opening the Locals window To open the Locals window click the Locals toolbar button E or choose View gt Symbol gt Locals Window configuration Locals Toolbar f 1B i 8 2 Name Value Type E ae a P3SFFFFBO i long i0 3 p H OOO40001 R2 long a si max H OQOO40001 Re long e As you debug your program the Locals window will be updated If a local variable is not initialized when defined then the value in the Locals window will be undefined until a value is assigned to the local variable e The local variable values and the radix for local variable display can be modified in the same manner as in the Watch window 336 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar button Macro Recordi
259. ed If the Create folder structure in project checkbox is not selected when you drop a folder onto a user folder files in the folder are added into this user folder When a folder is dropped onto the active project tree files in the folder are added into the group folder of the file type e g a file main c is added into the group folder C source file If a suitable group folder does not exist the HEW creates it Files of an unknown type dropped onto the project are directly added to the project By default this checkbox 1s not selected 2CENESAS 2 3 3 2 Build Basics Clicking the Uncheck All button deselects all checkboxes while clicking the Check All button selects all checkboxes Clicking the OK button adds all selected files which have tick marks in their checkboxes to the project Next time this dialog box is opened it shows the most recently used setting Removing files from a project There are three ways of removing files from a project Files can be individually removed from a project A selection of files can be removed All files can be removed To remove a file s from a project l Select one of the following operations Select the Project gt Remove Files menu option OR Right click on the project within the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Remove Files from the pop up menu The Remove Project Files dialog will be displayed Select the file s that you want to remove fro
260. ed 2 Click the Modify button The Define File Mapping dialog box will be invoked 3 Modify the options as necessary 4 Click the OK button to commit the changes To remove a file mapping 1 Select the mapping to be removed 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the OK button to commit the changes 70 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features 3 4 Setting custom build phase options Once you have defined a custom phase you will want to specify the command line options that should be used when it is executed Each defined phase has a menu option in the Build menu To specify options for that phase select it The dialog that will be displayed depends on whether the custom phase selected was multiple or single according to the selection of phase type when it was created in the New Build Phase wizard HMyPhase Options Py E3 Debug Options Output Files Dependent Files EEEN SH demo Command e C source file EST ools hiy T ool exe ci B dbect c Options E lowsre c FULLFILE ven B reselprg c pee B sbrk c vee B SH4dema c beeen L Default Options EE File path name Insert e If the phase selected was multiple then a list of project files is displayed on the left hand side of the dialog to enable you to specify the build options on a file by file basis If the phase selected was single then there is no project file list displayed In either case the three tabs below are available This is where you can set th
261. ed from within this view To edit a source file that is currently open in the Disassembly source mode view the pop up menu item Open Source File for Editing must be selected This will open an editor window containing the file for editing Alternatively you may open the file for editing manually via the Workspace Window or by the main menu File gt Open 3 Opening a source file in the Disassembly window Opening a source file is possible by selecting Open File in Source Mode from the pop up menu in Disassembly window This menu item is available on the pop up menu in all view modes within the Disassembly window Upon selecting this menu item a file browse dialog will be displayed prompting for the source file to be opened Any text based file may be selected and not just source files 4 Using disassembly source mode as primary debug view It is possible to use disassembly source mode as primary debug view To use disassembly source mode as primary debug view 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu item The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Debug tab 3 Select the Use disassembly source mode as primary debug view checkbox By default this checkbox is not selected 4 Click OK If this option is set the following actions will be performed 279 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger e Ifthe Disassembly window is open and in Disassembly mode then when a break occurs at a known source address the Disassembl
262. ed any workspace changes will be logged to a file with the same name as the workspace with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the workspace file When the Generate log for projects is clicked any projects in the current workspace that have changes made to them will be logged to a file with the same name as the project with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the project file The log file 1s updated when the workspace is saved 6 5 Configuring the help system The High performance Embedded Workshop provides context sensitive help within the Editor window In other words if you select some text in the Editor window and then press F1 the High performance Embedded Workshop will attempt to locate help on that selected item The help files that will be searched are listed in the Help tab of the Setup Customize dialog box To add a new help file 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed Select the Help tab Help Help files i Add C C Standard Library Help ochre tools renesas Default help file C C Standard Library Help 2 Click the Add button The Add Help File dialog box will be displayed Add Help File Ei x Descriptor O K Programing In AaNST C Cancel File name C FILES HELPSANSILHLP Browse Enter a description of the help file into the Description
263. ed contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Test tab Shows the results and progress of the current test execution test support facility The test execution progress shows the current test being executed and the number of tests remaining If errors occur then these are displayed in this window For details on the test support facility see Chapter 16 Using the Test Support Facility Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Options Toolbar button Function Clear Window CA Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons The Version Control tab Shows the results of version control actions The tab is only displayed if a version control system is in use For further details on version control see Chapter 7 Version Control Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu dis
264. edures using makefiles are listed below nmake and gmake tools must be prepared by the user while hmake is installed in the HEW installation directory To set up the internal makefile execution 1 Create a HEW workspace 2 Select Build gt Generate Makefile to generate a makefile For details see section 3 8 Generating a makefile Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box is displayed 4 Click the Build tab Makefile Build Command excluding parameters HEWwDIR hmake exe gt Browse if Use makefile build system for this workspace If Generate makefile before build commences Makefile filename PROJECTNAME CONFIGNAME mak gt Browse Initial directory hORKSPDIR make gt Browse Makefile options ia gt 5 Enter the make tool name to execute the makefile in the Command excluding parameters edit box The default is hmake HEWDIR hmake exe 77 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features 10 11 Select the Use makefile build system for this workspace checkbox This means that the makefile should be executed rather than the internal build While the Generate makefile before build commences checkbox is selected the HEW will generate a makefile before executing the build This means the makefile will always be up to date with the HEW project system Enter the file name in the MakeFile name edit box The default file name is PROJECTNAME CONFIGNAME mak In t
265. eeeeceecceeeecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 158 9 2 2 Removing files from Visual SourceSafe ccccccccccscescccceeeeceecceeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 159 9 2 3 Getting read only copy of files from Visual SourceSafe ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 159 9 2 4 Checking out writable copy of files from Visual SourceSafe cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 160 9 2 5 Checking in writable copy of files into Visual SourceSafe nnnnnnnneneeseseeeneeeeeeee 161 9 2 6 Viewing the status of files in Visual SourceSafe ccccsccceeecceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 162 9 2 7 Undoing a check out command in Visual SourceSafe cccccceeesssseessssssseseeesseeaas 163 9 2 8 Viewing the history of files in Visual SourceSafe cccccccscsccceeceeeeeececeeeeeeeees 164 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Command Options ccccccccccscccceceececeeeeecceceeceecceecceccceeeeeeeeseseeeseeeeeeeeess 164 94 Version ControlsetUP eses EE A esas ee 165 9 5 Specii ine Me NO CAMO IIS secr nanesi nana AEE iE EA AAE AEEA EIEE A E 165 9 6 Adding Visual SourceSafe commands ccccccccecssesessseeseseesssssssssssssssssssseesseessesseesagaas 167 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities cccccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseesssssssssseessseeeaeas 169 10 1 Sharing projects by network facilities in a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 170 10 2 Enabling network facilities to share projects cccccccssseeeesssssseesee
266. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 203 EAS Pasting aplaceholder eener T E sagen ese 204 14 9 Selecting all the window contents cccccceeesssessesessesesesseeeeseeeeseseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesegaas 204 14 10 Copying the selection onto the clipboard nnnnnnenennnsssneenennesenneennnennnrnreeeseerrreeeeseseeen 204 14 11 Cutting out the selection to the clipboard cc ccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 204 14 12 Pasting the contents of the clipboard cccccceessssesesessssseeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseseseaaas 204 14 13 Clearing the window contents nnnneeneeesererrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreesererreseeeeeeeeresens 204 14 14 Undoing the last Ok A ON cs cctarresavacsnadensanasecmasensiecssesediaedgunsi case seuaegeosdetpaedee esd es 204 14 15 Checking brace mate DNO 2 csscamascduciumanuaienatnnseuausiesinanmadsaonginansaunamensaucqmeddsnantaucenscneseneadieeas 205 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility cccccccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseeeseeaes 207 15 1 Macro menu and toolbar scccsssiccssssonssincstsnnesaeavesdsendacestninontedatned eesndawadbsueadecnendaeatavvesiievedsnmaeced 207 15 2 Using the Macro dialog DOK 3 xasuscccsavusesesevonssteeensesistvnsdeeawnstsaseeesaninatead AEEA A aii 208 15 3 Importing a macro file with existing Macros cccceeeceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 210 b4 Recordne a
267. eeeeeeeeeeessssssssseesesaaaas 171 10 3 Setting the administrator user s password sssssssseseesennnenrrenneererererrserrsrrrrrrrrsrrrrrerererereen 172 10 4 Adding new users to the System ccccccccsssssssssesssssessssssessseesesseseseessessseeeessseeeseeseseneas 172 10 5 Changing your password ccccccsssssssssssssessssssssssssssesssssssessssesssssssesesssessssssaassasasssaaaaaaaaas 174 10 6 Note on using the network facilities to share projects unnnnnnnuneseneseensseeeeeeereenreererereee 174 11 Go Ae TITS A I EE E E EE E T E T A ET T 175 11 1 Opening the Difference WiIndOW cccccccccsssseseessseseseeeeseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 175 12 Navigalion Taci Seces TE AE TEENA E 179 12 1 C function and define navigation component ccceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 181 12 2 C navigation component cece ccccesessssseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 181 12 3 Jump to a definition from the editor 2 cc ccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 12 4 Drag and drop navigation 1t MS ccccccceesessesssessseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaaas 184 12 5 Smart edit capability in the HEW editor ceeeeeesssesessesesseseeeseeseeeeeseeseeeeeesssseseeeaaas 185 13 IN E e AE E E EE E E AEE E E asta E E E E A E E E 187 131 Manas tine section Seinos xc c
268. eld to the right Errors and warnings Stop build if the number of errors exceeds 0 W Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds 10 73 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features In addition to specifying error and warning count limits the Build tab also allows you to request that the Command line Environment and Initial directory of each execution should be displayed Check the appropriate check boxes as necessary Note e Irrespective of what these controls are set to the build will always halt if a fatal error is encountered e Note the following descriptions when you check the Stop build if the number of errors exceeds check box and specify a number to the controls 1 number of errors in the statement means the number of errors output from an execution of a tool The total number of errors in more than one execution of a tool is irrelevant to Stop build if the number of errors exceeds For example the build stops when one execution of the C C Compiler outputs more than the number specified If the number of errors output from each compilation is no more than the specified number the build does not stop even though the total number of errors in more than one compilation exceeds the specified number ii The build stops after the whole phase is done For example suppose you compile more than one file in a build Even though the number of errors in the first compilation exceeds the specified number the HEW con
269. elect the Memory Platform or Events checkbox These checkboxes are not selected by default 3 Click OK e CPU Memory Test image data to be saved into test image files Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Memory window acquired with this setting No memory range is specified by default Test result details Failed at address Unmatched address Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at address 0x70000014 Sre 0x00002f5a Dest 0x00002704 To make detailed setting 1 Opens the Edit Test Memory Range dialog box Edit Test Memory Ranges Memon ranges Ok End address Cancel 2 Click Add button in the Edit Test Memory Ranges dialog box 3 The Add Memory Range dialog box is displayed 227 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility Add Memory Range ki Ed aaa address e Cancel End address Jooooo0n0 ACCESS SIZE 4 Specify the memory range by Start address End address and Access size 5 Click OK e Code StackTrace Test image data to be saved into test image files Values set as detailed information and data within nested function calls in the Stack Trace window The default value in Nest level is 10 Test result details Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Valu
270. elects a version control system Setups the version control system ice Adds files to Visual SourceSafe ce Gets a read only copy of a file from Visual SourceSafe Gets a read only copy of a file from Visual SourceSafe Checks out a writable copy of a file from Visual SourceSafe Checks in your edits to a file into Visual SourceSafe Views the status of a file in Visual SourceSafe Launches an external debugger tool Launches a slave HEW Displays Macro dialog box O Stops macro i Starts macro recording gt Plays macro Under the Stop Macro menu option you can add custom menu options to which recorded macros have been assigned 2CENESAS 347 1 List of Menus 1 9 List of Test Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Toolbar Function Shortcuts Button Test Create New Test Suite Creates a new blank test suite so you can begin adding and running tests Open Test Suite Opens an existing test suite Edit Test Suite Edits the current test suite Allows you to add and remove tests to the test suite Close Test Suite Closes the current test suite Create New Test Image Setups and customizes the test image data saved to the test image file File HIF Compare Test Image File Compares test image file allows you to compare a test image file with the current HEW system or with another test image file already on your disk The results are then displayed in the test browser Run Tests
271. elow icy TestSuite Test Suit fl Download Memory Check Test Right clicking on either the test suite name or the test gives fast access to the test facilities features 236 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility Right clicking on the test suite icon 4 allows you the following options Pop up Menu Options Edit Test Suite Close Test Suite Compare Test Image File Run Tests Test Results Browser Properties Function Edits the current test suite Allows you to add and remove tests to the HEW test system Closes the current test suite Compare test image file allows you to compare a test image file with the current HEW system or with another test image file already on your disk The results are then displayed in the test browser Run tests allows you to run multiple tests that you have defined in the test suite and see the results of the comparisons in the test browser There are various options to configure the test run execution You can also use this option to refresh the test image files automatically if you make a minor modification and they need to be updated This menu displays the test results for one or more test executions It shows the pass and fail results and the detailed reason why the test failed The Test Suite Properties dialog box is displayed It displays the test suite name test suite description test suite location and the last modified date Right clicking on a test icon A allows you the followi
272. emosHatDemosS HAN Assembly source file M Show files in subfolders M Show source files only Create folder structure in project In the dialog box the files are initially sorted by the file type in alphabetical order If you click a column header of file names or types the files will be sorted by the file name or type You can select multiple files by clicking If you then click on one of the checkboxes for the selected files or press the Space key checkboxes for all of the selected files will be switched ON or OFF depending on the previous state If the Show files in subfolders checkbox is selected the dialog box also shows the files within subfolders under the folder that was dropped Otherwise the dialog box only shows the files within the folder that was dropped By default this checkbox is selected If the Show source files only checkbox is selected the dialog box only shows the files having the extension specified for the source files in this project e g C source files Otherwise the dialog box shows all files If the HEW cannot recognize the file type Unknown type will be shown in the File Type column By default this checkbox is selected If the Create folder structure in project checkbox is selected files are added to the tree where the folder was dropped For example when a folder data containing some files 1s dropped onto the tree the files are added into a user folder data which is newly creat
273. en system components These are part of the HEW itself and cannot be registered unregistered manually If you check the Show all components checkbox on the Tools Administration dialog extra component folders are displayed see the figure below Shen Project Generators HBS H8 300 Project Generator ENE Renesas SH Project Generator 400 00 J Project Generators Custom Seen Yersion Control System E s Custom WCS ai kdir mtk Pimi 1ml E i isat E mM IC mM M Show all components When seeking technical support you may be asked to give details about some or all of these components To do so open the respective folder select a component and click the Properties button The Properties dialog box will be invoked The HEW also has a feature that outputs tool information regarding the registered components to a file This allows you to retrieve information about the entire HEW system This information can then be sent to your technical support contact if you are experiencing problems with the HEW To output tool information 1 Click the Tools gt Administration menu item 2 Click the Tool information button A Save tool information file dialog box is displayed 3 Choose the location of the output file and click the OK button 4 A file is created in the chosen location with the current registered tool setup of the HEW 109 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration If any of the components have problems these can be seen i
274. en the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Clean workspace checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK The Build tab in the Output window shows all projects and configurations in which intermediate and output files have been deleted You can select multiple configurations and delete intermediate and output files produced in building For details see section 2 8 3 Building multiple projects Note Linkage list files MAP and assembly program list files LIS are not deleted The HEW deletes relocatable and absolute files Also note that the extension for absolute files differs depending on the selected format 2 8 6 Configuring the Build tab of the Output window The Build tab shows the output from any build process e g compiler assembler and so on If an error is encountered in a source file an icon and the error message will be displayed in the Build tab along with the source file name and line number If you click on a toolbar button or pop up menu item associated with display of error messages the line of the error message will be highlighted with text in white and its background in dark blue and the editor will show the source code of that line if the line has any source code 50 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics Double clicking the line of an error message will also show the
275. endencies in a project see To manually update file dependencies in a project 54 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics at Workspace SB Dono 3 Assembly source file l i lowly src BS L source file o E dbscte E Intprg c a lowenc c a resetorg c 6 sbrk c a vecttbl c een Dependencies J Projects When Build gt Build is selected a confirmation dialog box appears to ask if you wish to update the file dependencies before executing the build If you have not manually updated dependency data it may be out of date When you want dependency data to be updated prior to build select Yes If you select No it executes Build based on current dependency scanning data Confirmation Request ki gj If you have not manually updated dependency data it may be out of date ss Do you want dependency data to be updated prior to build T Don t ask this question again If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Scan Dependencies Prior To Build checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK To manually update file dependencies in a project Select one of the following operations e Select the Build gt Update All Dependencies menu option
276. ension Filename excluding path and extension Workspace name Current project name First line number of template insertion Current time Current date in text form Current date in dd mm yy form Current date in mm dd yy form Current date in yy mm dd form Current Windows user Insertion cursor positions the cursor in this position after template has been inserted Enter CURSOR to specify where the insertion cursor is to be placed after the template has been inserted If this is not specified then the insertion cursor will be placed after the last character in the template as in a normal paste operation There are 10 shortcut keys reserved for templates If you want to designate one of these select the key in the drop down list at the bottom of the edit template dialog box These range from ALT 0 to ALT 9 User input When defining a template it is possible to define a user input field Using the following placeholder specifies this USERINPUT lt n 1 10 gt lt some text gt The n is a number which identifies the user input identifier These placeholders can be added manually but the User Input button on the Define Templates dialog box adds these placeholders in an automated manner When the template is inserted into a file a dialog is displayed which allows you to enter some custom text for each of these fields This text is then inserted instead of the placeholder You can define ten of these user input fields
277. ents are supported as standard Class members Navigation Type Category Function C Defines All defines for C and C source files are displayed C Functions All ANSI C standard functions are for C source files displayed C Class All classes functions and members are displayed for C source files By default it is possible to display the navigation items grouped by a navigation category Underneath each category the navigation items belonging to the active project are displayed in the alphabetical order To group the display of navigation items by a navigation category 1 If you right click anywhere inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Un check Group By File menu item This option is unchecked by default The Navigation view lets you see the navigation items on a file by file basis Each file in the active project is shown in the tree and the navigation items belonging to each file is displayed below it in the alphabetical order To group the display of navigation items by a file 1 If you right click anywhere inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Check Group By File menu item 179 2CENESAS a FLMAX FLMIN a HEAPSIZE aD INT OFFSET a OSTREAM a LF a O RDONLY a 0 ROWA a O WRONLY 4 SR hit a STDERR a STON 4 STDOUT 0 0 G Functions E CLOSEALL tod E INIT OA E changellionget a E close _ SINT tilena E eeki SINT tilena SOWORD offset SINT base E maniro
278. ependent Files Dependent files To add a dependent file 1 Click the Add button The Add Dependent File dialog box will be invoked 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click the OK button to add this output file to the list To modify a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The Modify Dependent File dialog box will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required 4 Click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list To remove a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button A dependent file s path can include placeholders 3 5 Controlling the build By default the High performance Embedded Workshop will execute all of the phases in a build and only stop if a fatal error is encountered You can change this behavior by setting the controls on the Build tab of the Options dialog box Select the Setup gt Options menu option to display the Options dialog box and then select the Build tab If you want to stop the build when a certain number of errors are exceeded then set the Stop build if the number of errors exceeds checkbox and specify the error count limit in the field to the right If you want to stop the build when a certain number of warnings are exceeded then set the Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds checkbox and specify the warning count limit in the fi
279. er 3 Editing a label Choose Edit from the pop up menu and open the Edit Label dialog box to edit a label Edit Label head Address OOF F420 Cancel Edit the label name and value as required and then press OK to save the modified version in the label list The list display 1s updated to show the new label details When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details see section 17 18 2 3 Supporting duplicate labels 4 Deleting a label To delete a label select the label and choose Delete from the pop up menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request P 4re you sure you want to delete the label main Don t ask this question again If you click OK the label is removed from the list and the window display is updated 5 Deleting all labels To delete all the labels from the list choose Delete All from the pop up menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request i Gre vou sure you want to delete all labels Don t ask this question again If you click OK all the labels are removed from the HEW system s symbol table and the list display will be cleared 6 Loading labels from a file A symbol file can be loaded and merged into the HEW s current symbol table Choose Load from the pop up menu to open the load symbols dialog box
280. er to the user s manual or help files for the emulator or the simulator 2CENESAS 213 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility e The emulator simulator debugger for the SuperH RISC engine family and the H8SX H8S H8 families of MCUs While recording a macro if you perform in place edit double click a column click on a pop up menu or make any setting in a dialog box opened by clicking the pop up menu as shown in the table below the command in HEW command line commands recorded into macros will be recorded into a macro file Menu Menu Option Keyboard Shortcuts Toolbar Button Recordable HEW Command Line Commands View Symbol Label CTRL ShifttA See Windows Watch CTRL W Pel Locals CTRL Shift W Ea e Windows Window Target Function Handling Recordable HEW Command Line Commands Label Pop up Add SYMBOL ADD menu toolbar Delete SYMBOL CLEAR button Delete All SYMBOL CLEAR Load SYMBOL LOAD BP column Insert delete a breakpoint by double clicking SET DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK Watch Pop up Auto Update WATCH AUTO UPDATE menu toolbar Auto Update All WATCH AUTO UPDATE button Delete Auto Update WATCH AUTO UPDATE Delete Auto Update All WATCH AUTO UPDATE Record Update Value Start Recording WATCH RECORD Stop Recording WATCH RECORD Add Watch WATCH _ ADD Edit Value WATCH EDIT Delete WATCH DELETE Delete All WATCH DELETE Radix Hexadecimal WATCH RADIX Decimal WATCH RADIX Octal WATCH RADIX Binary WATCH RADIX mark Expand collapse an array by
281. erence x Toobar Fie hh th A 4 CAHEW Ww orkspaceDemosH 4D emoSH4 resetpra c CNHE Workspace emoSH 1 DemoSH1 resetprg c extern void INTHandlerFPRG ivoid void PowerON Reset void void Manual Reset void woid PowerON Reset PC woid void Manual Reset PC void Wold main void Fold maini void ifdef _ cplusplus ifdef _ cplusplus i endit Hendit Aa WoO oo E The toolbar allows access to key Difference view features It is also possible to customize the toolbar further This can be achieved via the pop up menu of the toolbar or the component itself If you right click on the toolbar itself the following menu is displayed w Toolbar Customize The top menu option named Toolbar switches showing hiding of the toolbar the toolbar is hidden in the figure below Difference Ea CAH EW MWorkepaceDemoSH440 emoSH4 resetprg c CNH EW Morkepace D emoSH 1 DemoSH 1 resetprg c extern void INTHandlerPRG void void PowerON Reset void void Manual Reset void void PowerON Reset FPC vwoid void Manual Reset PC void Yold main woid Wold main wolid ifdef cplusplus ifdef cplusplus endif endif ifdef enlusnlus Hifdet enlusnlus of IEA VENT The final menu option named Customize launches the Customize Toolbar dialog box This is shown below 371 2CENESAS 11 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View Customize Toolbar Available toolbar but
282. es Select the Debug gt Debug Settings menu item The Debug Settings dialog box will be invoked The files will be downloaded to the target in order of the Download modules list 256 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger An existing module which is not yet added to the Download modules list can be automatically downloaded to the target when it is added to the Download modules list To automatically download an existing module to the target when adding it to the Download modules list l Select one of the following operations Select File gt Download A New Module OR Right click on a module or within the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Download A New Module Download Module dialog box will be displayed Download Module kj Oso NCE zE Format EI Dwart2 Cancel Filename CONFIGDIR PROJE CT NAME abs Browse ACCESS Size i F Download debug information only Perform memory verify during download T Download automatically on target connection All fields must be setup for the download module to be configured correctly The first field is Offset This is the memory address offset the module will be loaded at It defaults to 0 After the module has been added the offset value is shown on the right of the module name in the Debug gt Build submenu the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window and the Fi
283. es can be called from a file and the output can be recorded in a file e The command can be executed by pressing the Enter key after the command is input at the prompt gt on the last line For information about the available commands see Reference 3 List of Commands and the on line help e If available the window title displays the current batch and log file names separated by colons e Pressing the CTRL or CTRL V keys on the last line displays the previously executed command line e The HEW command and TCL commands can be input in this window Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area 201 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line Pop up menu options Toolbar button Macro Function Recording Set Batch File Bad Specifies a command file Play Plays the current command file Stop Stops execution of the current command file Set Log File bod Specifies a log file Logging i Starts or stops output to log file Browse Enters a full path to the file Placeholder Configuration Pastes the CONFIGDIR placeholder directory Configuration name Configuration Directory Pastes the CONFIGNAME placeholder Pastes the PROJDIR placeholder Pastes the PROJECTNAME placeholder Pa
284. es for any labels that partly match the name entered in the Name field the Address field cannot be used 4 When the label name must be case sensitive select the Match case check box Click the OK button to start the search Note Only the label is stored by 1024 characters of the start therefore the label name must not overlap mutually in 1024 characters or less 9 Searching for the next label Choose Find Next from the pop up menu to find the next occurrence of the label containing the text that you entered 10 Viewing the source code corresponding to a label Select a label and choose View Source from the pop up menu to open the source file containing the address corresponding to the label 17 18 2 Elf Dwarf2 support The HEW supports the Elf Dwarf2 object file format for debugging applications written in C C and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers It provides a powerful way of accessing observing and modifying the symbolic level debugging information about the user application that is running 326 2CENESAS Key Features Source level debugging C C operators C C expression casting pointers references etc Ambiguous function names Overlay memory loading Watch locals and user defined Stack trace 1 C C operators The C C language operators are available amp l gt gt lt lt GC lt gt lt gt amp amp Buffer start 0x1000
285. esas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office equ
286. ew file extension in a new file group 1 Select the Project gt File Extensions menu option The File Extensions dialog box will be displayed 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog box will be displayed Add File Extension File extension fix File group f Extension belongs to an existing group Absolute tile f Extension belongs to a new group Text Associated application Open Text with windows default Add loa iti Remove Cancel 3 Enter the extension that you want to define into the File extension field Use only alphanumeric and an underscore as characters of a file extension string The drop down list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to new group option and enter a description that defines this new file group 5 At this stage it is possible to change the associated application There are four available choices in the Open lt extension group gt with drop down list e Editor e None e Other e Windows default 44 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics If Editor is selected the Open File function in the workspace window causes the file to be opened in the HEW editor If None is selected then the Open File operation is disabled when it is attempted Selecting Other allows you to c
287. execution The initial value is the current PC value Temporary PC Breakpoints A temporary PC breakpoint When execution started by this dialog box stops this breakpoint is cleared Clicking the Go button starts execution according to the settings Clicking the Reset Go button starts execution from the reset vector Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without executing instructions Note The Temporary PC Breakpoints feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work 17 12 5 Continuing execution to a main function at a reset The HEW has a function to continue execution of the program at a reset until it reaches the top of a main function Then the HEW sets a temporary software breakpoint at the main function When execution of the program is stopped this breakpoint is deleted To continue execution of the program to the top of a main function at a reset 1 Select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box 2 Select the Debug tab 3 Select the Run to main function on reset checkbox By default this box is not selected 4 Reset the target microcomputer Select one of the following operations e Click Reset CPU toolbar button Eft OR e Select Debug gt Reset CPU Note The Temporary PC Breakpoints feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work 17 12 6 Single step When you
288. exist and or none of the dependants exist then the commands will always be executed It is not necessary to specify any dependants if you wish the commands to always be executed A description block has the following syntax lt targetl gt lt target2 gt lt dependantl gt lt dependant2 gt lt command1 gt lt command2 gt gt lt commandn gt Any number of white space characters are allowed between the last target and the character and the first dependant and the character No white space is allowed before the first target Each target and each dependant must be separated by at least one white space character A tab character must be present at the start of a line containing a command Variables may be used in a description block using the syntax specified above under variable declarations There follows some examples of valid description blocks one of which uses the variable specified above under variable declarations c dirl filel obj c dir1l filel c c dir1 file1 h gcc c dirl filel c OUTPUT UNPUT DEPEND EXECUTABLE INPUT Special commands There are two special commands which can be used in a description block The cd command changes the current directory and the set command sets an environment variable which will then be in use for the duration of the make file execution Both are used in the same way as the DOS equivalents There follows some examples
289. f phase you would like to create There are two choices multiple or single When a multiple phase is executed the command is applied to each file in the project of a certain file group For example if you set the input file group to be C source files then the command will be executed once for each C source file in the project A single phase is executed once at most during a build Hew Build Phase Step 2 of 4 El EN What type of phase would you like to create f Multiple phase The command ts applied to each file in a file group An example of this type of tool is a compiler or assembler Select input file group T source file C Single phase The command i only ever executed once per build An example of this type of tool is a linker lt Back Mest gt Cancel The input file group list contains the current file groups defined for the project It is possible to define multiple input file groups by selecting the Multiple Groups entry in the input file group list 63 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features Select Groups Ei C header file C list file iw C source file JCPU information file Expanded assembly source file i Once this choice has been made the input file group selection is displayed as Multiple Groups This dialog box allows the user to choose multiple input file groups for the custom phase being added to the project To select a file group check the box next t
290. f the emulator or simulator when the debugging platform is connected 348 2CENESAS 2 List of Windows 2 List of Windows Window Name Differences Map Section Information Map Symbol Information Command Line Console 1 Workspace Output Disassembly Registers Memory IO Status Image Waveform Stack Trace 1 See the Tcl Tk Additional document Menu View gt Difference View gt Map View gt Map View gt Command Line View gt TCL Toolkit View gt Workspace View gt Output View gt Disassembly View gt Registers View gt Memory View gt CPU gt IO View gt CPU gt Status View gt Graphic gt Image View gt Graphic gt Waveform View gt Code gt Stack Trace 349 2CENESAS 2 List of Windows 350 2CENESAS 3 List of Commands 3 List of Commands 3 1 Command List Alphabetically Order Command Name Abbreviation Description Comment ADD FILE AF Adds a file to the current project ASSERT Checks if an expression is true or false AUTO COMPLETE AC Switches the auto completion BUILD 1 BU Performs a build on the current project BUILD_ALL 1 BL Performs a build all on the current project BUILD FILE 1 BF Performs a build on the file BUILD MULTIPLE 1 BM Performs a build on the multiple projects and configurations CACHE 2 Sets caching on or off CHANGE CONFIGURATION CC Sets the configuration to the specified configuration name CHANGE PROJECT CP Sets th
291. fe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it 1s edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users However if the check out operation was carried out by mistake or perhaps is no longer required then the operation can be undone To undo a check out of files from Visual SourceSafe l Select the files upon which you would like to undo a previous check out operation in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof Select one of the following operations Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Undo Check Out menu option OR Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Undo Check Out Undo Check Out Workspace Name hws CAH EWM Project_Namehwp GAHE ut Gancel Project Name c EH EW Wh typedef ineh GAHE Midbsct c CH oil Pues P T The Undo Check Out dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you would like to undo a previous check out operation and click the OK button If the file has been modified the confirmation message box shown below appears To continue the check out operation click the Cancel button To load the un
292. fferent end platform This facility can allow you to have many different sessions each with different debugger options defined For example it is possible to have each session using the same target but with slight variations in the session options This can mean it is very easy for the user to switch session and modify such things as register values or target settings such as clock speed The figure below shows this principle The five sessions share the same target but the sessions can be slightly different with regard to the options defined This means that both sessions can share the same download module and avoid an unnecessary rebuild This is because sessions are not directly related to the build configuration data Defaults ession Simsession 5 vtem _01 j SimSesson System Oe Simsession Sysbem OS Sims essiornsH 4 Each session s data is stored in a separate file to the HEW project You can then manipulate the data to share or modify as is required in the project 1 Selecting a session To select a session 1 Choose the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed 265 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 2 3 Select the session that you want to use from the Current session drop down list box Click the OK button Detaultsess ion Detaultsession SUMoees lors H 4 You can also select a different debug session by selecting it from the Current Sessi
293. field 4 Enter the full path of the help file into the File name field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 5 Click the OK button to add the new help file to the list 118 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment To make a help file the default choice select it from the Default Help File drop down list or set it to None if you would like to be prompted for a help file whenever F1 is pressed To remove a help file 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed Select the Help tab 2 Select the help file to be removed and then click Remove 3 Click the OK button to confirm the new help file settings 6 6 Keyboard shortcut customization The HEW allows the keyboard shortcuts to be customized to your own preferences This means that major operations can be configured to different keys especially useful if you are migrating from a different tool To reach the keyboard shortcut customization dialog click the Setup gt Customize menu item Then when Customize dialog box is invoked click the Keyboard tab Keyboard Default keyboard layout High performance Embedded Workshop default Reset Category Er Commands Current keyboard shortcut Remove New Workspace Open Workspace Hone Import New keyboard shortcut Export None Save Workspace Close Workspace New Session Rey curenti assigned to
294. figures the workspace view Displays workspace properties Right clicking on a project opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Build Build Build All Clean Current Project Macro Recording Function CI Builds out of date project files CI Builds project files regardless of whether the project files are out o date CI Deletes intermediate and output files from the current configuration in this project Update All Dependencies Updates all dependencies Set as Current Project Remove Project Unload Project OR Load Project Add Files Remove Files Add Folder Expand Collapse Version Control Configure View Properties 34 C Sets as current project Removes a project from workspace Unloads a project OR Loads a project Adds files to a project Removes files from project Add folder to a project Expands or collapses the tree below a project icon Executes a version control system Configures the workspace view Displays project properties 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics Right clicking on a folder other than Download module and Dependencies opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Macro Recording Function Add Folder Add a custom folder Rename Folder Rename a folder Remove Folder Remove a folder Configure View Configures the workspace view Right clicking on a project file opens a pop up menu containing the availab
295. form window Even after the Waveform window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the pop up menu Displays the memory contents as waveforms The X axis shows the number of sampling data and the Y axis Shows the sampling value e If you double click the coordinate where you wish to view the sampling information the Sample Information dialog box appears Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Macro Recording Function Auto Refresh Nonrefresh Not refresh the window contents Stop Automatically update the window contents when user program execution stops Real time Real time updated the window contents Refresh Now Updates the window contents 301 2tENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Zoom In Zoom in display Zoom Out Zoom out display Reset Zoom Resets the zoom display Zoom X2 The zoom magnification is 2 Magnification X4 The zoom magnification is 4 X8 The zoom magnification is 8 Scale 128 The size of the X axis is 128 pixels 256 The size of the X axis is 256 pixels 512 The size of the X axis is 512 pixels Clear Cursor Hides the cursor display Sample Information Displays the sampling information of the cursor location Properties Opens the Waveform Properties dialog box 17 5 2 Automatically updating the window contents Checking Auto Refresh gt Nonrefresh in the
296. fy a directory and then click the OK button to create the file with the name given in the directory specified If any of the files have been saved before then that file will be updated no dialog will be displayed When you attempt to save a read only file a confirmation dialog box appears asking if you wish to save the file as another name High performance Embedded Workshop AN CHE Wo Morkspace DeamoSH4 DemoSH4 sbrk c This file is read only Do wou want to save it as another filename No verwrite Cancel e Clicking Yes opens the Save file dialog box Change the file name before saving e Clicking No closes the file without saving e Clicking Overwrite saves the file by overwriting the contents The file is no longer read only e Clicking Cancel cancels the attempt to save the file 4 3 4 Opening a file To open a file 1 Select one of the following operations e Click the File Open toolbar button ar OR e Press CTRL O OR e Select the File Open menu option 2 A File Open dialog box will be displayed Use the directory browser to navigate to the directory in which the file you want to open is located Use the Files of Type combo box to select the type of file you want to open or set it to All Files to see every file in a directory 3 Once you have located the file select it and click Open To open a file drag the file from the Windows Explorer and drop it into the HEW main window To ope
297. fy button The Define Commands dialog box opens Click the Add button to define a command in the selected menu option See section 8 2 Defining Version Control commands for further information Close the Define Commands dialog box by clicking the OK button Close the Version Control Setup dialog box by clicking the OK button User defined menu options You can create as many user defined menu options as you like name them how you want and define their order in the menu If you have already created user defined menu options definitions of the commands can be modified or deleted It is also possible to change the order of menu options being displayed User defined menu options do not appear on the version control toolbar To create a new user defined version control menu option l Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed Click the Add button The Add Menu Option dialog box will be displayed Enter the name of the menu option into the Option field Click the Add button The Add Command dialog box will be displayed For details see section 8 2 Defining Version Control commands Click the OK button to close the Add Command dialog box Click the OK button to close the Add Menu Option dialog box Click the OK button to close the Version Control Setup dialog box To modify a user defined version control menu option l Select the Tools gt Versi
298. g column of a menu item indicates that this function can be recorded into a HEW macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all HEW products 1 3 List of View Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Toolbar Macro Saving into Test Function Shortcuts Button Recording 1 Image File 2 View Differences Opens the Difference window Map 3 Opens the map window Command Line CTRL L Opens the Command Line window TCL Toolkit CTRL SHIFT K lt p See the Tcl Tk Additional document Workspace ALT K Ig i Opens the Workspace window Output ALT O E mj m Opens the Output window Disassembly CTRL D Opens the Disassembly window CPU Registers CTRL R mj Opens the Registers window Memory CTRL M mj Opens the Memory window IO CTRLH mj Opens the IO window Status CTRL U ka mj Opens the Status window Graphic Image CTRL SHIFT G Opens the Image window Waveform CTRL SHIFT V Opens the Waveform window Code Stack CTRL K mj Opens the Stack Trace window Trace 1 Operations in some windows can be recorded as HEW command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu item indicates that this function can be recorded into a HEW macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all HEW products Note that a function of another window dependent on the debugging platform can also be recorded as
299. g file locations When referring to a file s location be sure to use a placeholder otherwise the command will only relate to a hardwired file For example let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file The Arguments field could be specified as GET c vc files project main c However when executed this command can only ever GET the file MAIN C To resolve this problem HEW uses a system of placeholders and directory mappings Directory mappings tell the HEW which working directories i e where source files are being worked on map to which controlled directories i e where the source files are stored in the version control system Mappings between these two directory systems can be specified via the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box Once the mappings have been defined you can use the Version control directory placeholder VCDIR to represent the directory in which the project file is stored Projects show detaile for project Details Version control directory mappines Add CoMWork Applications Project oo cclwe si Vapp project G wwork Application Wore CWO a app Er Modity work Sohared ygs shared Eemove a Environment Modis ere ere To define a new directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box will b
300. g platform in the Status window click the View Status button EH or choose the View gt Status menu item Window configuration statys Status z Memory Mode None Target Device Configuration OOOOOOO0 O7FFFFFF EXT 2O000000 27FFFFFF EXT S40000000 47FFFFFF EXT COOOQOO000 COOODOFFF EXT FFFFSOO0 FFFFEFFF RAM FFFFFEOQO FFFFFFFF I 0 aystem Memory Resources OO000000 OO0007FFF Read O6000000 O6000FFF Read O 7FFFOOO OTFFFFFF Read FFFFFEOO FFFFFFFF Read Program Mame Memory Loaded rea a 4 HOEN Memory A Platform A Events 316 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger The Status panel has three sheets Platform Contains information about the current status of the debugging platform typically including CPU type and mode run status and timing information Memory Contains information about the current memory status including the memory mapping resources and the areas used by the currently loaded object file Events Contains information about the current event breakpoint status including resource information 17 15 Viewing the function call history The Stack Trace window shows the function call history 17 15 1 Opening the Stack Trace window To open the Stack Trace window choose View gt Code gt Stack Trace or click the Stack Trace toolbar button fad Window configuration leg Stack Trace Fife Ea Ri Value F funcs short OxOQ0000094 F param 3 Ox00003tta Ox00003 EdE short L l
301. ginated from This is shown below Linkage Order F Object order Cancel main obi resetprg obj kiawe ta tap Intprg aby Intermediate file runtime library lib Move up File in project projectname lib E aoe User library Ge user_edit_options lib from options Mowe to botton Curent configurator Debug Copy to 5 Click OK 78 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features When you are using multiple configurations it is likely that the linkage order will be very similar To do this effectively you can copy the current settings in the dialog to other configurations This is described below To copy the linkage order from one configuration to another 1 Click the Build gt Linkage Order menu item The Linkage Order dialog box is displayed 2 Select the configuration you wish to copy in the Current configuration drop down list This defaults to the currently loaded configuration 3 Click the Copy to button this displays the Select Configuration To Copy To dialog box and asks you which of the configurations in the current project you wish to copy the current linkage order to Select a configuration and click OK 4 Click OK 79 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features 80 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 Using the Editor This chapter describes how to use the editor that 1s provided with the High performance Embedded Workshop HEW 4 1 Editor window The editor window contains the file windows
302. gistered Components list on the Tools Administration dialog box and click the Properties button The Properties dialog box will be displayed The General tab displays the name version and location of the selected component SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 3 Properties El Ei General Information Environment Mame SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain Version RRA Location CNHEW ST ools Henesas oh ex x Select the Information tab to view any information about the component This may include copyright information enhancements and so on SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain X 3 X Properties EI E3 General Information Environment nformatiars High performance Embedded Workshop Super RISC engine Standard Toolchain WX Super RISC engine C C Standard Library Generator Wo KE Super ASC engine C C Compiler ME AAAA 106 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration If there is an issue with the component and it is working incorrectly additional information is displayed here Select the Environment tab if it exists to view and edit a component s environment settings This tab is most commonly used to modify the environment of a toolchain SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 3 Properties Ei E3 Environment variables PATH C SHEW T ools Renesaso hie Sbin SHL_INC C HEW T oole ARenesas She_ _ include SHC_LIB C HE W sTools Renesas Shx_ x bin baoncify SHO _T
303. gram GO_RESET GR Runs program from reset GO_TILL GT Runs program until specified addresses HALT HA Halts program INITIALIZE IN Initializes the debugging platform system RESET RE Resets the microprocessor STEP ST Steps through program by instructions or source lines STEP MODE SM Sets the step mode STEP OUT SP Steps out of the current function STEP OVER SO Steps through program without stepping into functions STEP RATE SR Sets rate of stepping Memory Operation Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Abbreviation Description CACHE 1 Sets caching on or off FILE LOAD FL Loads an object program file FILE LOAD ALL LA Loads all object program files FILE SAVE FS Saves memory to a file FILE UNLOAD FU Unloads an object file from memory FILE UNLOAD ALL UA Unloads all object program files from memory FILE VERIFY 1 FV Verifies file contents against memory MEMORY COMPARE 1 MC Compares memory contents MEMORY DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents MEMORY EDIT ME Modifies memory contents MEMORY FILL MF Fills a block of memory MEMORY FIND 1 MI Finds a string in an area of memory MEMORY MOVE MV Moves a block of memory MEMORY TEST 1 MT Tests a block of memory 1 Support for this command depends on the debugging platform Software Break Setting Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Abbreviation Description SET DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK SDB Sets or deletes a software breakpo
304. h into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Check the Include Subfolders checkbox if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time The results of the search are shown in the Located Components list Select a component and click the Register button to register an individual component or click the Register All button to register all located components Click the Close button to exit the dialog box Search Disk for Components Select the directory in which to begin the search fc SHE Browse M Include subfolders Located components Version HAF Location a Register Hew angetServer 7 03 00 CAHEWSSystem SeC Hew argetSer Generic TCL Too 1 02400 CHEW SSystem SECSTCL Toolkits Register All Renesas M160 5 30 00 CHEWS Tools Henesass h16C nics H85 H87300 Sta BOAO CNHEWSTools Henesas Ho4 b 0 AN H85 H87300 Sta 6 0 3 0 CHEWS Tools Henesas Ho46 0 3s SuperH RISC en 9 0 0 0 CNHEWSTools Henesas Sh49 O O s SuperH RISC en 9 0 1 0 CAHEWSTools Henesas Shd 0 T s H85 H87300 Ser 2 0400 CAHEWST ools Henesas sDebuglom SuperH RISC en 8 0400 CHEWS Tools Henesas Debuglor Genenc SSM Weak 1 00 00 CAHEWSTools Henesas Debuglom 4 Search status 74 file s found
305. h performance Embedded Workshop V 4 03 User s Manual Publication Date Apr 20 2007 Rev 1 00 Sales Strategic Planning Div PURUen ees Renesas Technology Corp Microcomputer Tool Development Department Edited by Renesas Solutions Corp 2007 Renesas Technology Corp and Renesas Solutions Corp All rights reserved Printed in Japan High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 03 User s Manual CENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation 1753 Shimonumabe Nakahara ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 211 8668 Japan REJ10J1586 0100
306. h4 abs has changed Do you want to reload it T Don t ask this question again No Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Reload out of date download modules checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK 3 Check for changed source files before download The HEW can check to see if any of the source files have changed before the download module is downloaded in the current project If files have been modified then a confirmation is launched which asks the user if they wish to rebuild the code before the download takes place To rebuild the code before the download again select Yes To not rebuild the code before the download again select No Confirmation Request El The following download modules are out of date CH EW Yw orkspacesSH4demo SH4demo40 ebugssH4demo abs Do pou wish to build the SH4demo project T Don t ask this question again No Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the
307. he Edit gt Evaluate menu option 2 Launches the Evaluate dialog box 3 Enter the expression that you wish to evaluate and click the Evaluate button Provides a calculator function evaluating simple and complex expressions with parentheses and symbols All operators have the same precedence but parentheses may be used to change the order of evaluation The operators have the same meaning as in C C Expressions can also be used in any command where a number is required The result is displayed in all supported radix types Valid operators Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Logical AND amp amp Logical OR Logical NOT Equal to 1 Bitwise AND amp Bitwise OR Bitwise NOT Unequal to Left arithmetic shift lt lt Right arithmetic shift gt gt Less than lt Greater than gt Modulo Bitwise exclusive OR Less than or equal to lt Greater than or equal to gt a 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform Register names e SuperH H8 R8C E7 E8 family Register names may be used but must always be prefixed by the character Enter a numeric expression e g pc 205 2 and display the result in all currently supported radices e M32C M32R M16C R8C excluding E7 E8 family Register names may be used but must always be prefixed by the character Enter a numeric expression e g Yopct 205 2 and di
308. he HEW e Login Visual SourceSafe e Specify the name and location of the project to be created in Visual SourceSafe 2 Adding files Select the files in a HEW workspace that you would like to add to Visual SourceSafe 3 Checking out a file Select the files that you would like to modify in the HEW workspace and check them out 4 Checking in a file Select the files modified in the HEW workspace and check them in 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a workspace The following sections describe how you can associate Visual SourceSafe with your current workspace First you need to select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system to be connected with the HEW To attach Visual SourceSafe to a workspace 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog box was displayed 2 Select the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 entry from the Version control systems list Select ersion Control System ki Version control system Custom WE 5 i A _ EEEN Cancel 3 Click OK The SourceSafe Login dialog box was displayed 155 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe SourceSafe Login Username User0i Login oea ek Cancel Database path i 4 Enter your Visual SourceSafe username into the Username field and password into the Password field 5 For the Database path field specify the Visual SourceSafe database file SRCSAFE INI into which you would like to add this pro
309. he HEW to the debugging platform 1 Create a new project workspace or open an existing project workspace For creation of a project workspace see section 17 1 2 Selecting a debugging platform 2 Select a session which you wish to use for connection with the debugging platform from the session list on the Standard toolbar For selection of a session see section 17 1 6 1 Selecting a session After some operations a Confirmation Request dialog box may appear If you have executed build all on the entire program a Confirmation Request dialog box appears by default asking if you wish to download the program To download the program click the Yes button Since the action of clicking on the buttons in this confirmation dialog box cannot be recorded into macros this dialog box will open next time you execute a macro To continue the macro execution you should click one of the buttons The execution must be continued if you are using the test support facility which is used to test a sequence of operations For this reason make the following setting so that the confirmation dialog box will not appear In this example select the Don t ask this question again check box in Confirmation Request dialog box Confirmation Request ki f OF to download module CF SHE Workspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 Debug DemoSH4 abs ves es to all 7 Ho to all Cancel 21 sQENESAS 1 Overview Save the HEW environment setting that you wi
310. he Initial directory edit box enter the current directory where the makefile is to be executed When this edit box is empty the directory where the makefile specified in the MakeFile name edit box is stored is assumed as the current directory Enter the options for building the makefile in the Options edit box Click OK Once this system is setup the build button menu and keyboard shortcuts are linked to the makefile tool execution All output is directed to the Build tab of the output window as in the case of the normal build If you are using a toolchain supported by HEW the line of an error message can be double clicked to jump to the source files The help link should also be supported Note when using the HMAKE exe system the Build All toolbar button E3 will pass a command to HMAKE to force a re build all operation 3 10 Customizing the HEW linkage order Object modules are linked as alphabetical order in HEW default You can specify the linkage order 1f you wish to To switch on manual linkage order facilities 1 Click the Build gt Linkage Order menu item The Linkage Order dialog box is displayed 2 Select the Use custom linkage order check box 3 Then you can move the objects into which ever order you need Simply select the module and click the Move to top Move up Move down and Move to bottom buttons to position it in the desired location 4 Each module has a different icon depending on where it ori
311. he drop down list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to an existing group option and select the group to which you would like to add this new extension 5 Click the OK button to add the extension to the File Extensions list 2 6 Setting build options Once you have added the necessary files to the project the next step is to instruct the HEW on how to build each file To do this you will need to select a menu option from the Build menu The contents of this menu depend upon which tools you are using 45 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics To set options for a build phase 1 Select the Build menu and select the phase whose options you would like to modify 2 A dialog box will be displayed allowing you to specify the options 3 After making your selections click the OK button to set them To obtain further information use the context sensitive help button or select the area in which you need assistance and press F1 2 7 Build configurations The HEW allows you to store all of your build options into a build configuration 1 e you can freeze all of the options and give them a name Later on if you select that configuration all options for all of the build phases will be restored These configurations also allow the user to specify debugger settings for a build configuration Th
312. he execution of a version control system can be modified via the following three checkboxes e Prompt before executing command If this checkbox is selected then before any version control commands are executed a dialog is displayed which lists all of the files involved in the operation Files may be deselected by clearing the associated checkbox Clicking the OK button will apply the command to each of the selected files Clicking the Cancel button will abort the operation e Runin DOS window By default the output of the version control commands is redirected to the Version Control tab of the output window If you would rather run each command in a separate DOS window then set this checkbox Select Close DOS window on exit checkbox if you wish the DOS window to close after execution has been completed e Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter By default when the HEW substitutes the VCDIR placeholder it uses the backward slash character VY to divide directories However if the version control system you are using uses a forward slash character e g Visual SourceSafe to divide directories then select the Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter checkbox 8 10 Specifying a user name and password Most version control tools will require you to pass a username and password on the command line in order to keep files secure and to keep a record of which files were changed by which users
313. he remaining code in the function Alternatively you may have stepped into a function by accident when you meant to step over it and so want to return to the calling function without stepping all the way through the current function You can do this with the Step Out feature To step out of the current function e Click the Step Out toolbar button dP OR e Choose the Debug gt Step Out menu option To choose the step mode to use while stepping Select the Debug gt Step Mode menu option Sub menu Function Auto default Automatically chooses the step mode Assembly Steps through assembly instructions Source Steps through source code While performing Step In in source mode within the HEW editor you may wish to keep the source mode display of the library functions e g printf containing no debugging information By default the execution jumps to the Disassembly window and steps every assembly language instruction You can select not to actually step in addresses where no debugging information exists even when the Step In execution reaches such addresses To select not to step into addresses where no debugging information exists 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Debug tab 3 Select the Only step in when debug information is available checkbox By default this checkbox is not selected Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 1
314. he report drop down list box You can print it e mail it or save it to a disk This selection is required 8 Then click Submit This will send the report Please type a description of the problem vou wish to report ah xl Name Company website your application Sanit Country A egion How would you like to submit the report Print Cancel Fields marked with a are required Note Fields marked with an asterisk are required You can click the Submit button after these fields are completed 339 2CENESAS 18 Technical Support 340 2CENESAS Reference Reference 341 2CENESAS Reference 342 2CENESAS 1 1 Menu File List of File Menu Menu Option New Open Close New Workspace Open Workspace Save Workspace Close Workspace New Session Import Session Save Session Save Session As Refresh Session Download A New Module Save Save As Save All Page Setup Print Recent Files Recent Workspaces Recent Test Suites Recent Downloaded Modules 1 List of Menus 1 List of Menus Keyboard Shortcuts CTRL N CTRL O CTRL F4 CTRL S CTRL SHI FT S CTRL P Toolbar Macro Button Recording 1 Li La 7 D O T D D D D T Function Creates a new document Opens an existing document Closes the active document Creates a new workspace Opens an existing workspace Saves the current workspace Closes th
315. he same effect 304 2tENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 6 3 Updating the window contents Selecting Refresh from the pop up menu immediately updates the window contents 17 6 4 Loading an I O file I O files can be manually loaded to the IO window To load an I O file 1 Right click in the IO window to display a pop up menu 2 Select Load IO File The Set I O File dialog box appears 3 Specify an I O file you wish to load in the I O File field To insert a placeholder in the I O File field click the Placeholder button ia and select a placeholder from the pop up menu To browse a file click the Browse button 4 Ifthe Save path name of the I O file checkbox is not selected the path name in the I O File field will not be saved when you save the session Next time this session is selected the contents to be loaded to the IO window depend on the debugging platform When the I O file has been automatically downloaded ensure that this checkbox is not selected The I O file dependent on the selected CPU is chosen by the debugging platform and automatically loaded If the Save path name of the I O file checkbox is selected the path name in the I O File field will be saved when you save the session Next time this session is selected the most recently loaded I O file will be loaded to the IO window 5 Click OK See Reference 6 I O File Format for more information about a I O file format 17 6 5 Printing the currently displayed c
316. he test item can be made View Code Trace CTRL T Trace Code Trace Yes Symbol Locals CTRL Shift W Fal Locals Symbol Locals Watch CTRL W Pel Watch Watch If you double click on a test item in the Create Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens e Code Trace Test image data to be saved into test image files Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Trace window acquired with this setting No trace range is specified by default Test result details Comparing PTR Compared trace range Trace type Trace type Trace data is not Selected pointer matching PTR Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Comparing PTR 3 to 1 Trace type Trace Trace data is not matching PTR 3 to PTR 1 Trace data at the beginning of difference PTR 3 Src 0000001879 0000107C F gt DEMMW MOV L R15 R1 R1 lt 00000010 Dest 0000001887 00000818 FD lt E JSR RS5 PC lt 00001000 To make detailed setting with one trace type 1 Opens the Edit Test Trace Ranges dialog box Edit Test Trace Ranges Trace ranges start PTR End PTR Add Modit Hemarve 2 Click Add button in the Edit Test Trace Ranges dialog box 3 The Add Trace Range dialog box is displayed 229 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility ie a a Add Trace Range bi Ei Start PTA Pp End
317. he user with a set of powerful development tools and secondly to unify and present them in a way that is easy to use About This Manual This manual describes the High performance Embedded Workshop system This manual describes information on the basic look and feel of the High performance Embedded Workshop and customizing the High performance Embedded Workshop environment and detail the build and the debugging functions common to the High performance Embedded Workshop products The figures in this document shows the HEW operating with the SuperH RISC engine family debugging platform The term debugging platform refers to an emulator or simulator debugger that operates with the integrated development environment High performance Embedded Workshop For details on the debugging platform see the user s manual or help information packaged with the emulator or simulator This manual does not intend to explain how to write C C or assembly language programs how to use any particular operating system or how best to tailor code for the individual devices These issues are left to the respective manuals Document Conventions This manual uses the following typographic conventions Convention Meaning Menu gt Menu Option gt is used to indicate menu options for example File gt Save As FILENAME C Uppercase names are used to indicate filenames enter this string Used to indicate text that must be entere
318. he workspace window 2 Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Unload Project option It is possible to select multiple projects in the workspace window to perform this operation If the project is Unloaded its icon appears grayed in the Projects tab of the workspace window and no actions can be performed upon it Unloaded projects can be loaded by the following operations To load all projects in the workspace 1 Select a workspace in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Load All Projects option To load a project in the workspace 1 Select the Unloaded project from the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Load Project option It 1s possible to select multiple projects in the workspace window to perform this operation 2 13 Specifying dependencies between projects The projects within a workspace can be dependent upon one another so that when one project is built all its dependent projects are built first This is useful if one project uses another in the workspace For example imagine that a workspace contains two projects The first project is a library which is included by an application project In this case the library must have been built and up to date before the second application can build correctly To achieve this situation we can specify the library as a dependent 1 e child project
319. hen it is in focus or by using the menu Print on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode pop up menu When Print is selected the Disassembly Print Range dialog box is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to print Disassembly Print Range bi Ei Start Address i amp ii m End Address poma l Cancel Both a start and end address should be supplied Clicking OK on this dialog box then passes the print selection to the standard print formatting and selection dialog box From here you can choose your printer and page setup options 17 2 2 Opening the Disassembly window If you wish to view code at assembly language level then select one of the following operations e Click on the View Disassembly toolbar button 82 OR e Choose the View gt Disassembly menu option OR e Press CTRL D The Disassembly window opens at the current program counter PC location Toolbar View Source View mired mode View Disassembly Disassemb Obj Label oo0ooz000 00002002 00002004 Disassembly The disassembly window in version 4 02 onwards has been enhanced to include a source view This integrated view has a toolbar which allows the switching of mode When each mode 1s available it is possible to click the button and change to the new view 277 2CENESAS 17 Using the Three different Mode Source mode Mixed mode Disassembly mode Debugger modes are possible these are
320. hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but Ren
321. his checkbox is selected 4 Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect W Enable auto indentation 4 8 Splitting a window The HEW editor allows you to split an editor window into two The split bar button is located just underneath the maximize button at the top right hand corner of any editor window as shown below MgA lt Split Bar m To split a window Double click the split bar button to split the window in half or click on the split bar button keep the button pressed drag the mouse down and then release the mouse button at the point you want to split the window 92 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor To adjust the position of the split bar Click on the split bar itself keep the button pressed then move the bar to the new position and then release the button To remove the split bar Double click on the split bar or move the split bar to the top or bottom of the window 4 9 Changing the editor font The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to specify the font to be used in its internal editor All editor windows regardless of the file type use the same font To change the editor font 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Source icon in the tree The Font tab should be available on the right of the Format Views dialog box Select the font type from the Font list Select the font size from the Point Size list When this
322. his function depends on the debugging platform 363 2CENESAS 7 Symbol File Format 364 2CENESAS 8 Keyboard Shortcuts 8 Keyboard Shortcuts All major commands in the HEW application can be driven by the keyboard Below is a list of all keyboard commands in the application Function key Key Function ALT 0 9 Play a macro assigned to keyboard shortcut ALT K Open the workspace window ALT O Open the output window ALT F4 Exit the application ALT BACKSPACE Undo alternative in the editor to CTRL Z CTRL 0 9 Reserved for use for template insertion CTRL A Select all in the editor May also work in other windows CTRL B Open the Breakpoints dialog box CTRL C Copy CTRL D Open the disassembly window CTRL F Open the Find dialog box CTRL G Go to source line CTRL H Replace CTRL I Open the IO window CTRL K Open the stack trace window CTRL L Open the command line window CTRL M Open the memory window CTRL N Create a new source file in the editor CTRL O Open the open file dialog box CTRL P Print CTRL R Open the registers window CTRL S Save the current file CTRL U Open the status window CTRL V Paste CTRL X Cut CTRL Y Redo CTRL Z Undo CTRL F2 Toggle bookmark CTRL F3 Search for the next occurrence of the text chosen in the editor or open the Find dialog box CTRL F4 Close the editor window CTRL F6 Switch windows in the editor CTRL F7 Build file CTRL F9 Enable or disable a breakpoint on the current line CTRL BA
323. hold down the ALT key while you are selecting the text with the mouse This changes the selection technique from line to column selection 4 3 3 Saving a file To save the contents of an editing window l 2 Select one of the following operations Click the Save File toolbar button OR Press CTRL S OR Select the File gt Save menu option Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save 1s the active window If the file has not been saved before a File Save dialog will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click the OK button to create the file with the name given in the directory specified If the file has been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed To save the contents of an editing window under a new name 1 PA Select the File gt Save As menu option 2CENESAS Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save 1s the active window 83 4 Using the Editor 3 A File Save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click the OK button to create the file with the name given in the directory specified To save the contents of every open editor window 1 Select one of the following operations e Click the Save All toolbar button ail OR e Select the File gt Save All menu option 2 Ifany of the files has not been saved before a File Save dialog will be displayed Enter a filename speci
324. i 26 long min max ar l n g T 26 ale sommes 29 30 00002006 printf H Data Input n al 32 0000201a fori i 0 TAn 33 OOO00e20z2 J randi 34 OO00z2032 ate al eg fae oe 35 OOO02Z036 ie 36 i 37 0002038 ali J 306 OOO002044 printt alsd sld n i afli i 39 a 4 aoe DemoSH4 c 1 Open a source file including a main function in the editor window and modify the program to reduce the number of times to store data into the array Click the Save File button tad on the Editor toolbar Right click on the Test Demo test icon to display a pop up menu Select Run Test Case to start the test oo a oe The progress and result of the test are shown in the Test tab of the Output window 4 ol of al at 21 2t 7 e H Starting tests test suite Test suite Demo co Running test Test Demo 1 of 1 Running batch file macro Demo 1 of 1 Batch file macro finished successfully All tests completed Find in Files Version Control 6 When the test is completed the Test Browser window opens 30 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 13 9 Step 8 Viewing the test result unmatched You can view the test result in the Test Browser window i a Test Name Description Result ff Test_Dema Demonstration FAIL 0 ef Component Result Details CPU Mernory SimSessionSH 4 FAIL Failed in memory range Ue 0000000 Oe F000002 fis Symbol Wratch SimsessionSH 4 FAIL Symbol data i not mat
325. ialog box appears at expansion click the Keep Blocking button Console Root gt Component Services gt Computers gt My Computer 170 2CENESAS oe ee 11 12 13 14 15 16 we 18 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities Right click on My Computer and select Properties from the pop up menu The My Computer Properties dialog box is invoked Click COM Security tab Click the Edit Limits button in the Access Permissions area to open the Access Permission dialog box Select ANONYMOUS LOGON in the Group or user names list Select the Allow checkbox for Remote Activation in the Permission for ANONYMOUS LOGON list Click the OK button and close the Access Permission dialog box Click the Edit Limits button in the Launch and Activation Permission area to open the Launch Permission dialog box Select Everyone in the Group or user names list Select the Allow checkbox for Local Launch in the Permission for Everyone list Select the Allow checkbox for Remote Activation in the Permission for Everyone list Click the OK button and close the Launch Permission dialog box Click the OK button on the My Computer Properties dialog box Close the Component Services window e For a client machine with Windows XP Service Pack 2 Step1 Firewall 2S SS i eS a 10 11 EZ 13 Select Control Panel from the Windows start menu Click Network and Internet Connections in the Control Panel Click Windo
326. ice this machine is providing So if one of the client machines adds a new file the server machine 1s notified The server then notifies all other clients the action has taken place This procedure is shown below Networked workspace and project a Networked Data Example Network Networked Data Example access A Debug H SimDebug 5H 2 Server Network access All files are under the network service s control These include the workspace project session and source files Clients do not access data directly with the workspace and project files onthe network The clients cannot directly communicate with each other ether All communication is directed Clients through the server machine The network system allows users to be given access rights to files This allows the project administrator to make sure the only people who can modify the project and source files are allowed to do so This might allow the administrator to limit each user to only have write capabilities for their own area of the project other areas would be read only This could limit any potential conflict or damage one user could do to other areas of the project These limitations can be set to a number of different levels This is outlined later in this section Note e Certain operations are locked when other clients are carrying them out This means that if one user 1s currently changing the toolchain options all of the other users can only see read only ve
327. ick and select the Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks menu option from the pop up menu 4 6 Printing a file To print a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to print is the active window 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Print toolbar button OR e Press CTRL P OR e Select the File gt Print menu option 4 7 Configuring text layout 4 7 1 Page set up When you print a file from the HEW editor the settings in the print dialog affect the way the file is printed e g double or single sided Control over how the text is formatted on the page can also be controlled via the Page Setup option This allows you to specify the margins top bottom left and right of your printouts It is often necessary to set this because some printers cannot print to the edges of an A4 page Furthermore some users have their own layout requirements e g a large left hand margin so that code can be placed in an A4 binder To set up the page margins 1 Select the File gt Page Setup menu option The Page Setup dialog box will be invoked 2 Enter the width of the margins required into the Left Right Top and Bottom fields 3 Set the Inch or mm option accordingly 4 Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect 90 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor Jw Wrap Text Caneel To set up the header and footer information l 2 Select the File gt Page Setup menu option The Page Setup
328. iecinaasecsaatenaasosacsasasacadaaseaasadapaasiaatnadssaapnacadaassassednaeaeato ase 345 1 5 Listof B ild MENU Renee ee ner ene nee ee eer eee EEEE Peer ee ee 345 Lo Listo Debug Mentsen E aga ese es 346 Le ErtorSemp Menusi ie ienen inae n ENEN ea EEES Eei EEEE EEEE 347 1 8 List of Tools Menu nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrreressesseeeesesereeeeeeens 347 9 Eeto Tesi Menmi ercer E E T oeuseeeseaaes 348 110 Listor window Memi sacmisssimiri ireanii ania ERE R NE REEE 348 IL Eitorf Help Meni erriren EEEE EEC ENEE 348 Ze SOEN AON e E A urges aencteraannetiesntmemanees 349 s Loreo a E A E E T ET E E A A 351 3 1 Command List Alphabetically Order cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 351 32 Command List Listed as the Functions cccccccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 353 A WR OMT AE TER PCS BLOGS aia asnsacisrnacetacunansaarunaciencunansetarseuatead atwasgeeeaamed NEO aE E E E 355 3 POC MO NICE ss ress reterseseeasanaonb onusatekadinanandaouasbnoancenneaursabitadiwaane EEE 357 5 1 Mhat isa placeholder ene een enn ene eee ee nee een eae een eee eee eee ee ee 357 32 Tnserine a A ON CE cisco spscrrrectacroasnsrncip recip raccnsioatsoeiain vad EE EE NEEE EEEE EN 357 5 3 Available placeholders nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnensnnsesssesessseseseseseenesenssessrenenseereresessesesereeereerno 359 34 Placeholder tips socnenornieirap rin a
329. iew click the Memory toolbar button Ge or select the View gt CPU gt Memory menu option You can specify the display start address and the scroll range at opening The Display Address dialog box is opened Enter the Display Address Scroll Start Address and Scroll End Address Display Address Ei Display Address ooonoo0d a Scroll Start Address Jooooo0n0 Fl Scroll End Address FFFFFFFF al Cancel Click the OK button or press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the Memory window opens The display can be scrolled within the range of the entered display scroll start and end addresses 284 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Window configuration Memory 000000 foobar a mms 16 1040 8 2 abc dt dh do de a te 92 AAA oe column address Label Rez ister 1 2 3 4 5 ae aE oa ca Satis 000000 FB 8 USP ISP 00 00 00 oo oo 00 O0 00 00 OO 00 00 OO OO 000010 10 oo oo oo oo on oo oo oo oo oo oo oo on oo o 2 2 mogo 00 00 OO d0 Of OO Of OO 00 00 OC ooognsi 00 00 OO d0 Of OO Of OO 00 OC omongi 00 00 OO 00 Of OO OO OO 00 00 00 Q 000050 00 00 OO 00 Of OO 00 OO 600 00 00 H g 4 Label display area Data display area Code display area Address display ara Register display area e n shows memory data read from Address and n
330. ify the File Use the HEW editor to modify the file and save it In this example the file sampleCVS c is modified 8 Step 8 Using the Version Control facility Check the Status The status of the file sampleCVS c should be checked Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Status menu Select the file in the Status dialog box and click the OK button Sf The Version Control tab of the output window shows the following message Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe status sampleCVS c File sampleCVS c Status Locally Modified Working revision 1 1 1 1 Tue Feb 28 02 46 30 2006 Repository revision 1 1 1 1 C cvs 1 11 17 DATABASE sampleCVS sampleCVS c v Sticky Tag none Sticky Date none Sticky Options none Command s completed successfully The status of the file sampleCVS c is shown as Locally Modified 9 Step 9 Using the Version Control facility Compare The changes made in the file sampleCVS c should be checked Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Diff menu Select the file in the Diff dialog box and click the OK button ae ie The Version Control tab of the output window shows the following message Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe diff sampleCVS c Index sampleCVS c RCS file C cvs 1 11 17 DATABASE sampleCVS sampleCVS c v retrieving revision 1 1 1 1 diff r1 1 1 1 sampleCVS c 28c28 31 lt printf Data Input n gt loop gt while 1 gt 4 gt printi Data
331. iles 9 3 Visual SourceSafe command options You can control the way in which the history and status commands are displayed by selecting the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option l 164 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed Select the General tab Visual Source Sate W Display dialog box for history Display dialog box for file status To display the results of a history command in a dialog box then check the Display dialog box for history checkbox or clear it 1f you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window To display the results of a status command in a dialog box check the Display dialog box for file status checkbox or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 9 4 Version Control setup You can view or modify the general settings for the HEW connected with Visual SourceSafe 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box is displayed 2 Select the General tab User details User User Passiword EEEE E Database C Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio WoS srcsate ini Contizuration file Current version control contieuration tile CAHE WE Workspace Name Workspace Namehyec 3 The User details group box
332. in Available components The Edit Test Memory Ranges dialog box opens 5 Click the Add button to display the Add Memory Range dialog box 6 Enter the start address of an array in Start address and end address in End address and select the size in Access size Click the OK button 28 2CENESAS 1 Overview Add Memory Range ki Ed Start address Ja Cancel End address _a 027 a a ACCESS SIZE d 7 Click the OK button 8 The content of array element a 6 in the Watch sheet is saved into the test image file Double click Watch xxxxxx under Symbol in Available components of the Edit Comparison Settings dialog box The Edit Test Watch dialog box opens Select the checkbox of a 6 in Symbols and click the OK button Edit Test Watch Ei Watch Sheet Wam so Symbols an a Cancel 9 Click the OK button in the Edit Test Image File dialog box In the state of current HEW system the test image specified in test item is acquired and the test image is saved to the test image file created at step5 29 CENESAS 1 Overview 1 13 8 Step 7 Modifying the program before the test In this example the target of the test is a selected range of memory data in arrays Then modify the program to reduce the number of times to store data into the array so that the saved test image information and the actual memory data will not match B al ae long a 1i0 ee 24 OO002000 old mainl void ao
333. in files Go Build Display the editor that generated the next build error or warning Set or remove a breakpoint on the current line Step over Step in Refresh window Clear Toggle insert and overwrite mode Carriage return in the editor Insert a tab in the editor Halt Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line in the editor Move cursor to the end of the current line in the editor Move the page in the editor up Move the page in the editor down Move cursor up in the editor Move cursor down in the editor Move cursor left in the editor Move cursor right in the editor Select column in the editor Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 366 2CENESAS 9 Drag and Drop in the HEW Debugger 9 Drag and Drop in the HEW Debugger When using the HEW debugger it is possible for each debug component to interact with the others This can be achieved simply by dragging objects from one view to another Some examples are listed below 1 Itis possible to drag a label from the labels view onto other debug views So for example if you drag a label onto the disassembly window it will scroll to the address that the label is located at 2 Itis possible to drag a watch variable from the editor into the watch window This adds the watch variable to the window 3 Dragging a function name from the editor into the disassembly should jump the disassembly view to the label location
334. ine at the PC location 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu item The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Debug tab 3 Select the Enable line highlight for PC position checkbox By default this checkbox is selected 4 Click OK 283 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger The color of the line can be customized in the Format Views dialog box The text foreground is in black and the background color is yellow by default To change the colors of the line at the PC 1 Select the Setup gt Format Views menu option The Format Views dialog box will be displayed 2 Select an item for which you wish to change the color from the left hand tree in the dialog box and expand it e If you are opening the editor window or disassembly window in source mode select Source and expand it e If you are opening the editor window or disassembly window in mixed mode or disassembly mode select Disassembly and expand tt Select the PC Line Highlight category 4 Change the selection in the Foreground and Background lists of the Color tab 5 Click OK 17 3 Operating memory This section describes how to look at memory areas in the CPU s address space How to look at a memory area in different formats how to fill and move a memory block and how to load and verify a memory area with a disk file are described 17 3 1 Opening the Memory window The Memory Window displays the contents of contiguous memory To open the Memory v
335. ing the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW 319 17 16 2 Configuring the PD debugger to integrate With HEW cc cccccccccscceceeeceeeeeeeees 319 17 16 3 Configuring an external debugger to integrate with HEW cc ccccccceeeeeeeeeees 320 17 17 Synchronizing multiple debugging platforms ccccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 321 17 17 1 External HEW synchronization c cs lt lt acacnassernssiesineamsdistnnsmanasanaradetuaanadiesneanadatantredeseaansdes 321 17 172 Internal HEW synchronization cccceeeesseeseseeeeeeseessessessssssssssssssssssssessessssaaaees 321 17 18 Debugging functions dependent on the debugging platform ccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 323 17 18 1 Lookino at labe lieser iara A AEAEE A E AORE AEE A A AS 323 17 18 2 EL Bae gn 1G 0 6 9 eee ene Ree eee on eee en eee nn em ne eee ee ee moe eee 326 17 18 3 Looking at variables csse E ese 330 18 FES CUMMING As SOU eria E a E A E EE E E 339 A C beck 6 tb 106 21 00k eee Pe eee E E EE Eee err ee eer 339 15 2 Creating ADUE report assarrar NOE deeds ENANA SNEER A ERS 339 Re E a E E E E E 341 e AST NE eee E A E AEE A E A EE I E 343 1 1 E a A E a T EEEE E E E E N E E E EET 343 IX Table Of Contents Be AGS IV has sass coe sraoananaesgonsnansana seas sata saaesass eei aer Erir EE Enei inen Eredi 343 1 3 ST OM VEO acne an N aetna nc tg cesarean 344 BA Listrot Project MICU caecssct nceencasesceernsc
336. int at the disassembly level SET SOURCE SOFT BREAK SSB Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the source level STATE DISASSEMBLY SOFT BREAK TDB Enables or disables a software breakpoint at the disassembly level STATE SOURCE SOFT BREAK TSB Enables or disables a software breakpoint at the source level Other Debugging Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Abbreviation Description CONNECT 1 CN Connects the debugging platform DISCONNECT 1 DN Disconnects the debugging platform INITIALIZE IN Initializes the debugging platform system 1 Support for this command depends on the debugging platform For the syntax of each command refer to the online help 354 2CENESAS 4 Regular Expressions 4 Regular Expressions The HEW editor allows you to include special characters in search strings when performing a find replace or find in files operation These characters are listed in the table below and explained underneath Character 2 n t Function This character matches any single character except the newline character For example t p matches top tip but not trap This character matches any number of occurrences 0 or more of any character except a newline Thus this character will not match across new lines The character will match as few occurrences as are necessary to make the rest of the pattern match For example t o matches the to of too the
337. into Visual SourceSafe these files can be writable even when they are checked out 9 2 6 Viewing the status of files in Visual SourceSafe Although files appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them Some of the files that are being controlled by Visual SourceSafe will be checked in and others will be checked out 1 e being edited by a user The Get VCS status command displays the current status of files The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the output window or the File s Status dialog box For setting of location where the status is to be displayed see section 9 3 Visual SourceSafe command options To view the status of files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the files whose status you would like to view in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Get VCS status toolbar button ON OR e Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Get VCS status menu option OR e Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Get VCS status 3 The Version Control tab of the output window or the File s Status dialog box shows the status of files 162 2CENESAS 9 2 7 9 Using Visual SourceSafe Undoing a check out command in Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSa
338. ion Click Find to begin the search Any matches found will be displayed in the Find In Files tab of the Output window To stop a Find In Files action once it is under way select the Edit gt Stop Find in Files menu option Once the Find In Files operation is complete you may jump to an instance of the search string by double clicking on the desired entry in the Output window Replacing text Replacing text is similar to finding text as discussed in the previous section The difference is that when the text is found you have the option to replace it with other text To replace text in a file l 2 3 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search Select one of the following operations to display the Replace dialog box Press the CTRL H key OR Select the Edit gt Replace menu option OR Select Replace from the pop up menu in the Editor window 87 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 4 4 Replace Find what X Find Next Replace with Replace Replace In C Selection te whole file C All open files Match whole word only Match case Regular expression Replace All Cancel WU Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the repl
339. ion Drag the button to any toolbar To remove buttons from a toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed Select the Commands tab 2 Click and drag a button from the toolbar onto the Buttons area To modify the name of a user defined toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed 2 Inthe Toolbars list select the user defined toolbar and whose name you want to modify Modify the name of the toolbar in the Toolbar Name field 4 Click the OK button to save the toolbar s new name To remove a user defined toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the user defined toolbar from the Toolbars list and the Reset button will change to a Delete button Click the Delete button To reset a standard toolbar back to its original state 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the standard toolbar from the Toolbars list and then click the Reset button To reset the toolbar position back to its original state 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog box will be displayed 2 Click the Reset Positions button The Reset Positions button reverts all toolbars back to their original factory default positions Be careful as this
340. ion you wish to change the name for Click rename Enter the new meaningful name in the edit field and click OK Click OK to keep the changes and revert to the HEW main window To switch desktop configurations There are a number of ways to switch desktop configuration The first and easiest method is using the virtual desktop buttons located on the status bar These are shown below 3 Build desktop Read write asia 4 In this example the selected desktop is number 1 This has been given the name Build by the user Its description is seen in the edit box to the right on the buttons Clicking a different desktop selects that button and changes the description control Once clicked HEW then loads the windows in the new configurations style Another method of changing the desktop configuration is as follows l pA 128 Click the Window gt Virtual Desktop menu item Select is cascaded menu Then select the desktop configuration you wish to view on this menu The selected item is ticked Select the menu item and the setup is altered automatically 2CENESAS 7 Version Control 7 Version Control The High performance Embedded Workshop HEW provides facilities for connecting to version control system Some of the reasons why version control systems are used with a project are e To maintain the integrity of a project e To store each stage of a project e To enable different users to co develop a project by control
341. ipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under cert
342. is character string and pastes it to the current cursor position Finds text in the current file Replaces text in the current file Jumps to a line in a file Finds a matching brace Sets a bookmark at the current line or clears a bookmark at the current line Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file from the current line Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current file from the current line Clears all bookmarks in the current file Defines a template Inserts a template Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enables or disables the current software breakpoint Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Shows or hides the column header Launches the Instant Watch dialog box with the name extracted from the view at the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Starts executing the user program at the current PC and continues until the PC equals the address indicated by the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Changes the value of the Program Counter PC to the address at the row of the text cursor not mouse cursor Opens the source file or disassembly at the address of the PC Opens a Disassembly window at the address mating the current source line Displays file properties 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 2 Viewing assembly language code The Disassembly mode shows at
343. is function cannot be used when the linkage editor does not support overlay 193 CENESAS 13 Map 13 1 8 Setting a memory map While the HEW is connected with a debugging platform you can set a memory map To set a memory map 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Memory Map Setting 3 The memory map setting dialog box is displayed The current mapping of the address space 1s shown as a list Set a memory map or memory resource as necessary 4 Click the OK button Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 13 1 9 Automatically allocating the memory resource When there is a linkage list file map output by the linkage editor the memory resource can be automatically allocated according to the memory map and linkage map information While the HEW is connected with a debugging platform you can allocate a memory resource To automatically allocate the memory resource 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Memory Resource Auto Allocate The dialog box shown below appears eckmap Ci Is the memory resource allocated 3 To continue processing click OK 4 When allocation is completed the dialog box shown below appears eckmap a ced 1 The allocation of the memory resource was completed Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 13 1 10 Printing out the section settings tree You can also print out th
344. is means that each configuration can be targeted at a different end platform The figure below shows three configurations Default MyDebug and MyOptimized In the first configuration Default each phase compile and assemble is set to its standard settings In the second configuration MyDebug each file is being built with debug information switched on In the third configuration MyOptimized each file is being built with optimization on full and without any debug information The developer of this project can select any of those configurations and build them without having to return to the options dialogs to set them again Default Thy Debug Thy Optinized Configurator Configurator Configurator a Debug OH Debug OH Deb ug OE Optimize OFF Optimize OFF Optimize ON Liat File FES Liat File HO Liat File HO CG Source Files Y Debug OFF Debug OH Debug OE Liat File YES Liat File NO Liat File HO Assembler Source Files Clty Proje cti Defaut Coy Prope ctii Debug Citir Proje cth Osten zed 2 7 1 Selecting a build configuration To select the current configuration 1 Select the Build gt Build Configurations menu option The Build Configurations dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the build configuration that you want to use from the Current Configuration drop down list 3 Click the OK button 46 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics You can also select a different build configu
345. ject Select either of the following operations e Click the Browse button to open the Select Visual SourceSafe database dialog box Select the Visual SourceSafe database file and click the Select button OR o lect Visual sourcesate database Look ir vss de t data mind netsetup xd6 erceafe ini o BE File name ercsafe ini Files of type visual SourceSafe databases fsrcsafeini Cancel L ae e Enter the full path of the Visual SourceSafe database file in the Database path field 6 The Create SourceSafe Project For Workspace dialog box was displayed ate Sourcesate Project For Workspace Cancel 7 The Project name field shows the name of the HEW workspace The Project name field displays the name of the project 1 e folder to be created in the database If necessary you can change this name to another 8 The tree underneath the Project name field shows the structure of the database specified in Step 5 Select the folder into which you would like to create the folder specified in Project name 9 Click the OK button in the Create SourceSafe Project For Workspace dialog box 156 CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 10 The Create SourceSafe Project dialog box was displayed The example below shows that the HEW workspace Workspace Name is added as a project Workspace Name into Visual SourceSafe database The Project name field shows Poject_ Name that is to be c
346. ject types appear in the Tools Administration dialog box and are initially hidden in the System Components part of the Tools Administration tree To export one of the Custom Project Generators select the Export button on the Tools Administration dialog box The export functionality packages the Custom Project Generator into a binary file which includes an executable This can be given to another user who then runs the executable This installs the Project Generator into the correct location on the target user s machine Note A project template can be created by selecting Project gt Create Project Type based on the project in use This template includes the version information of the toolchain When a project is created by using this template after the toolchain version has been updated in your HEW system check that the toolchain version of the created project matches the using environment When the registered toolchain can be updated the toolchain version can be changed in the dialog box that is displayed by selecting Tools gt Change Toolchain Version Change Toolchain Yersion Uk Toolchain name Renesas Super RISC ea Current version 3 0 0 0 C i ance CPU Farnily SuperH RISC engine bi Toolchain Renesas SuperH AISC engine Star Peme Toolchain version 901 0 9 0 0 0 Toolchain build phases BARAI OptLinker SH Assembler r 0001 SH C C Compiler 3 00 01 SH C C Library Generator 3 00 02 1
347. jects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof Select one of the following operations i Click the Get from VCS toolbar button OR Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Get from VCS menu option OR Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Get from VCS 159 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 3 9 2 4 Get from WOS Wl Wworkapace_Name hwa EH E Wi ak Froject_Name hwp EHE W Wh Project Name c EAH EWS ih typedef ine h CHEW Midbsct c KH a Bete PT The Get from VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to obtain and click the OK button Checking out writable copy of files from Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive This can only be done if another user has not already checked out a blue mark next to file name the files in question To check out writable copy of files from Visual SourceSafe l 160 Select the files that you would like to check out from Visual SourceSafe in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof Select
348. kspace Ok Cancel E SHE WoWworkepace DemoSh4 De idi Administration Browse to another project workspace If you have recently used a workspace Open a recent project workspace is selected by default Otherwise Create a new project workspace is selected To create a new workspace select the Create a new project workspace button and click the OK button To open one of the recent project workspaces select the Open a recent project workspace button select a workspace from the drop down list and click the OK button The Recent Workspace list displays the same content as that seen in the workspace most recently used File list This list also appears on the file menu To open a workspace by specifying a workspace file HWS file select the Browse to another project workspace button and click the OK button To register or un register a tool from the HEW click the Administration button Click the Cancel button to use the HEW without opening a workspace If you do not wish to open the Welcome dialog box next time you launch the HEW select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box is displayed Remove a tick mark from the Display Welcome Dialog checkbox in the Confirmation tab If you do not wish to view the start up screen when launching the HEW remove a tick mark from the Display Splash Screen checkbox in the Confirmation tab of the Options dialog box 1 5 Creating a new workspace To create a ne
349. l symbol information or those for respective sections You can search for filter or sort this function is not supported by the evaluation version symbol information The source file for the address in the selected line can be opened in the editor window The contents can be printed out e Supported CPUs In HEW V 4 01 or later version the SuperH RISC engine and H8SX H8S and H8 family compiler packages support the map function M16C M32C and M32R family compiler package supports the map function only when the version of the HEW included in the compiler package is V 4 01 or later e To view the information on sections and symbols To view the information on sections and symbols the following setting is required in advance 1 Select Build gt Tool to open the build options SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain dialog box Select List for Category in the Link Library tab Select the Generate list file checkbox This allows output of information on sections Click the Enable all button This allows output of information on symbols Select Build gt Build ge ee 187 2CENESAS 13 Map C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU _4 gt Category List Y I Generate list file Contents Show symbol Wl Show reference 4 Show section Disable all Iw Show cross reference Uptions LinkLibrary hHoprelink rom D F nomessage list CONFIGDIA E PROJECT MAME map sho
350. lay radix ccccccccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 306 773 Switching Register Bank sscicsssrciproreiotedeiri oni esane NEEE EE E ERA 307 UA Sne Me layout eaaa 307 17 7 5 Choosing a register to be displayed ccccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 308 1757 6 Modifying register contents 4ic0scciedsnsxeseavesarandvosvsaetsandreedvendseeevesdvandvorstantdnanceeceessereetreees 309 WT ocne the ar Valte sosire EE 309 Table Of Contents 17 7 8 Splitting up the window display cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 310 17 7 9 Saving register contents rc sasieciesesiccatetenadevetaaenadensnsdeeedenceciegepadevetanarsneseeteiaeadoceniees 310 17 7 10 Using register COMLCINS sc sccaaunsenadarnacssaannacseaaanadanaaswadsedapnacsieanadsaaasaadadaanaaeeansentectnneseeas 310 17 7 11 Customizing the color of the changed values ccccccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 310 178 Resetting the target MCU s cassssonsncespernetiesesssciesesseategevsicciseyedegonss ENA ENNEN NNE NES 310 179 Setting PC to the address At CUSO scxcssiccsnacaceasnatsciasmadssecasadsieagmadaswaswadsiagnad EEEE EEN 311 17 10 Initializing the debugging platform ccccceeceeseessesesseseeeeeessesesesssssssssssssetessaaaaaas 311 17 11 Connecting disconnecting the debugging platform cc ccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 311 A2 Exe
351. ld process revisited Chapter 2 Build Basics began by describing the build process in terms of a compiler an assembler and a linker This will be the case for most installations of the High performance Embedded Workshop However if you want to begin changing the build process e g adding and removing phases then it is important to understand more about the way in which a build functions 3 1 1 What is a build Building a project means applying a set of tools upon certain input files in order to produce the desired output Thus we apply a compiler upon C C source files in order to create object files we apply an assembler upon assembler source files in order to create object files and so forth At each step or phase of the build we apply a different tool upon a different set of input files The figure below presents a different view of the build process PHASE 1 Phase 1 Input Files i PHASE Phase 2 Input Files P Phase 2 Output Files PHASE X Phase Input Files Phase Output Files The High performance Embedded Workshop provides the ability to change this build process via its Build Phases dialog box which can be accessed by selecting the Build gt Build Phases menu option On the left hand side are the phases that are defined in the current project 61 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Build phase order aM er Ott CIDE ST Te cusaneumenn
352. le 1 Select the file rcs sample c in the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Tools gt Version Control gt Check out 2 The MS DOS command prompt window appears and shows the result of check out 3 Enter exit and press the Enter key This closes the MS DOS command prompt window 146 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 4 A HEW confirmation dialog box appears Click Yes The file has returned to its original state 7 Step 7 Using the Version Control facility View Logs Use the log command to view the changes 1 Select the file rcs sample c in the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Tools gt Version Control gt Log 2 The MS DOS command prompt window appears and shows the log information Enter exit and press the Enter key This closes the MS DOS command prompt window 8 11 2 Connecting the HEW with CVS In this example the HEW is to be connected with CVS e CVS tool environment The following type of version control system can be used o CVS This procedure assumes that the version control system is located at C cvs 1 11 17 e Workspace Create a HEW workspace in the following folder C WorkSpace sampleCVS Then create a folder for CVS C src sampleCVS Note In this version control using the HEW and CVS only versions of source files can be controlled It cannot control versions of any other files such as workspace or project files The following pages
353. le gt Recently Downloaded Modules submenu The Format drop down list box contains a list of supported object format Note this does not have to match the default object format However you can only debug modules that match the format specified in the debug settings dialog default object format field The Filenames can be specified with placeholders or as an absolute setting It is recommended to use placeholders The Access size field specifies the access width when the memory is accessed The Download debug information only checkbox can be used when you wish to download the debugging information The Perform memory verify during download checkbox can be used to do additional checks when downloading the module to ensure it was correctly downloaded to the target device The Download automatically on target connection checkbox can be used to automatically download the module when the target is being connected 10 Click the OK button Select the Debug gt Debug Settings menu item The Debug Settings dialog box will be invoked The module is added to the bottom of the Download modules list on the Target tab If a module previously downloaded is modified outside the HEW a confirmation dialog box appears asking if you wish to download this module again To download the module again select Yes Otherwise select No or Cancel 257 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Confirmation Request ki Download module c workspacesh4 sh debugs
354. le named Readme txt in the project directory 1 To create a new project having information from makefile HEW can analyze GNU make format and Hmake format HEW generated and create a workspace which has file information from makefile Open the New Project Workspace dialog box and select the Import Makefile as project type After supplying some fields e g Workspace Name and pressing OK button New Project Import Makefile dialog box is appeared 249 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Hew Project 1 6 Import Makefile F Makefile path ESH EW WorkspacessH4 D emo mal D Import options Start Source files E Project Aa C source file n dbsct c Add 5 lovec Z me resetprg c al bese sbrk c Remove SH4_Demo c Baa Assembly source fil bese Intprg src E Loualyel ore at p l Show file path lt Back Next gt Eime Cancel When a makefile is selected by Makefile path Source files shows source files in the makefile To view the source files in the makefile again click Start To apply toolchain options such as the compiler select the Import options check box If you want to remove a file from the project you can remove it by selecting the file and pressing Remove button And if you want to add a file to the project you can add it by pressing Add button Selecting the Show file path check box shows the full path of the file 17 1 3 Editing project configuration If you ar
355. le on your machine Click OK and the toolbar is added to the Macros toolbar To assign a macro to a menu l a ot ae Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed Select the macro file which contains the function you want to assign Select the macro function in the Macro functions list that you want to assign Click the Assign button The Macro assign dialog box 1s displayed Select the Assign to Menu Name check box You can now modify the macro description in the Description field This will be used as the menu tool tip if you assign the macro to menu Enter the menu name as you want it to appear on the tools menu Click OK and the menu is added to the Tools menu To assign a macro to a keyboard shortcut l St a E Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed Select the macro file which contains the function you want to assign Select the macro function in the Macro functions list that you want to assign Click the Assign button The Macro assign dialog box is displayed Select the Assign to Keyboard Shortcut check box Select the keyboard shortcut you wish to assign to the macro in the drop down list Click OK and the shortcut is now available for use 15 9 Configuring the Macro tab of the Output window Shows the current records of macros You can view information such as HEW command line commands recorded into a HEW macro file from execution of
356. le options Pop up Menu Options Macro Recording Function Open lt file name gt Opens a file in the HEW editor Open lt file name gt in external editor 1 Opens a file in the external editor Build lt file name gt i Builds a file Build Options Sets build options Add File Adds files to a project Remove File Removes files from project Exclude Build Excludes a project file from build OR OR Include Build Includes a project file in build Version Control Executes a version control system Configure View Configures the workspace view Show Differences Compares files Properties Displays file properties 1 This option is available only when the Use external editor checkbox is selected in the Editor tab of the Options dialog box opened via Setup gt Options Right clicking on the Download modules folder opens a pop up menu containing the available options Available when the debugger is connected Pop up Menu Options Macro Recording Function Download all module CI Downloads all modules in the Download modules list on the Target tab of the Debug Settings dialog box i e download modules shown under the Download Modules folder in the Projects tab of the workspace window Download A New Module CI Opens the Download Module dialog box which allows you to add download modules Debug Settings Opens the Debug Settings which allows you to modify the debug settings Configure View Configures the workspace view
357. le stores the comparison data for the system to be compared to after the tests have executed This file can be created by using the Test gt Create Test Image File menu option Clicking OK adds the test to the Modify Test Suite dialog box 2tENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility Add Test Script Script tepe O O OO O O OOOO O iii Cancel HE hd ACTO i Select macros to add to test C Download Default NewMacro Default 16 5 Creating a test image file The test image data is what is used for any comparison in the test system Only items that are saved in the test file can be compared For example you may only be interested in comparing data that is located in a small area memory not the memory for the entire device The more items that you compare for each test will slow down the comparison and this can make a big difference if you are executing many tests To create test image data to be saved into a test image file l Select the Test gt Create New Test Image File The Create New Test Image dialog box is then displayed Create Hew Test Image Avallable components zo EI l Stac kT race Simoes sion SH ai ie EE E Trace SimSessionSH 4 O CPU O SimSessionSH 4 naen Bd Register SimSessionSH 4 bese J J Simulated 1 0 SimSessionSH 4 om Output fee c Build Output Window Import bases oR Debug Output Wwindow SimS essiansH 4 ces Symbol late go Locals SimSessian SH 4
358. le will be shown in the workspace window The files will be shown under the download module Files will be grouped according to file type and shown under their relevant folder If no file type for that file exists they will be grouped under their extension folder When you double click on a file the external editor is launched with the file If you wish to open the file in the editor window see section 2 5 File extensions and file groups Files that could be located will be shown under the download module shown in a normal icon E Bey Debug nly Z zl E Debug nly FS Download modules SSESE Tutorial abs OOO00000 C header file p hee libh machine h ban sbrk h 3 a zart A an stacksct h 2 stddef h E stdio h on E stdlib h BS C source file By C source file Z reselprg cpp oe Z zort cpp oe Z tutorial cpp 2 E3 Dependencies Files that could not be located will be shown under the download module but will have a red icon To distinguish these files you can view the full path of the file To view the full paths of all files l 2 3 4 262 Right click anywhere inside the Projects tab of the Workspace window Select the Configure View menu item The Configure View dialog box will be displayed Select the Show file paths check box Click OK 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Z zl E Debug nly E DebugOnly a Download modules E l t CHEM
359. lect one of the following operations e Click the Build File toolbar button ES OR e Select the Build lt file gt option from pop up menu OR e Select the Build gt Build File menu option OR e Press CTRL F7 All output is redirected to the Build tab of the Output window 2 8 2 Building a project The Build option only compiles or assembles those files that have changed since the last build Additionally it will rebuild source files if they depend upon a file that has changed since the last build For instance if the file TEST C include s the file HEADER H and the latter has changed since the last build the file TEST C will be recompiled 47 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics To perform a build operation Select one of the following operations Press F7 OR Select the Build gt Build menu option OR Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select the Build gt Build option from the pop up menu The Build All option compiles and assembles all source files irrespective of whether they have been modified or not and links all of the new object files produced To perform a build all operation Select one of the following operations Click the Build All toolbar button E41 OR Select the Build gt Build All menu option OR Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select the Build gt Build All option from the pop up menu All out
360. lection of the toolchain the HEW automatically creates session DefaultSession If you have selected a target debugging platform at creation of the project a session is automatically created for connecting the HEW with the selected debugging platform For example if you have selected SH 4 Simulator in Target at creation of a project session SimSessionSH 4 is automatically created How to set up HEW debugger options To set up HEW debugger options kept with a session select the session from the drop down list box in the Debug Settings dialog box opened from the Build menu Options can be set up in the Target and Options tabs HEW debugger options dialog box Selecting a session and setting up options in the Target and Options tabs Debug Settings SimSessionSH 4 Target l Options Sessions apes Ad esri SH Simulatori Default debug format El Dwarl2 Download modules Filename Offset Format HCONFIGDIR PAFA OOO00000 EllOwaite See section 17 1 6 Debugger sessions for more information about a Debugger sessions 17 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 13 Overview of Macro Recording Support facility and Test Support facility If the program is modified after completion of the test this program must be tested again Re testing takes a significant number of steps in development of programs You can use the test support facility to save the data in specific windows as test image data into files This test imag
361. led Verify failed appears Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 3 27 Customizing the current colors The color and font of the data or codes shown in the Memory window can be customized in the Format Views dialog box in the same manner as the color and font in other windows Now it is also possible to customize the color of the changed values or accessed memory which are shown in the data or code field of the Memory window in the Format Views dialog box To customize the current colors 1 Select the Setup gt Format Views menu option The Format Views dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Memory item from the tree in the left hand section of the dialog box and expand it Select a category for which you wish to change the color The following keyword groups are available Category Foreground color in the Background color in the Color tab Default Color tab Default Normal Black White Accessed 1 Black Sky blue During coverage measurement Executed codes Not Accessed 1 Black Gray During coverage measurement Codes not executed Unknown 1 Black White No Memory 1 Gray Gray Modified Changed values Red White 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 296 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 4 Change the selection in the Foreground and Background lists of the Color tab 5 Click OK 17 4 Displaying memory contents as an Image The memory contents can be
362. led The connection between file group and which phase s to execute 1s managed by the Build File Order tab of the Build Phases dialog box The list displays all of the current phases that will be executed when the build file operation is selected upon the file group shown in the File group list box In figure below the C source file file group is selected and the Compiler and MyPhase phases are associated with it Entries in the Phase order list of the Build File Order tab are added automatically as new entries are added to the Build Order tab Build Order Build File Order File Mappings File group Phage order WISH OG Compiler My Phase source Tile is G source tile l Linkage symbol file For example if you were to add a phase which takes C source files as input then this phase will be automatically added to the list of phases to execute when a build file operation is applied to a C source file If you don t want a certain phase to execute when Build gt Build File is selected then clear the check box to the left of the phase name in the Phase order list 3 3 3 File Mappings tab By default the files input to a build phase are only taken from the project 1 e all project files of the type specified in the Select input file group drop down list on the New Build Phase dialog box Select the Build gt Build Phases menu option The Build Phases dialog box will be displayed If you would
363. led CoN To stop the program e Click on the Halt toolbar button D OR e Choose the Debug gt Halt Program menu option Your program s execution is halted with the message Break User Break displayed on the Status Bar The HEW will then update any open views The cause of the last break can also be viewed in the Platform tab of the Output view 17 13 2 Standard PC breakpoints When you are trying to debug your program you will want to be able to stop the program running when it reaches specific points in your code You can do this by setting a program counter PC breakpoint on the line or instruction at which to want the execution to stop The following instructions will show you how to quickly set and clear simple PC breakpoints If more complex breakpoint Operation is supported by the target it may provide a Breakpoints view 315 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger To set a program counter PC breakpoint 1 Make sure that the source or disassembly view is open at the place at which you want to set a PC breakpoint 2 Select the Toggle Breakpoint pop up menu item or press F9 at the line showing the address at which you want the program to stop You will see a red circle appear in the gutter to indicate that a PC breakpoint has been set 4 Itis also possible to add remove and edit the current breakpoint setup by selecting the Edit gt Source Breakpoints menu option 5 Now when you run your program and it re
364. ling revisions to its source files Figure below illustrates a typical project where a version control system is in use This shows three users who all use the same shared network drive to exchange source code The version control system provides access and updates to the source files 129 2CENESAS 7 Version Control e Files Supported for Version Control by the HEW Version control by the HEW basically supports the following types of files File type Extension Group File Extension Supported CPU Type Workspace file HEW Workspace hws Common Project file HEW Projects hwp Common File for version control Configuration file hve Common Source file C source file ic Common C source file cpp SuperH RISC engine H8S H8SX H8 300 Assembly source file a30 M32C M16C asm SuperH RISC engine H8S H8SX H8 300 mar src Include file C header file h Common C header file hpp SuperH RISC engine H8S H8SX H8 300 Assembly include file inc Common Other types of files can also be supported once they are added to the project e Version Control System that can be Connected with the HEW HEW does not provide the version control system itself It must be installed in your PC in advance The HEW can be connected to the version control system via the GUI interface First select a version control system which you wish to connect with the HEW Either of the followings can be selected Type Version Control System Description Name Displayed on Scree
365. listed below Function The source file relating to the current PC address will be opened if available It allows keywords are highlighted correctly if you are viewing source files This view is read only and cannot be edited This view is only available when the module is downloaded This view allows line numbers address breakpoints and source codes to be viewed The mixed mode facility in the disassembly window is different to a source file mixed mode Instead of showing the continuous disassembly it shows the disassembly that is related to each line of source code This view can be edited the assembly language code and is only available when the module is downloaded This view allows breakpoints address object codes labels and disassembled codes to be viewed The disassembly mode shows the true continuous disassembly code in address order This view can be the assembly language code and is only available when a target is attached to the session This view allows breakpoints address object codes labels and disassembled codes to be viewed 1 Viewing the code When switching to the source mode from within the disassembly window the source file relating to the current PC address will be opened if available Otherwise either the most recently open disassembly window source be opened Any text based file will be re opened where possible or a prompt will be given to select a source file to files may be opened in the disassembly windo
366. llowing operations e Click the Toggle Bookmark toolbar button bll OR e Press CTRL F2 OR e Select the Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark menu option OR e Right click and select the Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark menu option from the pop up menu 3 The bookmark icon will be removed from the line To jump to the next bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Next Bookmark toolbar button Hel OR e Press F2 OR e Select the Edit gt Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark menu option OR e Right click and select the Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark menu option from the pop up menu To jump to the previous bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Previous Bookmark toolbar button Hel OR e Press SHIFT F2 OR e Select the Edit gt Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark menu option OR 89 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor e Right click and select the Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark menu option from the pop up menu To remove all bookmarks 1 Ensure that the window whose bookmarks you want to remove is the active window 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Clear All Bookmarks toolbar button Gel OR e Select the Edit gt Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks menu option OR e Right cl
367. llowing operations e Select the Project gt Add Files menu option OR e Right click on the project within the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Add Files from the pop up menu OR e Press the Insert key when the Projects tab of the workspace window is selected 2 The Add files to project project name dialog box will be displayed Select the file s you wish to add to the project 4 A Relative Path checkbox is available at the bottom of the Add files to project lt project name gt dialog box Selecting this checkbox allows the files to be relative project files These project files are relative to the workspace file and can also be placed outside the workspace structure Even if you re allocate the entire source tree the HEW is able to check the relative position of the files to find them By default this checkbox is selected 5 A Hide Project Files checkbox is available at the bottom of the Add files to project lt project name gt dialog box Selecting this checkbox only shows the files not added to the current project By default this checkbox is not selected 6 Click the Add button There are other ways to add files to a project e Right clicking on an open file in the Editor window displays a pop up menu If the file is already in the project then the Add File To Project menu option is disabled Select the Add File To Project menu option to add the file to the current project e Inthe HEW it is also po
368. load lt File name of the Modules download module gt All Download Modules Unload lt File name of the Modules download module gt All Downloaded Modules Setup Radix Hex 16 Decimal l Oct A Bin F 1 Refer to the help of an emulator or simulator 2 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform e Windows GO TILL STEP STEP OVER STEP_OUT See Dialog boxes STEP MODE STEP MODE STEP MODE HALT INITIALIZE CONNECT DISCONNECT FILE SAVE FILE VERIFY FILE LOAD FILE LOAD ALL FILE UNLOAD FILE UNLOAD ALL RADIX RADIX RADIX RADIX While recording a macro if you perform in place edit double click a column click on a pop up menu or make any setting in a dialog box opened by clicking the pop up menu as shown in the table below the command in HEW command line commands recorded into macros will be recorded into a macro file To open the editor window double click a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Window Target Projects tab of the Pop up menu ofa Workspace window workspace Pop up menu of a project Pop up menu of a project file Pop up menu of a Download modules folder Pop up menu of a download module lt File name of the download module gt Editor and Disassembly source mode Pop up menu 212 Function Handling Clean All Projects 2 Build 2 Build All 2 Clean Current Project 2 Set as Current Project Build lt File n
369. loating point double precision floating point or ASCII values so the HEW also provides an I O Registers view to ease the inspection and setting up of these registers To open an I O Registers view select the View gt CPU gt IO menu option or click the View I O toolbar button fl Modules that match the on chip peripherals organize the I O register information When an I O Registers view is first opened only a list of module names is displayed 17 6 1 Opening the IO window To open the IO window select View gt CPU gt IO or click the View IO toolbar button il Modules that match the on chip peripheral modules organize the I O register information When the IO window is first opened only a list of module names is displayed 303 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Window configuration SF COOO FFOO0004 oo000000 FFOOOGO08 oo000000 FFOOO00c FFOOOO A FFOO0O010 OO000000 e Expanding the I O register bit display e Ifthe I O register bit value is changed the value is displayed in red e Double clicking the I O register bit display line opens a dialog which allows you to change a register value Macro Recording e The I O register bit contents line can be changed by in place editing Macro Recording Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displa
370. ls EES Symbols Curent Setting 2 To specify a symbol to be saved into the test image file select the checkbox for that symbol The selected symbol is shown in Current Setting 3 Click OK e Symbol Watch Test image data to be saved into test image files Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Watch window acquired with this setting Checkboxes for all symbols are blank by default Test result details Failed at symbol Unmatched symbol name Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at symbol a 6 Sre long H 00002704 70000018 Dest long H 00000daa 70000018 To make detailed setting 1 Opens the Edit Test Watch dialog box 231 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility Edit Test Watch Watch Sheet Watch OF symbols Cancel a t Curent Setting e 2 To specify a symbol to be saved into the test image file select Watch Sheet and the checkbox for that symbol The selected symbol is shown in Current Setting 3 Click OK i e The simulator debugger for the SuperH RISC engine family and the H8SX H8S H8 families of MCUs The following table shows these test items in the Create New Test Image dialog box Test items cannot be selected when the HEW is not connected to a debugging platform Menu Menu Option Keyboard Toolbar Window Create New Test Image di
371. lue Value Radix Hex T Set As whole Resister z ZEN You can enter a number or C C expression in the Value field You can choose the radix from the Radix drop down list box You can choose whether to modify the entire contents of the register a masked area floating bits or flag bits by selecting an option from the Set As drop down list box the contents of this list depends on the CPU model and selected register When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press Enter The dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 17 7 7 Setting the flag value When the flag itself is displayed Click the button of the flag to be changed Every time you click the button the flag status 1 0 is switched If a flag is composed of multiple bits a dialog is opened where you can enter a value to be changed Example of SH 4 debugger When the flag is displayed in the register Double click the FLG line A dialog is opened Enter the value to be changed 309 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Example of SH 4 debugger FLG line FPSCR 17 7 8 Splitting up the window display To vertically divide the Register window display into two select Split from the pop up menu and move the split up bar To cancel the split up display select Split from the pop up menu again 17 7 9 Saving register contents To save register contents in a text file choose Save To File menu f
372. lumn header Save Disassembly Text Saves the specific range Print Prints the specific range Toggle Breakpoint I Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enable Disable Breakpoint CI Enables or disables the current software breakpoint 6 Refreshing the disassembly view Even if some external operation changes the memory contents shown in the Disassembly view the HEW cannot detect the change For example if you use the external flash utility to program the range of memory being displayed the Disassembly view will not be reflected Right click on the Disassembly filed in disassembly mode or mixed mode and select Refresh This acquires the latest information of the data being displayed and updates the contents of the view 7 Disassembly lock refresh It is possible to lock a memory range in the disassembly view so that it does not refresh This function is called the disassembly lock refresh Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode or mixed mode and select Lock Refresh The Lock Refresh dialog box will be displayed Lock Refresh Ei M Locked ook Start Address Joooo2000 ance End Address poooz El eS Check the Locked check box The controls should now enable Select the start and end address that should be locked and cached so that no updates are displayed Click OK The view refreshes to only show the locked area 8 Looking at a specific address
373. m Build Commands Available only when there is a toolchain installed Command Name BUILD BUILD_ALL BUILD FILE BUILD MULTIPLE CLEAN GENERATE MAKE FILE Abbreviation BU BL BF BM CL GM UPDATE ALL DEPENDENCIES UD Command Line Operating Commands Command Name ASSERT AUTO COMPLETE ERASE HELP LOG SLEEP SUBMIT TCL Abbreviation AC ER HE LO SU Test Supporting Facilities Commands Command Name CLOSE TEST SUITE COMPARE TEST DATA OPEN TEST SUITE RUN TEST Abbreviation CTS CTD OTS RT Description Performs a build on the current project Performs a build all on the current project Performs a build on the file Performs a build on the multiple projects and configurations Deletes intermediate and output files produced in building Generates a build makefile for the current workspace Updates the current projects build dependencies Description Comment Checks if an expression is true or false Switches the auto completion Clears the Command Line window Displays help for Command Line or help on a command Controls command output logging Delays command execution Executes a file of commands Turns TCL commands on or off Description Closes the current test suite Compares test data and create results Opens a test suite Runs a test 353 2CENESAS 3 List of Commands Execution Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Abbreviation Description GO GO Runs pro
374. m the Project files list Click the Remove button to remove the file s or click the Remove All button to remove all files from the list Click the OK button to remove the files from the project Remove Project Files EI EI Project files Serre Erte EEE EEL LLL CHE WwiWorkspacesSH4demosSH Cancel lowly ere CAHE W workspaces H 4demosSH lowenc c CAHE Workspaces H 4demos SH Remove resetprg c CAHE W workspaces H 4demosSH sbrk c CAHE Wa ork spaces H 4demo5H SH4demo c C SHEWWorkspace SH4demo SH Remove All vecttbl sre CAHE W w ork spaces H 4demoa5H vhandler sre CAHE Workspace H 4demosSH H To remove selected files from a project using the Projects tab of the Workspace window l Select the files that you want to remove in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Multiple files can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key Press Delete A confirmation dialog box opens for you to select whether or not to delete the selected files from the project To delete the selected files select Yes Otherwise select No 39 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics Confirmation Request ed l Are you sure you want to delete these tiles from the project T Don t ask this question again If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open this dialog box again select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box Select the Delet
375. mage of the selected test items which you wish to use for comparison After completion of the test macros the selected test items are compared The result is displayed in the test browser window If there 1s any difference between the test result and the saved the test image file the result of the test item is shown as FAIL You can view the details of the error by double clicking the line of this test item 20 2CENESAS 1 Overview Test Browser E Ba 1 Test Name Description Result I TEST A Load and Reset and Step FAIL Aoo ooo k Component Result Details al CPU Memory SimSessionSH 4 FAIL Failed in memory range OxQ0000000 Ox0Q000000t 1 13 1 Example of test procedures This page introduces an example of test procedures which is a sequence through build and debugging using the macro recording support facility and test support facility This example uses a program that sorts ten random data items written in C language which are typically included in the Tutorial project in an emulator debugger or in a project for which Demonstration has been selected as the project type in the SuperH RISC engine simulator in ascending descending order This example lets you see a difference in data stored in an array 4 a Before starting the test in this example array global variable in the program code must be changed from a local to e Before test First open a workspace and connect t
376. mat of sampling Valid when YCbCr is selected An example is shown below Sampling Ratio Original Data Sampling Data Size of an Image 4 4 pixels 11 12 13 14 P1222324 31 32 33 34 41 42 43 44 11 11 13 13 21 21 23 23 31 31 33 33 41 41 43 43 11 11 13 13 11 11 13 13 31 31 33 33 31 31 33 33 11 11 11 11 21 21 21 21 31 31 31 31 41 41 41 41 Format Specifies Chunky planar Valid when YCbCr is selected Format Order of Data Chunky Y Cb Cr Y Cb Cr Y Cb Cr Y Cb Cr Invalid when 4 2 0 is selected planar Y Y Y Y Cb Cb Cb Cb Cr Cr Cr Cr planar2 Y Y Y Y Cb Cr Cb Cr Cb Cr Cb Cr Specifies the area to store data size and the address of the palette Data Address Specifies the start address of the memory where image data is to be displayed Displayed in hexadecimal Palette Specifies the start address of the memory of color palette data Address Displayed in hexadecimal Valid when 8Bit is selected for RGB or BGR Width Height Specifies the width and height of the image Size Width Pixel Specifies the width of the image When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Height Pixel Specifies the height of the image When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Buffer Size Hex Displays the buffer size of the image from the width and height Displayed in hexadecimal Specifies the location size and data start location of the
377. mati Oeri ea E E E N ES EOE TASE EE 210 15 5 Functions that can be recorded into macro files ec ceceeeeeessssteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseessssnaaaeees 211 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all HEW products ccccccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 211 15 5 2 Recordable functions dependent on the debugging platform ccceceeeeeeeees 213 o Payne a Ma eE n EE a aE E EEEE a 216 a EOE a Ma Oen E E E 216 15 6 PU METIS a MAC cnc sss e E sess eee 216 15 9 Configuring the Macro tab of the Output WindOW ccccccccsseeessssseeeeeeeeeeeeesssssessssenaaas 217 lo Usmo the Test Support Facility sirrien ni ine a En ad seasvetoneseeeeos eto hos 219 yi Table Of Contents 16 1 Creating a test SUITE sss cic cassncacnsansenannseuadandenasasaaeeaseioasesantaasuanetotenasaiaateaseroiazenineesensioeeeaees 219 16 2 Opening and closing test SUItCS ccccceeeeeessessessssseeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeesereeeagaas 220 lo Eding a estame soosi isir Enne nran ane a EEEE Era a E a EGER 220 16 4 Adding tests to the test suite ccc ceeessssssssssssssssssssssesssessessseeseeesseseeeeseseesesseeseeeeegaas 222 16 5 Creating atest mage Tile asaipcts sans qeenesenteadenisepesss Tn TANNE eee eee 223 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image data into test image files 0 0 0 0 cceeeceeeeeeeees 224 16 6 1 Functions that can be saved into test image files common to all HEW products 225 16 6 2 Functio
378. menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Options Toolbar button Function Go to Occurrence Go to the associated source line Clear Window CA Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Macro tab Shows the current records of macros macro recording support facility You can view information such as HEW command line commands recorded into a HEW macro file from execution of Tools gt Macro Recording to Tools gt Stop Macro It is also possible to view this information while recording For details on the macro recording support facility see Chapter 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar 2CENESAS 1 Overview The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Options Toolbar button Function Clear Window CA Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the select
379. menu options Macro Function Recording Refresh Acquires the latest disassembly information to update the contents of the window Lock Refresh It is possible to lock a memory range in the disassembly in disassembly mode so View Source Set Address that it does not refresh Launches editor at location in source Enters a new start address Go To Cursor CI Commences to execute the user program starting from the current PC address The program will continue to run until the PC reaches the address indicated by the text cursor not the mouse cursor or another break condition is satisfied Display PC Displays the disassembled codes at the PC location Set PC Here CI Changes the value of the PC to the address indicated by the text cursor not the mouse cursor Edit Modifies the instruction at that address Find in Range Searches the range for the specified text string Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Define Column Format Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Turn Header On Off Shows or hides the column header Save Disassembly Text Saves the specific range Print Prints the specific range Toggle Breakpoint rol Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enable Disable Breakpoint CI Enables or disables the current software breakpoint 3 Refreshing the disassembly view Even if some external operation changes the memory contents shown in
380. modified file from the version control system click the Yes button If you click the No button the contents of the local file will be different from those of the file in the version control system High performance Embedded Workshop IN CNHE Wo Morkspace Workspace NameProjects Mame slowerc c File was modified externally Would you like to reload it 163 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 9 2 8 Viewing the history of files in Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe controls the edits to the files in its projects and allows you to view the complete history of these edits right back to the time that the file was first added to the project The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the output window or the File s History dialog box For setting of location where the status is to be displayed see section 9 3 Visual SourceSafe command options To view the revision history of files in Visual SourceSafe l Select the files whose history you would like to view in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof Select one of the following operations Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Show History menu option OR Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Show History The Version Control tab of the output window or the File s History dialog box shows the revision history of f
381. mployees against any and all damages arising out of such applications 9 You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges 10 Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures Among others since the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you 11 In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very
382. n Version control by custom Custom VCS Any version control system in which command line settings commands should be executed via the MS DOS command prompt such as CVS RCS or PVCS The commands in the version control system must be defined as being associated with the GUI interface of the HEW Version control by Microsoft R Microsoft Visual Microsoft R Visual SourceSafe 5 0 or 6 0 Main features are Visual SourceSafe 5 0 or 6 0 SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 already defined 7 141 Selecting a Version Control System The Tools gt Version Control sub menu contains eight menu options but only the Tools gt Version Control gt Select option is initially available This is because a version control system is not yet active for the current workspace Select Eoniaue fe addita vies a Reve tani iis Berton ils mh ae a fal Eheck out on vies Eheck irm tawes eb vibe shats 130 2CENESAS 7 Version Control To select a version control system 1 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Select menu option The Select Version Control System dialog box will be displayed which lists all of the supported version control systems Select ersion Control System Ei Version control system Soe Cancel 2 Select the desired version control system from the Version control system list 3 Click the OK button e Once the Custom VCS is selected as a version control system the Version Control gt Configure
383. n a source file on the Projects tab of the workspace window select one of the following ways e Double click the file OR e Select the file and click the right hand mouse button Select Open lt file name gt from the pop up menu OR e Ifthe file has already been selected focused press Enter 84 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor You can also use another editor external editor to open files For details see section 6 9 Using an external editor The High performance Embedded Workshop keeps track of the last four files that you have opened and adds them to the File menu under the File gt Recent Files sub menu To open a recently used file Select the File gt Recent Files menu option and from this sub menu select the desired file 4 3 5 Closing files To close an individual file e Double click the Editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window OR e Click on the Editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window and select the Close menu option OR e Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then press CTRL F4 OR e Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then select the File gt Close menu option To close all files Select the Window gt Close All menu option If you attempt to close an edited file that 1s not saved a confirmation dialog box appears asking if you wish to save the file High performance
384. n the tools administration dialog If the icon has an additional icon this explains the problem There are two additional icons that can be displayed If a component is found but cannot be used due to it being an old version or another dependent component is not available then the icon in figure below is used to show this HdS H8 300 Senes Simulator T arget Platform 3 0 HMon Embedded Monitor Platform 1 0 Intel Hex Record Obiect Reader 1 0 Component not found icon If the component is not located where the registration file says it is then the icon in figure below is used to show this Note Registered components Component superH RISG engine Standard muner H AMSG eneine Standard Incompatible component found icon If the tool has one of these errors then it is possible to get more information by the following method To get tool error feedback l 2 J 4 5 Click the Tools gt Administration menu item Select the tool in the list that has an issue Click Properties Select the information tab and scroll the edit field to the bottom The reason for the problem will be displayed in this area 5 8 Using On Demand components The HEW version 3 0 onwards has the concept of on demand components These components are not automatically loaded by the application or the debugger component These components can be loaded by the user or as part of the project generation process To load or unload an on demand c
385. nd modify documents the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects and similarly a project can be thought of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project contains one or more files The figure below illustrates this graphically WORKSPACE Workspaces allow you to group related projects together For example you may have an application that needs to be built for different processors or you may be developing an application and library at the same time Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project is built all of its child projects are built first However workspaces on their own are not very useful we need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project before we can actually do anything 1 2 Main window There are three main windows the workspace window the editor window and the output window The workspace window shows the projects and files that are currently in the workspace the editor window provides file viewing and editing facilities and the output window shows the results of a various processes e g build version control commands and so on 2CENESAS 1 Overview Title bar ga Tutorial High performance Embedded Workshop resetprg c Menu bar e File Edit View Project
386. nd select Break Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar button Macro Recording Function Add os CI Adding a label Edit Ey Editing a label Delete i Deleting a label Delete All i Deleting all labels Load pe w Loading labels from a file Save mj Saving labels into a file Save As a Saving labels into a file Find ih Searching for a label Fine Next Ffa Searching for the next label View Source m Viewing the source corresponding to a label Print Prints the currently displayed contents Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons 2 Adding a label Choose Add from the pop up menu and open the Add Label dialog box to add a label hdd Label Ei we o Address 00000000 Cancel Enter the new label name into the Name field and the corresponding value into the Address field and press OK The Add Label dialog box closes and the label list is updated to show the new label When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details see section 17 18 2 3 Supporting duplicate labels 324 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugg
387. nd then click the Remove button 6 3 Using custom placeholders Throughout the High performance Embedded Workshop the user can use a number of pre defined placeholders for directory definitions For example the user can use the PROJDIR variable to signify the current HEW project directory This makes it much easier to relocate projects and keep all of the paths correct The High performance Embedded Workshop also has the ability to define custom placeholders This means you can enter your own custom placeholder definition and decide upon its directory value Once defined this placeholder becomes available throughout the rest of the HEW system The placeholders can be defined on an application wide level so the placeholders are available to all workspaces and projects that use the HEW The other method of defining the placeholders is using the workspace wide custom placeholders This means the placeholders can only be used in the current workspace This list is only available when you have a workspace open 116 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Placehalders Application wide custom placeholders Placeholder ie CL JE Hodiy EEE Workspace wide custom placeholders Placeholder Add Modi Remove ji To add a custom placeholder 1 Choose the Setup gt Customize The Tools Customize dialog box will be displayed Select the Placeholders tab 2 Choose whether you need to
388. ndom data to the Watch window trhis records the watch_add command 11 Click the Stop Macro button O on the Macros toolbar The mouse pointer returns to be an arrow 12 The Add New Macro Function dialog box is displayed Enter a macro name e g Demo 19 The message Finished recording Demo is shown in the Macro tab of the Output window To view the recorded HEW command line commands be sure to select the Macro tab of the Output window 23 2CENESAS 1 Overview ol ot al at 21 2t 7 1 H Recording refresh session register set RO 0x0 register set Ri Oxo register set Re Ox0 register set Ra Ox0 register set R4 Ox0 register set RS Ox0 register set Re Oxu register set RY 0x0 register set Ra Oxo register set R9 Oxo register set R10 0x0 register set Ril 0x0 register set Riz 0x0 register set Ris 0x0 register set R14 Oxo build wait file load Elf Dwarfe COMFIGDIR PROJECTMAME abs Ox0 p byte memory fill OxYOOOOO00 x7 O Z 7 OxOOO0 long nowerify reset go till go xz0E4 watch add Watchl a 6 Finished recording Demo AL Build A Debug A Find in Files_ Macro 1 13 3 Step 2 Editing a macro viewing records 1 Select Tools gt Macros to invoke the Macro dialog box 2 The HEW macro file Default in which a macro has been recorded is listed in Current macro file Select the macro Demo in Macro functions and click the Edit button 4 The editor window
389. nent supports the following structures in the view for C source files The basic structure of the information is shown below 181 2CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities fi C navigation category title ones a E Clase name Class member functions Private member variable ao Protected member oo m shame variable El Globals Global variables E amp heap_area and functions folder ar hrk E INT Yectors hai Ei E Navigation The C navigation view uses a number of icons to describe the type of function or variable the icon belongs too These are listed in the table below Public member function Protected member tunction Private member function a Public member wariable om Protected member variable Private member varable Double clicking on a navigation item by default jumps you to the associated navigation items declaration This default behavior can be modified by selecting Jump To Definition On Double Click from the pop up menu this option is unchecked by default When this option is checked double clicking a navigation item jumps you to the associated navigation items definition To jump to the definition Select either of the following ways e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu and check that Jump To Definition On Double Click is checked Double click a navigation item on the Navigation tab e Right click on navigation items on the
390. ng Function Edit Value Launches a dialog box to modify the selected variable s value Radix Hexadecimal 16 Display in hexadecimal Decimal 10 Display in decimal Octal T Display in octal Binary a Display in binary Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows a clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons b Editing a local item s value You may wish to change the value of a local variable e g for testing purposes or if the value is incorrect due to a bug in your program To change a watch item s value use the Edit Value function Editing a local item s value 1 Enter a value directly in the window In another way select the item to edit by clicking on it you will see a flashing cursor on the item Choose Edit Value from the pop up menu 2 The Edit Value dialog box opens Edit alue Ed Expression io m m m a5 Current Value H OOOOG d4 7SFFFFAC New Value aaa Ee 3 Enter the new value or expression in the New Value field and click OK 4 The Locals window is updated to show the new value c Modifying the radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the pop up menu 337 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 338 2CENESAS 18 Technical Support 18 Technical Support 18 1 Check for updates To check for HEW product updates or service packs 1 Selec
391. ng environment variables in Environment LOGNAME user TZ JST 9 e Specifying actions 1 Select the General tab Yersion Control Setup ki Ei Commands Projects General E secution Prompt before executing command M Run in DOS Window Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter User details User Hone Password Hone Configuration file Curent version control configuration file CAWorkS pace rsc_sample rec sample hwe Cancel Esport Import 2 Deselect the Prompt before executing command checkbox Leave it selected however if you wish to see the file name before executing commands 3 Select the Run in DOS Window checkbox This is because the RCS commands must be input via the MS DOS prompt 4 Deselect the Close DOS Window on exit checkbox This is because errors must be viewed in the MS DOS prompt e Setting up commands 1 Select the Commands tab 2 Click the Add button on User menu options 3 The Add Menu Option dialog box appears 4 Enter Initialize in Option and click the Add button 5 The Add Command dialog box appears 144 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Add Command Ei Command Version control executable CR CSAC ESE Browse Cancel Arguments f FILENAME Initial directory SFROJDIR P Browse Executable return code Return code of executable is not meaningful C
392. ng options Pop up Menu Options Run Test Case Edit Test Case Remove Test Case Create New Test Image File Compare Test Image File Edit Test Image File Save Test Image File Save Test Image File As Properties Function Executes the selected test case Modifies the selected test case Deletes the selected test case Creates a test image file for the selected test case Compares the test image file with data in the current system Modifies the test image file Saves the current setting in the HEW system into the test image file Saves the current setting in the HEW system as another test image file The Test properties dialog box is displayed It displays the test name test description test location and the last modified date 16 11 Configuring the Test tab of the Output window The Test tab of the output window displays the results and progress of the current test execution The test execution progress shows the current test being executed and the number of tests remaining If errors occur then these are displayed in this window Starting tests test suite lt Test Suite Name gt lt Compare Conditions gt lt Save Conditions gt continue on failure timeout 10 Running test lt Test Name gt X of Y Running batch file macro lt Macro Name gt X of Y Classification Item Run Tests dialog box Example Figure below Starting tests lt Test Suite Name gt TestSuite test suite lt Compare Action after test execution Com
393. ng syntax lt variable name gt lt value gt Any number of white space characters are allowed between the variable name and the sign and the value and the sign The value may be split over several lines using a character If the value contains V characters within the main text then these are taken literally Only V characters followed by a new line are considered to indicate a value wrapping over more than one line There follows some examples of valid variable declarations EXECUTABLE c dir prog exe OUTPUT c dir2 file1 out 375 2CENESAS 13 HMAKE User Guide INPUT c dir2 filel c DEPEND c dir2 file2 h c dir2 file3 h c dir2 file4 h In order to use a variable later in the hmake file write the variable name with added to the front and added to the back The variable name along with the characters will be substituted with the variables value For examples of this see later under description blocks Only alphanumeric characters and underscore characters are allowed in variable names It is possible to use a variable inside the declaration of a different variable but all variables must be declared before they are used 13 3 Description blocks Basic outline A description block specifies one or more targets zero or more dependants and a list of commands which should be executed if the newest dependent is newer than the newest target If none of the targets
394. ng the File gt Exit menu option pressing ALT F4 or by selecting the close option from the system menu which is opened by clicking the icon at the upper left corner of the HEW title bar 1 11 Component system overview The HEW allows the user to extend the HEW functionality by adding additional components to the system This is achieved by registering the component in the Tools Administration dialog box These components can add windows menus and toolbars to the HEW system Examples of the components are the debugger and builder components of HEW The debugger component adds all of the menus and toolbars associated with the debugger and the builder component does the same for the build functionality The components you have registered in the system will modify the look and feel of HEW In some cases you may not have some of the menus which you can see in this manual For instance if the builder component is not installed you will not have the toolchain menu option in the Build menu 1 12 Overview of Configurations and Sessions Standard toolbar Current Configuration Current Session Standard ah prall simsessionsH 4 7 igi simvebug sH i Sims essionSH 4 Debug EREA Release Configuration Session The drop down list box on the Standard toolbar shows the current configuration and session This example shows the configuration and session in which the Renesas SuperH Standard toolchain was selected at creation
395. ng the last test run A green icon to the left of the test name indicates the test was successful A red icon indicates the test failed Selecting a test in the top pane shows the test details in the pane below The bottom pane of the test browser lists all of the components that were checked A green icon to the left of the component name indicates the test was successful A red icon indicates the test failed If a test fails the details are shown in this window Double clicking on the component displays more information on why the test data comparison failed This can also be viewed by selecting the test and then clicking the details button on the toolbar The results of the tests can be exported to file The two options are Export and Export All Export only saves the results of the currently selected test Export All saves the results of all the tests executed The results can be saved as text or as a comma delimited file for importing into other tools for analysis You can also display Test Browser from the workspace window pop up menu 16 10 Configuring the Test tab of the Workspace window The Test tab of the workspace tab is located alongside the other tabs for Workspace Navigation and Templates This tab was created to allow fast access to the tests in your test suite When the test suite is opened the test suite is added to the Test tab of the workspace window and the tests in the test suite are added underneath them This is shown b
396. nly xxxxxx and full project generator that configures both the debugger and toolchain aspect of the HEW 12 2CENESAS 1 Overview 5 Click the OK button to create the new workspace and project This then launches the wizard you have selected to guide you through the creation process Note It is not possible to create a workspace if one already exists in the same directory 1 6 Opening a workspace To open a workspace 1 Select Browse to another project workspace option from the Welcome dialog box and click the OK button or select File gt Open Workspace The Open Workspace dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the workspace file HWS file that you want to open Click the Select button to open the workspace If the HEW is set up to display information when a workspace is opened the Workspace Properties dialog box will be displayed Otherwise the workspace will be opened Note that whether the Workspace Properties dialog box 1s shown depends on the setting of either the Show workspace information on workspace open check box in the Workspace Properties dialog box or the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace check box on the Workspace tab of the Options dialog box The Options dialog box can be invoked via the Setup gt Options menu option Click the OK button in the Workspace Properties dialog box to open the workspace Click the Cancel button to stop opening the workspace If Show workspace inf
397. ns that can be saved into test image files dependent on the debugging platform 228 l6 7 C mpanne atest image fessier aiin e E E EE R EE 234 e S400 01 217101228 oi EA T EEE EEE O TT 235 169 Usimpe the test DOWNI sasise E O E O E N 236 16 10 Configuring the Test tab of the Workspace window ccc0cceeeeseeessssssssssssssssessssaaaas 236 16 11 Configuring the Test tab of the Output window ccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 237 Usine the DeO G accenna E E E E S 239 174 Preparations TOP CeO UG CG cd caeresccccwaessacrnsnsinannesictonscedacwnad E E AEE ERENER EaR 239 WLL Compiling TOR OS Nb iini aena a e 239 17 1 2 Selecting a debugging platform s saivs ses dsdiessenecsiacensicscduncetoadsnsdavadevacsiadensiencduvadioudedsosascesees 239 171 3 Editing project COMM OUPANOM sesseur nand a a E aE 250 17 1 4 Configuring the debugging platform cc ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 250 17 1 5 Downloading modules ia acisciesssccesescnndenedanscsdecsnadesedasanslcvdevatassessacsuadsuatavexentiavidaxesevaesses 254 I0 Debugger sessions eee ee ee ee ee 265 172 Viewing a el 0 24 1 ee eee ee eee ee oe eee Ee eee 270 17 2 1 Opening the Editor Window c cccccccccccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 271 17 2 2 Opening the Disassembly window cccccccccccccccceeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 217 17 2 3 Looking at the current PC p
398. nsssssssnsnsnsssssnssssensess 26 Boos PS BG Te oE ores cece steer secede seeded essere ee 26 1 13 7 Step6 Creating a test image file sso cdacacsacsncessiccnaaaseseucorseadareesaasendesiaencansseGncerseadoaensaesereeean 28 1 13 8 Step 7 Modifying the program before the test n nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunneseserereeresrererereeeen 30 1 13 9 Step 8 Viewing the test result unmatched cece cccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 31 1 13 10 Step 9 Modifying the program back and executing the test again cccssssseeeees 3I 1 13 11 Step 10 Viewing the test result matched cc ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 2 MAUR AS UO E s ead teenentinancas sesqaseaessuceaiantes 33 2l Toe Dd PO Sea E E E A EA E EAA TEE OA ET AE 33 pie Configuring the Projects tab of the Workspace window cccccccccccceccccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 33 2 3 Po ola eee ee ee en Rete ee ee ee ee eee 36 2 51 Adding files to a ProjeCi ecese o n E E e 37 pA 2 Drag and drop of files and folders ccccceeesseessssessssessssssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssseeaaags 37 2 3 3 R moying files Troni a proje eici E dence ee 39 2 3 4 Excluding a project file from DUI ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeess 40 2 3 5 Including a project file in DUI cceeeeccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeess 40 i 2CENESAS Table Of Contents 2 4 _ USer folders in the Workspace
399. o the phase will be executed for that file 1 e input files have been modified since the output file or files were last produced If the files are up to date then the phase will not be executed Note If no output files are specified the phase will execute regardless Options Output Files Dependent Files Output files To add an output file 1 Click the Add button The Add Output File dialog box will be invoked 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click the OK button to add this output file to the list To modify an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The Modify Output File dialog box will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required 4 Click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list To remove an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button An output file s path can include placeholders 3 4 3 Dependent Files tab This tab is where you can specify the dependent files that are needed by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the dependent files are of a more recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e dependent files have been modified since the input files was last modified If not the phase will not be executed 72 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features Options Output Files D
400. o match 4 13 Setting the read only attribute for a file While using the HEW you can set a file to be read only When you attempt to save a read only file a confirmation dialog box appears asking if you wish to save the file as another name To set a file to be read only 1 Select one of the following operations e Right click on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window to open a pop up menu You can even select multiple files OR e Right click within the editor window to open a pop up menu 2 Selecting Properties opens the Properties dialog box Select the Read only checkbox If you have selected two or more files including both read only and writable files the checkbox is gray intermediate state By default this checkbox is not selected 4 The title bar of the editor window shows Read Only When a file is open within the editor window and if you switch on off the read only attribute of the file via the Windows Explorer it does not match the attribute shown on the title bar of the editor window because the title bar is not updated The attribute shown on the title bar is not updated until you start modifying the contents or re open the file 4 14 Preventing modification of files while debugging Use this option if you wish to prevent modification of files while debugging with HEW and a debugging platform connected This prevents modification of all files that are open in the HEW editor To prevent modifica
401. o the file group s name One or more file groups can be selected in this dialog box Step 3 The third step requests the fundamental information about the new build phase Enter the name of the phase into the Phase name field Enter the location of the program file into the Command field do not insert any command line options as these options are specified via the Options menu of the HEW menu bar Specify the default options for the phase 1 e what options you would like new files to take when added to the project into the Default Options field If you have a preferred directory in which you would like this program to run i e where you want the current working directory to be set to before the tool is executed then enter it into the Initial directory field New Build Phase Step 3 of 4 ki Ei Phase name M Phaze Command excluding parameters C Tools MyT ool exe p Browse Default options SFULLFILE Initial directory S CONFIGDIR Browse lt Back Next gt Cancel 64 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features Step 4 The fourth and final step allows you to specify any environment variables that the phase requires New Build Phase Step 4 of 4 EES w Does the command require any environment variables to be set IF so enter them into the list below Modit Renove T Read Output On Fly lt Back Finish Cancel To add a new environment variable
402. ocal 3 D3 Ox00003fd4 unsigned long F funed short OxD0000072 P param lt 2 OxO0003tta Ox00003fe4 short L local z DZ Ox00003fe0 unsigned long F funci short Ox0000003e P param 1 Ox00003tffa Ox00003ff0 short L local 1 D1 Ox00003tfec unsigned long F mairt Ox00000012 L start BD i0s UxUOUUSEta short The following items are displayed Kind Indicates the type of the symbol F Function P Function parameter L Local variable Name Indicates the symbol name Value Indicates the value address and type of the symbol Support for this function depends on the debugging platform Option Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Macro Recording Function Go to Source Go to the associated source line View Setting Specifying the Stack Trace window settings Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard 317 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 15 2 Viewing the source program Select a function and choose Go to Source from the pop up menu to display then the source program corresponding to the function which has been selected by opening the editor window 1s displayed 17 15 3 Specifying the view Choose View Setting from the pop up menu to open the Stack Trace Setting dialog box which allows the user to specify the Stack Trace window settings stack Trace Setting Nest level 1 64 fo
403. of data depends on the access size When the file save is complete a confirmation message box will be displayed 17 3 24 Loading a memory area from a file A file can be loaded to the debugging platform s memory Choose Load from the pop up menu of the memory window The Load Program dialog box is displayed Load Program Format Open File name Offset address Joooooaan ACCESS SIZE fi T Perform memory verify during download Cancel Hil Enter the file format in Format file name in File name offset address in Offset address and access size in Access size To verify memory check Perform memory verify during download 295 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 3 25 Splitting up the window display To vertically divide the Memory window display into two select Split from the pop up menu and move the split up bar To cancel the split up display select Split from the pop up menu again 17 3 26 Verifying a memory area A memory area in the address space can be verified using the memory verify function Choose the Debug gt Verify Memory option The Verify Memory dialog box is displayed Yernfy Memory Ei File name O Cancel PO Offset address rT AcCess SIZE al Enter the file format in Format file name in File name offset address in Offset address and access size in Access size The message File verified OK appears when verification is successful If the verification fai
404. of the application project This would then allow the library to be built first if it is out of date When a dependent project is built the HEW attempts to match the configuration in the dependent project with that of the current project This means that if the current configuration is Debug then the HEW will attempt to build the Debug configuration in the dependent project If this matched configuration does not exist then the HEW will use the configuration that was last used in the dependent project To make projects depend upon another 1 Select the Project gt Dependent Projects menu option The Dependent Projects dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the project to which you would like to add dependents When you do this the Dependent projects list will display all of the projects in the workspace excluding the selected project 3 The Dependent projects list has a checkbox for each project listed Set the associated checkboxes to make those projects depend upon the selected project 4 Click the OK button Dependent projects 59 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics 2 14 Removing a project from the workspace To remove a project from a workspace 1 Select the project that you wish to remove in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click on the selected project to invoke a pop up menu 3 Select the Remove Project menu option Note You cannot remove the Current project from the workspace 2 1
405. oject this file will be added to the group folder C source file 37 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics A file dropped onto a user folder is directly added to this folder Even if a file with the same name is already in the folder the new file can be added to the folder only when these two files have different paths If a file of an unrecognized file type is added to the project this file is directly added to the project To drag and drop folders Drag and drop of a folder from the Windows Explorer opens the Add Files From Folder dialog box which allows you to select the files in the folder that you wish to add to the project This dialog box shows the names of all files included in the folder that was dropped Filename and File Type show the full paths of files and file types respectively 38 CNHEW Workspaces DemoSHs DemoSHs Assembly source file Uncheck All CNHEW s Workspace DemoSHS DemoSHss Assembly source file CNHEW Workspace DemoSHs DemoSHs C source file CNHEW Workspaces DemoSHs DemoSHs4 C source file CNHEW Workspace DemoSHS DemoSHSs C source file CNHEW Workspace DemoSHs DemoSH sr C source file CNHEW Workspace DemoSHS DemoSH sss C source file CNHEW Workspace DemoSHs DemoSHs5 Library file CNHEW Workspace DemoSHs DemoSH3s Object tile Add Files From Folder EE Select the files to add Filename Cid File Type A CNHEW Workspace DemoSHS CemoSHSi Assembly source file Lancel CAHEW work spaceD
406. oject Name res sample e Directory C WorkSpace rcs sample 142 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 3 Create a folder for RCS C WorkSpace rcs_sample rcs_ sample RCS 2 Step 2 Selecting Custom Version Control System 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog box opens Select ersion Control System Ei Version control system FLustom WL a ee Cancel 2 Select Custom VCS Click the OK button 3 Step 3 Making settings for Version Control Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure to open the Version Control Setup dialog box e Setting environment variables 1 Select the Projects tab ersion Control Setup ki Ei Commands Projects General Show details for project rcs sample T Details Version control directory mappings Source Director Version Control Director Add Maditp Hemose K Environment LOGNAME user na path path CAACS TZ5 5T 9 jaleel Hemote OK Cancel Export Import 2 Click the Add button on Environment 3 The Environment dialog box appears 143 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Environment arnable Ei Variable OF Cancel Value 2path s C R C5 gt 4 Enter path in Variable and path C RCS in Value respectively 5 Click the OK button 6 Click the Add button Also enter the followi
407. ojects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click to invoke the pop up menu and then select the Properties option The Workspace Properties dialog box will be displayed Enter the description into the Information field 4 Select the Show workspace information on workspace open checkbox if you want a Workspace Properties dialog box to be launched on opening a workspace This checkbox has the same role as the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace checkbox on the Workspace tab of the Options dialog box 5 Click the OK button W Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace 6 8 4 Save workspace before executing any phases It is possible to force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving the current workspace before executing any build phases 1 e build build all or build file operations or version control commands To save the workspace before executing any phases 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Save workspace before executing any tools checkbox 4 Click the OK button W Save workspace before executing any tools 6 8 5 Prompt before saving a workspace If you are using the Save workspace before executing any phases function you may want the HEW to prompt you before saving the workspace For further information about saving a workspace before executing phases see section 6 8 4 Save workspa
408. omponent manually l 2 3 110 Click the Project gt Components menu item The component gallery dialog box 1s displayed Select the component you wish to load Click the Load button The components image should change to the loaded state If you wish to unload a component Select the component Click the Unload button The components image should change to the unloaded state Click OK to verify the changes 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration Component Gallery Project EJ Application Extensions IMRON component lan Custom memory view component L Pin view component Cancel Loaded component Unloaded component Intermediate state component sad Unload Note Each project in your workspace can have different components loaded and unloaded If you have multiple projects you can use the Multiple projects and All projects items to change a components load status over more than one project If you select a combination which means the component is loaded in one project and not anther then the intermediate state icon is displayed 5 9 Custom project types The Project gt Create Project Type menu item in HEW and allows you to create a template for your project This menu item takes the settings of the current project and then creates a project type for you The user can specify the name of the new type and the style of the Project Generation Wizard Once created these pro
409. on File directory Configuration directory Project directory Workspace directory Temp Directory Command directory Windows directory Windows system directory Workspace name Project name Configuration name Placeholder USERNAME PASSWORD VCDIR COMMENT FULLFILE FILENAME FILELEAF EXTENSION FILEDIR CONFIGDIR PROJDIR WORKSPDIR TEMPDIR EXEDIR WINDIR WINSYSDIR WORKSPNAME PROJECTNAME CONFIGNAME 8 4 Specifying comments Value And How It Is Determined Current user login General tab Current user password General tab Virtual version control mapping Projects tab Comment specified before command execution Full path and name of the file involved in the operation Filename including extension of the file involved in the operation Filename excluding extension of the file involved in the operation Extension of the file involved in the operation Directory of the file involved in the operation Current configuration directory Current project directory Current workspace directory Temporary directory Version control executable directory Directory where Windows is installed Directory where Windows system files exist Current workspace name Current project name Current configuration name If a version control command contains the placeholder COMMENT the HEW will request that you enter the comment when the command is executed via the Please En
410. on Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed Select the menu option to be modified from the User menu options list and then click the Modify button The Define Commands dialog box will be displayed Select the menu option to be modified from the Commands list and then click the Modify button The Modify Commands dialog box will be displayed For details see section 8 2 Defining Version Control commands Click the OK button to close the Modify Commands dialog box Click the OK button to close the Define Commands dialog box Click the OK button to close the Version Control Setup dialog box To remove a user defined version control menu option 1 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed Select the menu option to be removed from the User menu options list and click the Remove button Close the Version Control Setup dialog box by clicking the OK button 135 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System To change the ordering of user defined version control menu options l Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed Select the menu option to be moved and then click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary Close the Version Control Setup dialog box by clicking the OK button 8 2 Defining Version Control
411. on drop down list on the Standard toolbar 2 Adding a session You can now create a session with a target attached and setup ready for use This session can be given a name and the target chosen To create a new session with a target attached and setup li Choose the File gt New Session menu option The New Session dialog box is displayed Hew Session ki Session Hame pate ooo Create a new session oni 5H 1 Simulator Cancel Session generator to use Renesas SH Project Generator i Enter the name of a new session This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character Especially do not use a minus sign or a space Select the target you wish to use in the new session Choose the Session generator to use This should default to the correct selection However sometimes there may be multiple generators that support the same target Click the OK button This should launch the generation process the process depends on the session generator that was selected At this point an additional dialog box may be displayed for target setup options When finished a new session is added to the current project It should be available in the sessions drop down list box on the main toolbar You can create a new empty session in the project directory The session will use the session name as its new file name If the file name already exists then an error is displayed
412. on must be registered Select the HRF file for the old toolchain with the Register button by selecting Tools gt Administration Build can be executed on HEW2 x onwards by using the old toolchain However note that a workspace which has been opened in HEW2 x onwards cannot be opened in HEW 1 x In HEW2 x onwards a new project for the old version cannot be created When a project for the old version in HEW1 x is created use HEW1 x Select HEW Registration File File name sh_60a0 ht Files of type HEW Registration Files hrf Cancel ee 373 2CENESAS 12 To Build in Toolchain for HEW1 x 374 2CENESAS 13 HMAKE User Guide 13 HMAKE User Guide 13 1 Command line The following section describes the command line that should be used to execute the hmake program on a file using none or more of the available options Basic structure The command line must be of the following syntax hmake lt make file you wish to execute gt lt parameter list gt If a file is specified without an extension then mak will be appended to it The parameter list may include none or more of the parameters listed in the following section The parameters list may appear before the make file name if you wish Each parameter must be separated by at least one white space character Parameters are not case sensitive If no parameters are given and no file is given then help information will be displayed Exit codes
413. one None None None None None None None None None Note F3 TAB HOME END LEFT ARROW RIGHT ARROW F1 F2 F3 F5 F8 F10 F11 F12 DELETE ESC TAB HOME END UP ARROW DOWN ARROW BACKSPACE F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 DELETE INSERT ENTER TAB ESC HOME END PAGE UP PAGE DOWN UP ARROW DOWN ARROW LEFT ARROW RIGHT ARROW ALT Mouse select Search for the previous occurrence of the text chosen in the editor or open the Find dialog box Switch windows in the editor Select from the cursor to the beginning of the file Select from the cursor to the end of the file Select the previous word in the editor Select the next word in the editor Show context sensitive help Previous bookmark Search for the previous occurrence of the specified text Reset Go Displays the editor that generated the previous build error or warning Show context menu Same as right click pop up menu Step out Refresh all windows Editor cut operation alternative in the editor to CTRL X Hide output window Move the tab back in the editor Selects from the cursor to the beginning of the current line in the editor Selects from the cursor to the end of the current line in the editor Select the next line up Select the next line down Redo alternative in the editor to CTRL Y Context sensitive help Next bookmark Search for the next of the specified text Find
414. onfigure another tool for the Open File operation See section 2 5 1 Associating an application with a file group for more details If Windows default is selected then the Open File function in the Workspace window passes the Open File operation to the Windows operating system This then selects the default behavior for this file extension as defined in Windows Explorer 6 Click the OK button to add the extension to the File Extensions list 2 5 3 Creating a new file extension If your files use a different extension from those accepted by the HEW for a given phase e g your assembler source files are asm but the HEW only recognizes src then you need to create a new extension and add it to an existing file group This process is described below To create a new file extension in an existing file group 1 Select the Project gt File Extensions menu option The File Extensions dialog box will be displayed 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog box will be displayed Add File Extension File extension asm File group f Extension belongs to an existing group Assembly source file C Extension belongs to a new group peme ssaclated applicata pen Broun viti Editor dd aati Remove Cancel 3 Enter the extension that you want to define into the File extension field Use only alphanumeric and an underscore as characters of a file extension string T
415. ons of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Options Toolbar button Function Clear Window CA Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar 238 Customizes toolbar buttons 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 Using the Debugger This chapter describes the debugging operations and their related windows and dialog boxes See Chapter 1 Overview for the fundamental concepts of the High performance Embedded Workshop HEW For details on the functions available with the debugging platform in use refer to the user s manual or help of the emulator or simulator 17 1 Preparations for debugging This section describes the preparations for debugging your program You will learn how to select and configure a debugging platform with which to debug how to load the user program and what the debugger sessions are 17 1 1 Compiling for debug In order to be able to debug your program at C C source level your C C program must be compiled and linked with the Debug option enabled When this option is enabled the compiler puts all the information necessary for debugging your C C code into the absolute file or management information file which are usually called
416. ontents The contents currently displayed in the window can be printed in a text file Select Print from the pop up menu 17 6 6 Saving the currently displayed contents The contents currently displayed in the window can be saved in a text file Select Save to File from the pop up menu 17 6 7 Modifying I O register contents To edit the value in an I O register you can type hex values directly into the view To enter more complex expressions double click or press Enter on the register to open a dialog box to modify the register contents When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press Enter The dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 17 7 Looking at registers If you are debugging at assembly language level using the Disassembly view you will probably find it useful to see the contents of the CPU s general registers You can do this by using the Register window 305 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 7 1 Opening the Register window The Register window displays the register data and flag data You can change a register flag value from the window To open the Register window click the Registers toolbar button E or select the View gt CPU gt Registers menu option The Register window opens showing all of the CPU s general registers and values displayed in hexadecimal Window configuration Example of SH 4 debugger OOOO001L0 QOOOOQ00FO OO040001 e
417. open a pop up menu 2 Select Print 3 The standard print formatting and selection dialog box is displayed From here you can choose your printer and page setup options 199 2CENESAS 13 Map 200 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line 14 Using the Command Line The High performance Embedded Workshop HEW Command Line Interpreter allows the user to control the debugging platform by sending text based commands instead of the window menus and commands It is especially useful if a series of predefined commands need to be sent to the debugging platform by calling them from a batch file and optionally recording the output in a log file Note To specify a file in the command line use a placeholder excluding TCL If you wish to specify a directory not included in the placeholder specify an absolute path After specifying the absolute path this file will not be correctly found when it is in another host computer or environment where the path content is different In such cases specify the file again Example FILE LOAD ELF DWARF2 CONFIGDIR demo abs 14 1 Opening the Command Line window Choose View gt Command Line or click the Command Line toolbar button Em to open the Command Line window Window configuration Command Line no batch file no log file Tooker a KD alal e This window allows the user to control the debugging platform by sending text based commands e A series of predefined command lin
418. or Full access to every aspect of HEW The user can add and remove users from the projects and change access rights The administration user can change the workspace and project files and also the source files Full read write access The workspace and project files can be modified as can the source files But it is not possible to change user access rights from this access level 172 2CENESAS 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities Read write file access Only the source files can be modified All project settings can only be viewed not modified Read only All source files and project files can only be viewed as read only Nothing can be modified When any user opens a network enabled project they must type in their user name and password Until this is done no access can be granted Once entered the user is given one of the levels of access as seen above To add a new user to the system l eS Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box is displayed Select the Network tab Click the Access rights button The User access rights dialog is displayed Click the Add button The Add new user dialog box is displayed This allows you as the administration user to add a new log in name and password Normally the password should be set to some default text or left blank Then click OK Once OK 1s clicked the user is
419. ormation on workspace open The HEW keeps track of the last four workspaces that you have opened and adds them to the File menu under the Recent Workspaces submenu This gives you a shortcut to opening workspaces which you have used recently To open a recently used workspace Select Open a recent project workspace in the Welcome dialog box select the name of the workspace from the drop down list and then click the OK button Another way is to select File gt Recent Workspaces and then from this submenu select the name of the workspace Note The HEW only permits one workspace to be open at a time Consequently if you attempt to open a second workspace the first will be closed before the new one is opened 1 7 Using old workspaces The HEW can open any workspace that was created on a previous version of the HEW This should be automatically upgraded when the workspace is opened A back up version of the initial workspace or project file must be saved in the current directory of the file that has been upgraded 1 8 Saving a workspace To save a HEW workspace select the File gt Save Workspace menu option 13 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 9 Closing a workspace To close a HEW workspace select the File gt Close Workspace menu option If there are any outstanding changes to the workspace or any of its projects you will be requested whether or not you wish to save them 1 10 Exiting the HEW The HEW can be exited by selecti
420. orrespondence between an error message and its syntax is as shown below Error Message Example Output Syntax Example Description C HEW Workspace SH SH resetprg c FULLFILE Placeholder of the file name with its full path 70 LINE Placeholder of the line number enclosed with parentheses C2225 Wild card for and error message number E E E indicating an error Wot Undeclared name a Wild card for error message There are some restrictions on these regular expressions For example it is not possible to define two unclear strings next to each other such as FILEDIR or FULLFILENAME e When Error is selected as the syntax type Double clicking on an output message line in the Build tab of the output window shows the file name with its full path and line number The source code of this line is shown in the editor The Build tab of the output window also shows an error icon e When Warning is selected as the syntax type Double clicking on an output message line in the Build tab of the output window shows the file name with its full path and line number The source code of this line is shown in the editor The Build tab of the output window also shows a warning icon A e When Other is selected as the syntax type The Build tab of the output window shows an information icon 6D The total number of errors and warnings will also be displayed in the Build tab of the output window at th
421. osition cccccccccccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 283 17 24 HMigblightine the line at CP Castes sicecatececiedadesecaetepecenstanencdedieceaeesce ade 283 o Operan MenO oea ee ne eee EN TE E 284 17 3 1 Opening the Memory Window cccccccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 284 17 3 2 Modifyme memory C NtENtS sorso E ENEA NEA 286 P7550 Selecine a memory NOS cisne ieie enne a ene EE E EE Edi 287 17 3 4 Filling an area of memory with constant data cccccccceccssesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 287 17 3 5 Copying an area of Memory ccccccccccccccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 288 17 3 6 Comparing the memory contents soooseeeenennneeneenneseseeeerereerrerrrreerrrerrrrrrrrerrerrrerreeeeee 289 173 7 Testing an area OF MIC MOLY savvessarassseicscesdeiadexsecavecesareaseetoclaseestteadartendeesaesialeniand 289 17 3 8 Saving memory contents in a text file oo cc cccccccccceceeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 290 173 9 Finding A VANS ii Memory ss cc aersasdacansasseaamsasacenccncwesd a EE a E Eade 290 17 3 10 Changing the display AGGICSS escrisirsneirorossissisoniiroci cerren a i a a 291 17 3 11 Changing the scroll arca sersirierceneinneea rin eE E ENEAS KANNTEN 291 17 312 Starting address to value of the reQister ce cccccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 292 17 3 13 Tracking the stack pointer POSItiON
422. ound Color of the Background Color ofthe Tab s tobe Type of Output Color Tab Default Color Tab Default Applied to be Applied Text SYSTEM SYSTEM All tabs All Build Error Text Black White Build Error Build Warning Text Black White Build Warning Information Text Black White Build Information 4 Change the selection in the Foreground and Background lists of the Color tab Click the OK button 2 8 7 Controlling the content of the Build tab of the Output window It is often useful to display extra information such as the command line options that are being applied to a file during a build The HEW allows you to specify whether or not you want such options displayed in the Build tab of the output window during a Build Build All or Build File operation via the Options dialog box To view or hide extra information during a build 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Build tab 3 Set the three check boxes in the Show group as follows e Command line controls whether the command line is shown as each tool is executed e Environment controls whether the environment is shown as each tool is executed e Initial directory controls whether the current directory 1s shown as each tool is executed Fio M Command line M hitial directory W Environment Mark out of date files 2 8 8 Displaying out of date files in the Workspace window Files updated later than the file generated by
423. oup and click the Modify button underneath the tree Modify Category dialog box will then be displayed Enter the name of the group into the Category Title field To remove a keyword group from the tree select the keyword group and click the Remove button underneath the tree 94 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor Add Category Z Category Title To create new keywords 1 Select the Setup gt Format Views menu option The Format Views dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the desired keyword group to be modified and click the Keywords tab Color Font Keywords Comments break case catch p continue Litwa 3 Click the Add button to add a keyword Then the Add Keyword dialog box will be launched Specify a keyword in the Keyword field and click the OK button to close the dialog box To remove a keyword from the Keywords list select the keyword and click the Remove button Kepword 4 Click the OK button Note On the Keyword field of the Add Keyword dialog box specify a keyword which consists of only alphanumeric an underscore and the character 4 10 3 Enabling disabling syntax coloring To enable disable syntax coloring 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Set the Enable syntax coloring checkbox as necessary and then click the OK button M Enable syntax coloring 95 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 1
424. ownload ownga associated klemo fill with menu Hers Reset CPU 207 2CENESAS 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility Items that also have an associated toolbar have their icons displayed alongside the menu items The standard buttons on the Macros toolbar are shown below Play Macro Pause Macro Record wero Stop Macro f C u o e The Record Macro button starts the macro recording process After this button is clicked debugging and HEW management operations are recorded This operation is the same as the Record macro menu on the Tools menu e The Play Macro button starts a macro function playback If more than one macro is defined the select macro function dialog is displayed to ask you to select specific macro for playback e The Pause Macro button is only enabled when recording or playing back a macro function This pauses the current operation so that you can return to it later e The Stop Macro button is only enabled when recording or playing back a macro function This halts the current macro operation that is being carried out In the same way you can associate macros with a menu you can associate them with a toolbar When you associate the macro you can decide to use a user defined toolbar icon or the default HEW macro function icon Once added the associated macros appear to the right of the standard macro buttons Clicking these buttons then automatically launches the associated macro function Play Macra Pause
425. pare system against comparing results Conditions gt drop down list box saved test image file lt Save Conditions gt Refresh test image file I Default results refreshing results Automatically save test saving results not saving results lt Error Condition gt Stop at first failure W stop on failure E Default continue on failure lt Time out gt Test timeout Optional Default 10 timeout 10 Running test lt Test Name gt Test_01 Test_02 XofY 1 of 2 X is the current test 2 of 2 number and Y is the total number of tests Running batch lt Macro Name gt Macro_01 file macro Macro 02 XofY 1 of 2 X is the current test 2 of 2 number and Y is the total number of tests 16 Using the Test Support Facility F 4 Ol Of al at 2 21 Es id Starting tests test suite TestSuite Running test Test Ul 1 af 2 Running batch file macro Macro Ul 1 Batch file macro finished successfully Running batch file macro Macro Ue 2 Batch file macro finished successfully Running test Test Ue 42 af 2 Running batch file macro Macro Ul 1 Batch file macro finished successfully Running batch file macro Macro Ue 2 Batch file macro finished successfully All tests completed comparing Find in Files Version Control Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functi
426. part to be displayed among the entire image View Mode Specifies the entire part to be displayed in the image Full Size Displays the entire image Part Size Displays part of the image Start Position Specifies the start position of data to be displayed Top Displays data from the upper left Bottom Displays data from the lower left Position Specifies the start position of the image where part of the image is to be displayed Valid when Part Size is selected X Position Specifies the X axis of the start location When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger in decimal Y Position Specifies the Y axis of the start location When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Width Height Specifies the height and width of the image to be displayed partly Size Width Pixel Displays the width of display When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Height Pixel Displays the height of display When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal After the settings have been made in the Image Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Image window Even after the Image window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the pop up menu Displays the memory contents as an image e Double clicking within the window displ
427. pears Enter Initialize in Option and click the Add button The Add Command dialog box appears Enter C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe in Version control executable Enter init in Arguments Enter C src sampleCVS in Initial directory Add Command ki Command Version control executable Cows 11 1 F4cvs eke Browse Cancel Arguments e cc mLLLC Cm Initial directory C Asre sampleCvs gt Browse Executable return code Betum code of executable is not meaningful C Command has failed if the return code is Not Equal To J F Click the OK button 149 sQENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 10 Click the OK button in the Add Menu Option dialog box Also set up the following six commands in the same way Command Register Check out Status Diff Commit Log Option Name Version control executable Argument Initial directory Version control executable Argument Initial directory Version control executable Argument Initial directory Version control executable Argument Initial directory Version control executable Argument Initial directory Version control executable Argument Initial directory Characters to be Input C evs 1 11 17 cvs exe import m New Source sampleCVS Renesas rel 20060228 C src sampleCVS C evs 1 11 17 cvs exe checkout sampleCVS C sre C evs 1 11 17 cvs exe status FILENAME C src sampleCVS C evs 1 11
428. pendencies Initially the dependencies for all files are contained within the Dependencies folder although this can be modified by configuring the projects tab 53 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics at Workspace Sa Demo oum a ga Assembly source file ee E lowlyLare C source file X dbect c s E Demo c s E intprg c E lowste c s E resetpra c m E sbrk c ee A vectthl c Sa Dependencies B lowerc h m E sbrk h a stackect h oo vect h File dependencies in a project are automatically updated at the following operation timings Operation Timing Specific Operation Open workspace Select option in the Welcome dialog box Select File gt New Workspace Select File gt Open Workspace Add a project to workspace Select Project gt Insert Project Set the current project Select Project gt Set Current Project Add files to a project Select File gt Add Files Save files Select File gt Save Build Select Build gt Build Automatic dependency scanning Deselect Disable automatic dependency scanning To prevent automatic scanning of file dependencies in a project 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Build tab 3 Select the Disable automatic dependency scanning checkbox This checkbox is not selected by default 4 Click OK Note Selecting this option clears all file dependencies in a project To manually update file dep
429. played by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Options Toolbar button Function Clear Window CA Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Press the SHIFT ESC key and the Output window closes The color of text or background and font shown in the Output window can be customized in the same manner as in other windows You can also customize the Build tab of the Output window so that the texts in the lines of error messages will be highlighted in a color different from that of the texts in other lines 10 2CENESAS 1 Overview To customize the current colors 1 Select Setup gt Format Views to open the Format Views dialog box 2 Select the Output item from the tree in the left hand section of the dialog box and expand it 3 Select the category for which you wish to change the color from the table below Category Foreground Color of the Background Color ofthe Tab s tobe Type of Output Color Tab Default Color Tab Default Applied to be Applied Text SYSTEM SYSTEM All tabs All Build Error Text Black White Build Error Build Warning Text Black White Build Warning Information Text Black White Build Information 4 Change the selection in the Foreground and Background lists of the Color tab Click the OK button 1 2 7 Sta
430. point by double click e The Source field includes codes highlighting the syntax 272 2CENESAS Option 17 Using the Debugger Right clicking within the Source field opens a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Build File lt File Name gt Open lt File Name gt Cut Copy Paste Add File To Project Go to definition of lt Navigation Item Name gt List Members Find Replace Goto Line Match Braces Bookmarks Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks Templates Define Templates Insert Template Toggle Breakpoint Enable Disable Breakpoint Define Column Format Columns Column name Turn Header On Off Instant Watch Go To Cursor Set PC Here Display PC View Disassembly Properties Macro Recording Function Builds the selected files Opens a file shown in the editor window Removes highlighted text and places it on the Windows clipboard Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Adds file to a project Shows the positions where navigation items of defines C functions or C classes are defined While the smart editor function is enabled selecting this option displays an alphabetical list of C defines C functions or C classes as a pop up window Double clicking on an item copies th
431. pop up menu will not refresh the window Checking Auto Refresh gt Stop in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops Checking Auto Refresh gt Real time in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be real time updated 17 5 3 Updating the window contents Selecting Refresh Now from the pop up menu immediately updates the window contents 17 5 4 Zoom in display Selecting Zoom In from the pop up menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis enlarged 17 5 5 Zoom out display Selecting Zoom Out from the pop up menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis reduced 17 5 6 Resetting the zoom display Selecting Reset Zoom from the pop up menu displays the waveforms in its original size 17 5 7 Setting the zoom magnification In the Zoom Magnification submenu of the pop up menu the zoom magnification can be selected from 2 4 or 8 17 5 8 Setting the horizontal scale In the Scale submenu of the pop up menu the size of the X axis can be selected from 128 256 or 512 pixels 17 5 9 Non display of cursor Selecting Clear Cursor from the pop up menu hides the cursor display 302 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 5 10 Displaying the sampling information When anywhere within the graph is clicked a cursor green vertical line appears The cursor can be moved by pressing the left or right arrow key Right click in the window to displ
432. ppend 4 Inthe Recording Settings dialog box specify how to record the history Select a sheet that you wish to record the history in Recording Sheet Only one sheet can be used for recording at one time 6 Enter the file name in File name To insert a placeholder in File name click the Placeholder button and select Placeholder from the pop up menu To browse a file click the Browse button 7 To append data to the specified file select the Append checkbox 8 Clicking the OK button starts recording except in the following cases The sheet selected in Recording Sheet does not contain watched items to which automatic update has been applied The Append checkbox is selected but the watched items recorded in the file selected in File name and those to be recorded contained in the sheet selected in Recording Sheet do not match or the radixes are different 335 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Once recording is started the values of variables are recorded into the file when Values are automatically updated in realtime during execution Values are updated with the stop of execution Values are changed Display is refreshed by an operation in the window To stop recording the history of automatically updated values 1 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu 2 Select Record Update Value and then Stop Recording from submenus Recording is automatically stopped when A program is downloaded or unload
433. pplication or select any previously defined application from the drop down list Click the Add button to define a new application The Add Application dialog box will be displayed 4dd Application Name Cancel Command texcluding parameters ee a Parameters Po hitial directory Po pf Bras 43 CENESAS 2 Build Basics Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the full path to the tool in the Command field do not include any parameters Enter the parameters that are required to open a file into the Parameters field Be sure to use the FULLFILE placeholder to specify the location of the file see Reference 5 Placeholders for more information on placeholders Enter the initial directory in which you would like the application to run into the Initial directory field Click the OK button to finish creating the application Click the Modify button to modify an application The Modify Application dialog box will be displayed This dialog is the same as the Add Application dialog box described above except that the Name field is read only Modify the settings as desired and then click the OK button 5 Click the OK button to set the application for the selected file group 2 5 2 Creating a new file extension and file group If you want to manage files that are not by default recognized by the HEW e g documents then you need to create a new extension and a new file group To create a n
434. put from a build or build all operation is redirected to the Build tab of the Output window Both the Build and the Build All operations will terminate if any project files produce errors 2 8 3 Building multiple projects The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to build multiple projects and configurations at once To build multiple projects l 2 48 Select the Build gt Build Multiple menu option The Build Multiple dialog box is displayed The Build Multiple dialog box gives you the choice of which projects and configurations to build Select the check boxes next to the projects and configurations that you want to build For example in figure below if you wanted to build the entire hewtest2 project you would check the hewtest2 Debug and the hewtest2 Release selections and leave all other check boxes unchecked Build Multiple jhewtest Release Jhewtest Debue Jhewtest Release jhewtest2 Debug Clean hewtest3 Release hewtests Debue Cancel hewtest4 Debug _Jhewtest4 Release p When you are happy with your chosen selection click the Build button and the HEW will build the selected projects and configurations If you want to build all of the projects click the Build All button This will automatically select all projects and configurations and build them all 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics 5 If you also wish to delete intermediate and output
435. r 5 6 Click the Enable synchronized debugging check box to switch this facility on Click OK to verify the changes Seesions Synchronized Debug J Enable synchronized debugging Sessions E demol E e demol SH 4 Simulator 0O DefaultSession El Igy de moz DefaultSession a oimoessionaH 4 SH 4 Simulator Un synchronize session To use internal HEW synchronization l on Note Follow the options as specified in to setup internal HEW synchronization Click on the session combo box located on the standard toolbar Select the Sync session This option is only available when synchronized debugging has been added to the system Once selected the HEW debugger enables the Synchronized debugging facilities This means the addition of another toolbar this is named Sync session The enable disable toolbar button on the Synch session toolbar allows you to temporarily switch off the synchronization without losing your settings for this feature When enabled changing the session in the Sync session combo box changes the session you are currently viewing In the normal HEW debugging state this would mean the session is closed In Synch session you can have multiple sessions open and the currently selected one on this toolbar is the session you are viewing This system allows you to debug multiple targets or CPU cores simultaneously Changing the session changes the views you can see on the screen and the data
436. r right clicking the column header displays a pop up menu A tick mark right next to an entry indicates that this column is displayed Clicking an entry will switch showing hiding the column Clicking the column header sorts the listed items When the window is first opened the items are sorted by the value of Start Address The Overlay column shows the name of the primary section Window options e Map information and section settings of the linkage editor left pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Section Edit Mode Add Section Group Add Section Add Overlay Group 1 Edit Selected Item Toolbar button oP B Ta g La Function Enter the edit mode Add the section group Add the section Add the overlay group Edits the selected item 2CENESAS 189 13 Map Cut Copy Paste Delete Move up Move Down Change Primary Section Memory Map Setting 2 Memory Resource Auto Allocate 2 Print Toolbar display Cuts the section information Copies the section information Pastes the section information Deletes the section information Moves up the section information Moves down the section information Changes primary section Sets a memo
437. r TOD a gecteaen steeds aceretsstten cso aA EE sess aes see 93 el E 122 le 9 6 2 6 ce ee oer ee eee nner eT ae nee eee ee tenet rere ae ee eee 93 4 10 1 Changing text colors cccccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeess 94 4 10 2 Creating new keywords acts tec ndcdedencnccttenedacedanswatiatas ndecedataneddbenadaceiansncdtdas sdcdedahexcadoennecdedeess 94 4 10 3 Enabling disabling syntax coloring ccc cccceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeseseseeeess 95 AL Er 18 0 S eee ee ee re ee Ree eee ee eee ee ree ree 96 AILL De TAMIA Th 6 MN FAC cts ce terecseenntec ee totesesak EE E E TOA ANN Ri 96 AMM Delne At AS eei E TE EEE EA NEE ETE EE A T 98 A 11 3 Inserting a template 2 0 ccccccccccccecee cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeess 98 EN TER CS mate CA esna E ies nhc Se anced asses aisle 98 4 13 Setting the read only attribute for a file cece cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 99 4 14 Preventing modification of files while debUggING cc ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 415 Managing the editor CO IMIS ic sciessiswenamacaaaivosumeisvanmesaasagatasteasesaee soe 100 4 16 Showing hiding the column header cccccccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 100 4 17 Opening afle within the editor wsicscscsvatonidscasscsnsvatwewemasreieddnnes Kou aeons aues 101 dls Tooli W ise e EE E
438. ration by selecting it from the Current Configuration drop down list on the Standard toolbar 2 2 Adding a new build configuration To add a new build configuration 1 Select the Build gt Build Configurations menu option The Build Configurations dialog box will be displayed 2 Click the Add button The Add Configuration dialog box will be invoked Enter the new build configuration name into the Configuration name field As you enter the new build configuration name the directory underneath changes to reflect the configuration directory that will be used Select one of the existing build configurations on which you want to base the new build configuration from the Based on configuration drop down list Click the OK buttons on both dialogs to complete the creation of the new build configuration Configuration name Based on configuration Debug 2 7 3 Removing a build configuration To remove a build configuration 1 Select the Build gt Build Configurations menu option The Build Configurations dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the build configuration to remove and click the Remove button 3 Click the OK button to close the Build Configurations dialog box 2 8 Building a project 2 8 1 Building individual files The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build project files individually To build an individual file 1 Select the file to build from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Se
439. rder Select Refresh Order in the pop up menu on the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 11 Inserting a project into the workspace When a workspace is created it contains only one project but after it is created you can insert new or existing projects into the workspace 57 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics To insert a new project into the workspace 1 Select the Project gt Insert Project menu option The Insert Project dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the New project radio button Click the OK button The Insert New Project dialog box will be invoked 4 Enter the name of the new workspace into the Project Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character Especially do not use a minus sign or a space As you enter the project name the HEW will add a sub directory for you automatically This can be deleted if desired 5 Use the Browse button to graphically select the directory in which you would like to create the project Alternatively you can type the directory into the Directory field manually 6 The project type list displays all of the available project types e g Application Library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list 7 Click the OK button to create the project and insert it into the workspace To insert an existing project into a workspace f Existing project Browge 1 Select the Project g
440. re The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed Select the Projects tab 2 Select the mapping to be removed from the Version Control Directory Mappings list and then click the Remove button 8 7 Specifying file locations example Consider the scenario shown in the figure below It shows three directories which are mapped from a shared version control drive X to a local drive where the development is being done C LOCAL Ci ma A Cwvork application project Wiel app project ma e cowwrorklapplicationterc SOW CE ap SSP ma gt coworkishared Woe applehared Now let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file In order to get all of the files in a project we need to use the following command 139 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System GET VCDIR FILENAME When the HEW executes the command for a given project file it will replace VCDIR for the equivalent version control directory in the file mapping For example suppose FILE1 C is located at c work application project1 FILE1 C If the GET command is applied to FILE1 C then 1 x vc sw app project1 is substituted for VCDIR as this is the version control directory mapping for c work application project1 2 FILE1 C is substituted for FILENAME Project File ci work applicationsproje
441. reate a subdirectory called make within the current workspace directory and then generate the makefile into it The executable HMAKE EXE located in the HEW installation directory is provided for you to execute the makefiles generated by HMake selected in Makefile format If you wish to modify makefiles see Reference 13 HMAKE User Guide Note If the name of the HEW installation directory includes a space the GNU Make command may not work correctly when GNU Make is selected as the makefile format with the makefile generating function To execute a makefile HMake 1 Open a DOS Command Prompt window and move to the make directory where the makefile was generated 2 Execute HMAKE Its command line is HMAKE EXE lt makefile gt Note The degree of portability of a generated makefile is entirely dependent upon how portable the project itself is For example any compiler options that include full paths to an output directory or include file directory will mean that when given to another user with a different installation the build will probably fail In general use placeholders wherever possible using a full specific path should be avoided when possible 3 9 Using a makefile inside the HEW system The HEW also allows you to configure the internal build to use a particular make tool hmake nmake or gmake as well as the internal HEW system Only the makefiles created in workspaces are executable The build proc
442. reated next Cancel 11 Click the OK button in the Create SourceSafe Project dialog box 12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 for each of the projects in the current workspace The structure image of projects and sub projects in the Visual SourceSafe database HEW workspace and projects and the workspace directory in the hard disk is shown below Projects and sub projects in HEV workspace and Workspace directory in the Visual SourceSafe projects the hard disk database Visual SourceSafe working folder Workspace Named Eimmame Workspace Name Workspace Name eg Project_Name H Project_Name 5 Project_Name The High performance Embedded Workshop has now created the necessary projects within Visual SourceSafe and set up the version control toolbar and menu for immediate access 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands The following eight commands are available via the version control toolbar or menu Get VCS status Viewing the status of files in Visual SourceSafe Undo Check Out Show History Undoing a check out operation in Visual SourceSafe Tools gt Version Control menu Version Control Toolbar Function Add to VCS ice Adding files to Visual SourceSafe Remove from VCS ce Removing files from Visual SourceSafe Get from VCS a Getting read only copy of files from Visual SourceSafe Check out from VCS a Checking out writable copy of files from Visual SourceSafe Check in to VCS a Checking in writable copy of files into Visual SourceSafe Viewing
443. reation of the project configuration SimDebug SH 4 is created Selecting SH 4 Simulator in Targets as the debugging platform connected with the HEW New Project 7 9 Setting the Target System for Debugging ki x rod a SH 4 vath BSC Simulator _ SH 4 vith BSC Simulaton Lilthe endian OSH 45H7750A Simulator CISH 4 SH7750R Simulstor Litle erdan m Taget ype SH 4 T cece ff New gt e Cancel 15 CENESAS 1 Overview Configuration names can be changed when creating a project Directories corresponding to each of the configurations are created under the project directory These directories have the names of the configurations NOTE The project directory having the project name is created under the workspace directory used for creation of a new workspace Workspace window Hard disk Bey Workspace Marne E Workspace Name Project_Name a z Ol Projects How to set up build options To set up build options kept with a configuration select the configuration from the drop down list box in the dialog box for set up build option opened from the Build menu Options such as the compiler assembler and optimizing linkage editor can be set up The figure below shows the dialog box used for setup of build options for the Renesas SuperH Standard toolchain Build options dialog box Selecting a configuration and setting up options such as the compiler
444. rectory in Initial directory Change the directory in the same way as using the change directory command and execute macro files in the initial directory To create a new blank macro file 1 Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed 2 Click the New button 3 Enter the new macro file name 4 Click OK The new file name is added to the Current macro file drop down list To import an existing macro file 1 Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Import button 3 Browse to the existing macro file 4 Click Select The new file name is added to the Current macro file drop down list 5 When you select the macro file name in the list the available macros are displayed It is possible to manually edit any of the macro files The files are text based HEW command batch files To edit an existing macro file 1 Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed 2 Select the macro file the function exists in 3 Select the macro in the function list you wish to edit 4 Click the Edit button 5 The Macros dialog box is dismissed and the file is opened in the editor You can also drag and drop a macro file into the HEW window to open this file in the same way as opening an ordinary text file To remove the currently selected macro from the existing macro file 1 Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is
445. rectory in which to begin the search For tools fc HEW Browse M Include subfolders Located tools which can be uninstalled Component Version Search status Idle 3 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the search field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Check the Include subfolders checkbox if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 5 Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 6 The results of the search are shown in the Located tools which can be uninstalled list Select a component and click the Uninstall button to uninstall that component 7 Click the Close button to exit the dialog box A component may only be uninstalled 1f it is not currently registered with the HEW If you attempt to uninstall a tool that is registered you will be asked to uninstall the tool first High performance Embedded Workshop POCRCRURMOACRC CROC AC CAC AOMOMOMCC ACCC COON Toolchant A MS curently registered you may not uninstall a tool that is registered with HEW Please use the administration dialog to unregister the Tool You must then return to the Tools Administration dialog box accessed by selecting the Tools gt Administration menu option unregister the tool and then invoke the Tool Uninstaller ag
446. require many single steps to execute In this case it would be useful to be able to run to a particular point You can do this by using the Go To Cursor feature How to use the Go To Cursor feature 1 Make sure that an editor or disassembly view is open showing the address at which you wish to stop 2 Position the cursor on the line containing the address at which you wish to stop Choose the Go To Cursor option from the pop up menu The debugging platform will run your code from the current PC value until it reaches the address indicated by the cursor s position Notes e If your program never executes the code at this address the program will not stop If this happens you can stop code execution by pressing ESC choosing the Debug gt Halt Program menu option or clicking the Halt toolbar button D e The Go To Cursor feature requires a temporary breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work and the menu option will be disabled 17 12 4 Running from a specified address The Run Program dialog box allows the user to run the program from any address Choose Debug gt Run to open the Run Program dialog box Run Program F Frogram counter O Go E Go Jaooo0000 al Temporary PC breakpoints Reset go Cancel 312 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger The following execution conditions can be specified in this dialog box Program counter Instruction address to start
447. res random data to the Watch window 1 watch add command 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 2 Refer to the help files for the emulator or the simulator When a macro includes operations such as running a program the Debug tab of the Output window shows information including the cause of a stop This may cause difference in comparison of test results To clear the contents of the tabs in the Output window the HEW command line command clear output window is available It is possible to add the line at the next line of Macro Demo Start to clear the information in the Debug tab of the Output window clear output window debug Modify the description as required and click the Save File button on the Editor toolbar Close the HEW macro file Default hdc 25 sQENESAS 1 Overview 1 13 4 1 13 5 Step 3 Playing a macro Click the Play Macro button on the Macros toolbar The Select Macro Function dialog box opens Selecting the macro Demo starts playing the recorded commands The mouse pointer is modified to include the play icon te b When the playback of a macro is completed the mouse cursor returns to be an arrow Step 4 Creating a test suite Select Test gt Create New Test Suite to invoke the Create New Test Suite dialog box Create Hew Test Suite kl E3 Test suite name fT est Sute_Demo Cancel Directory for test suite E SHEW Workspace D enoSH4 Browse
448. rising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products 7 With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications Renesas products are not designed manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic healthcare combustion control aerospace and aeronautics nuclear power or undersea communication transmission If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above 8 Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below 1 artificial life support devices or systems 2 surgical implantations 3 healthcare intervention e g excision administration of medication etc 4 any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp its affiliated companies and their officers directors and e
449. ro file a dialog is displayed that asks you to choose which macro you wish to execute When playing the mouse cursor is modified to include the play icon te b 4 Click OK and the macro is executed When the macro is being executed the pause and stop D buttons DI and menus are enabled It is also easy to run a macro from the macro toolbar menu or via a keyboard shortcut if you have set up macro function assignments in the Macro dialog box For information on this area read the Assigning a macro information Another method is to launch the macro function via the Macro dialog box To play a macro from the macro dialog box 1 Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed 2 Select the macro file which contains the function you want to play 3 Select the macro function in the function list that you want to play 4 Click the Play button 5 The Macro dialog box is dismissed and the macro function executed 15 7 Editing a macro The Macros are stored in the Macros folder in the HEW root folder These files are just text based TCL files that can also be manually edited in the HEW editor window Any changes made will automatically be picked up by the HEW next time the macro is executed It is also possible to edit macros in the following way To edit a macro 1 Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed 2 Select the macro file which contains the function you want
450. rol system are JHARK and 214436 respectively COMMENT is specified in a command line to the version control executable c project is mapped to x vc project on the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box which is invoked via Tools gt Version Control gt Configure e an error of compiler or assembler occurred at line 12 Note Not all of the placeholders are relevant in every field For example the LINE placeholder has no meaning when specifying a dependent file s location USERNAME PASSWORD VCDIR and COMMENT placeholders are acceptable only in version control If you enter a placeholder into an edit field where it is not acceptable you will be informed 359 2CENESAS 5 Placeholders 5 4 Placeholder tips Placeholders are there to allow you to create flexible paths to the various files used by the system e If there is a placeholder pop up menu Wa next to an edit field into which you are about to enter a path or file you should consider how you can use a placeholder to make that path or file definition flexible e If you use several configurations then the CONFIGDIR placeholder is very useful to ensure that files can be written to and from the current configuration s directory e Wherever possible use a placeholder They can always be removed or added later so don t be afraid to experiment 360 2CENESAS 6 I O File Format 6 I O File Format HEW formats the
451. rom the register pop up menu The Save As dialog box shown below will be displayed Specify the file name 17 7 10 Using register contents It can be useful to be able to use the value contained in a CPU register when you are entering a value elsewhere in the HEW for example when displaying a specified address in the Disassembly or Memory views You can do this by specifying the register name prefixed by the when the SH H8 or R8C E7 E8 family is in use or when the M32C M32R M16C or R8C excluding E7 E8 family is in use character e g PC or PC Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 7 11 Customizing the color of the changed values The text color and font of the register or flag values shown in the Register window can be customized in the Format Views dialog box in the same manner as the color and font in other windows Now it is also possible to customize the color of the changed register or flag values in the Format Views dialog box The default foreground and background colors of the changed values are red and white respectively The color of the background will be the same as in cases where the text category is selected To customize the color of the changed values 1 Select the Setup gt Format Views menu option The Format Views dialog box will be invoked Select the Register item from the tree in the left hand section of the dialog box and expand it Select the
452. rsions of this data e The performance of HEW does suffer when using the network facilities If working in a small team it might be more suitable to use the single user mode and version control Procedures necessary before invoking the HEW on a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 See the following section 10 1 Sharing projects by network facilities in a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 To setup a project file on the server machine 1 Create a project file for the network 169 2CENESAS 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities 2 As the directory of the New Project Workspace dialog specify a network path that can be recognized by both the server machine and the client machine Example WorkGroup Severl ShareDirectory Sharing workspaces The directory specified by the above procedure step 2 must be shared The HEW s network facilities share the source object and other files in the server machine These files exist only in the server machine From the client machine the files are accessed via the network To open a workspace from the client machine To open a workspace on the network from the client machine search the network path and select the workspace in the Open Workspace dialog 10 1 Sharing projects by network facilities in a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 Windows XP Service Pack 2 provides enhanced security measures In a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 you cannot share projects by network facilities
453. ry map Automatically allocation the memory resource Prints section setting tree view Shows or hides the toolbar a B Se a 4 P e Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons 1 This pane cannot be used when the linkage editor does not support overlay 2 Support for this function depends on the selected debugging platform In HEW V 4 03 SuperH RISC engine and H8SX H8S and H8 family simulator debuggers support this function e Section settings after a build right pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Toolbar button Function Shows the unallocated area Pop up menu options Show Unallocated Area Show No Size Section Shows the no size section View source Views the source code for the address in the selected line Print Prints section list view a sal a 13 1 2 Entering exiting the edit mode To edit the section information shown in the left pane the HEW must enter the edit mode By default the edit mode is not selected To enter the edit mode 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Section Edit Mode This allows the HEW to enter the edit mode 3 There is a tick mark on Section Edit Mode 190 2CENESAS 13 Map While the HEW is in the edit mode
454. s assembler 7 Disassembly find in range The disassembly find in range can be used to find a certain text string in the disassembly view between two addresses Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode and select Find in Range The Find in Range dialog box is displayed Find in Range Ei Ei in I Start Address Bl Cancel End Address al Enter your search string the start and end address that should be searched Click OK The view then selects the first instance of that string in the range Note Subsequent find operations will find strings only in the paged disassembly area not the complete range 8 Saving disassembly text The contents of the disassembly view can be saved by using the Save Disassembly Text menu from the Disassembly field in disassembly mode pop up menu When Save Disassembly Text is selected the Save Disassembly Text dialog box is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to save Save Disassembly Text Ei Ed Start Address oooo2000 a End Address Jooo020714 Cancel Filename Browse 2 6 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Both a start and end address should be supplied You also need to specify the full filename to save the information to If needed you can browse to the file to use Click OK 9 Printing the disassembly view The disassembly view can be printed by using the File gt Print menu or the Print toolbar button w
455. s dialog box will be invoked 2 Select the Editor tab 3 The Enable Smart edit should be checked 4 Click OK M Enable smart editor With this option switched on if you are working on C or C file the smart edit capability should be enabled Note When the navigation category C Defines C Functions or C Classes is unchecked in the Navigation tab of the workspace window the HEW s smart editor function is disabled During normal usage the following editor operations will make the smart edit facilities visible e Ifyou are using an object and are trying to access the members using the or gt If you do this a pop up window will be displayed which may help you select the correct member more efficiently than typing Whilst typing the pop up window will keep track of the keys you have pressed to help your selection If you press return then the currently selected member will be added This pop up window is also used when using the method and it is displayed in figure below Pressing CTRL SPACE displays the pop up window This pop up window disappears when a member is added class Sample p sam Posam new sample p sam 3 fc amp joample 6 chanee sa m_nButton aay m_nDialog qy m_nF ile agm nline amp jmnPace Sm nsheet E Pe PPE ee e Ifyou are trying to use C or C functions then the pop up window in Figure below is displayed when the first open bracket is entered This pop up window allo
456. s displayed Select Categories Please select the categories to scan for iw Defines ML Functions C Classes Cancel 3 Un check any categories you are not interested in seeing definitions for 4 Click OK To update the navigation view 1 If you right click anywhere inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Select Refresh 180 CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities Note e The navigation items are displayed gradually as the files are scanned This means it may take some time if there are many files to fully complete the Navigation view update e Files are re scanned when they are saved This means that navigation information will not be available for new classes and functions until the file or files are saved e Group By File and Group By Access cannot both be on at the same time Switching one on will switch the other one off 12 1 C function and define navigation component These components simply add the function and define definitions to the navigation view 21 C define navigation category title H detine C function navigation category title ANSI C function To jump to a definition Select either of the following ways e Double click a function or a define definition on the Navigation tab e Right click on a function or a define definition on the Navigation tab Select Go to Definition from the pop up menu 12 2 C navigation component The C navigation compo
457. s displayed as a list in Step 9 File Name File name To change a file name after selecting the file name by clicking on it enter the new file name Extension File extension Description Description of the file Clicking the Finish button in Step 9 displays the Summary dialog box 248 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Summary Ed Project Summary PROJECT GENERATOR PROJECT MAME Tutorial PROJECT DIRECTOR CHEWS Tutorial Tutorial CPU SERIES SH 4 CPU TYPE SH 750 TOOLCHAIN NAME Renesas SuperH RISC engine St TOOLCHAIN VERSION 9 0 2 0 GENERATION FILES CAHE Tutorial Tutoraldbect c Setting of B A Section LNHE W s Tutorial Tutoraltypedetine h Aliases of Integer Type CHE W S Tutorial T utorialysbrk c Program of brk CAHEW Tutorial T utoraliodetine h Definition of 10 Register CAHE Tutorial T utoralintprg sre Interrupt Program W Generate Readme tst as a summary file in the project directory Cancel Click OF to generate the project or Cancel to abort 10 The project generator displays information on the project to be generated in the Summary dialog box After confirming the display contents click the OK button Clicking Cancel returns to the New Project wizard dialog box Checking Generate Readme txt as a summary file in the project directory will save the project information displayed in the Summary dialog box as a text fi
458. s it to the current macro file Clicking cancel dismisses the dialog box and loses the macro recording Another method is to launch the recording process via the Macro dialog box To record a macro from the macro dialog box 1 Select the Tools gt Macros menu option The Macro dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Record button The Macro dialog box is dismissed and the recording operation begins 210 2CENESAS 15 Using the Macro Recording Support Facility 15 5 Functions that can be recorded into macro files HEW is not capable of recording all operations in the HEW system into macro files as scripts For the operations that can be recorded Record Macro in the menu list shows a macro record icon This indicates that the operation can be recorded into a HEW macro file e Recordable functions common to all HEW products e Recordable functions dependent on the debugging platform 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all HEW products Macros of recordable HEW functions common to all HEW products included in tool packages are recorded into macro files as scripts when the operations listed below are performed e Handling menus shortcut keys and toolbar buttons If you handle a menu shortcut key or toolbar button of those listed below while recording a macro the command in HEW command line commands recorded into macros will be recorded into a macro file Menu File Edit View Project Build 2 Debug
459. s necessary 4 Select the number of minutes you wish the auto backup facility to be launched 5 Click the OK button J Save Auto Recovery info every fio minutes Restoring your files If you open your workspace and the following dialog is displayed it means that the last time the workspace was used problems were encountered 123 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment HEW vor ks Dace Auto Recover a HEW failed to shutdown correctly the last time you used this workspace Would you like to recover the following files rather than Use the sawed versions demo hws chew demo de mo hwp chew de modemo V defaultsession hsf c hew demo demo H simsessionsh 3 chew demo demo To recover the files check the checkbox alongside the filenames you wish to recover and click OK Clicking Cancel will discard the auto recovery files and load from the original files 6 8 8 Change the default directory for new workspaces When a new workspace is created the High performance Embedded Workshop invokes the New Project Workspace dialog box One of the fields on this dialog is the directory in which the new workspace will be created By default this is the root directory However it is also possible to set this default directory to another location e g C Workspaces To change the default directory for new workspaces l 2 2 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed Sele
460. s products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics C D me lt Q 5 Cc Q High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 03 User s Manual Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System Renesas Electronics Rev 1 00 2007 04 WWW Frenesas com Notes regarding these materials 1 This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document 2 Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document including but not limited to product data diagrams charts programs algorithms and application circuit examples 3 You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass
461. s set to the HEW application directory however if you are working in a network environment this directory may be set to another location It is possible to change the tool directory location and this causes a re scan of the tools that are registered in HEW To change the tools directory location 1 Select the Tools gt Administration menu option 2 Click the Modify button which is next to the Current HEW Tools Database Location field 3 Browse to the root directory of the new tool location and click the OK button 104 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 4 This will switch the directory and change the tool location to the new directory It will be necessary to scan for any new tools that may be in this location This can be achieved by using the Search Disk or Register Tool functionality 5 3 Registering a component The HEW will automatically attempt to register any new components installed since the last time it was invoked However in some circumstances you may need to register components yourself In some cases it is useful to search a drive for HEW compatible components This is especially useful if the HEW installation was deleted or corrupted as it can recreate your tool information instantly To search for components and register them l Click the Search Disk button on the Tools Administration dialog box The Search Disk for Components dialog box will be displayed Enter the directory in which you would like to searc
462. sample c v lt rcs sample c enter description terminated with single or end of file NOTE This is NOT the log message gt gt initial revision 1 1 done C RCS gt 6 Enter exit and press Enter This closes the MS DOS command prompt window 7 A HEW confirmation dialog box appears Click Yes The keyword now includes the file name revision number date and user name Tip If you do not wish to see the result of command execution in the MS DOS command prompt window select the Close DOS Window on exit checkbox in the General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box 5 Step 5 Using the Version Control facility Compare To compare with the checked in file modify the file rcs _sample c and save it 2 Select the file rcs _sample c in the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Tools gt Version Control gt Diff The MS DOS command prompt window appears and shows the result of comparison 4 Enter exit and press the Enter key This closes the MS DOS command prompt window RCS file res_sample c v Working file rcs_sample c head 1 1 branch locks strict user 1 1 access list symbolic names keyword substitution kv total revisions 1 selected revisions 1 description revision 1 1 locked by user date 2006 03 14 07 22 42 author user state Exp Initial revision 6 Step 6 Using the Version Control facility Check out Use the check out command to undo the changes made in the fi
463. sdcevecccccamsapdatanavscncumansecewnsgsacenseedensdadnewwadrasewnadancunseeinceaaeeee A 188 13 1 1 Opening the Map Section Information WIndOW cccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 188 13 1 2 Entering exiting the edit mode ccccccccccssssssssesseseseseseeseeseeseseeseseseeseeeseseeeeeseeeeeeeees 190 T3139 Addin BSCCH OM OTOP rosies ni E EEE E E E EEE 191 A Adding asection esccain a 192 13 1 5 Adding an overlay CLOUD sesccnreirenios i e ANEA tees 192 TSG Editing a selected Hemi re cara casssicavenscanpnccucnewwatnascinacsanduntesaaupaacuanaenadnanennnntantantaneatmacneenen 193 t17 Schin THE prinary Section seesi ne E E EEE ET 193 V Table Of Contents 13 1 8 Setting a memory map one cece ccccee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEE EH 194 13 1 9 Automatically allocating the memory resource cececccccecccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 13 1 10 Printing out the section settings tree cccccseeesssessessssessesseseeeessseseeesssstssssessseeaas 194 13 1 11 Viewing Unallocated areas cccccsesesssssssssssssssssssssessssessceesasaaaaaeaaasssasaaaaagagaaas 195 13 1 12 WIG Wilke SECHONS OF SIZE srein inep Ee Ee ei eni 195 13 1 13 Viewing the source code for the address ccccceeseseseseeessssesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseseaas 195 13 1 14 Printing out the section list ccccccesssesssssssssssessssssssssssessssssssssssssssssess
464. se a column has or what the information it is displaying is if you place the mouse pointer over the column a tool tip pop up window is displayed showing its identity The editor window can be customized via the Format Views dialog box which can be invoked via the Setup gt Format Views menu option This dialog box allows you to configure fonts colors tabs and so on for the editor window It also allows the user to change the look of other views which have been installed by HEW If you would prefer to use your favorite editor rather than the HEW internal editor then specify your alternative in the Options dialog box which can be invoked via the Setup gt Options menu option For further details on how to use the editor see Chapter 4 Using the Editor Allows you to set software breakpoints only when the debugging platform is connected to the session 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 2 6 Output window The Output window by default has six tabs Build Debug Find in Files Macro Test and Version Control tab on display lo ot al at 2 8t G H Build Finished 0 Errors U Warnings 4 F mG Build Find in Files version Control Build tab The Build tab shows the output from any build process e g compiler assembler and so on If an error is encountered in a source file an icon and the error message will be displayed in the Build tab along with the source file name and line number If you click on a toolbar button or pop
465. se from the Input file group for multi shot phases only drop down list Select the Don t check for input file s existence before executing checkbox if you don t want the HEW to abort the execution of the phase if any of the input files do not exist Select the Read output on the fly checkbox if you want to display build output as it happens rather than showing the output at the end of each phase execution Select the Environment tab to edit the environment settings for the phase Environment Environment settings ENKETA PATH C 4T ools SHOwALL F ALSE Use the Add Modify and Remove buttons to add modify and remove environment variables respectively 67 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features 9 Select the Output Syntax tab and define the error warning and information for the custom phase Output Syintas Line formats Add Eror FULLFILEWS LINE ME Waring FULLFILE LINE N E Moditp When the lines showing error messages in the Build tab of the output window match the setting of Output Syntax you can find icons on the left to the error messages and view the source codes in the editor If the Renesas SH C C compiler is used for example the following error message may be output to the Build tab of the output window C HEW Workspace SH SH resetprg c 70 C2225 E Undeclared name a To define this error type the following syntax FULLFILE LINE E The c
466. setting in the Download modules list and click the Modify button OR Right click on the download module or within the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Properties from the pop up menu Download Module dialog box will be displayed Change the setting and click the OK button To remove download modules l 2A Open the Debug Settings dialog box Select a module which you wish to remove in the Download modules list and click the Remove button 255 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger To remove selected download modules using the Projects tab of the Workspace window 1 Select the download modules that you want to remove in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Multiple download modules can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key 2 Select one of the following operations e Select Remove from the pop up menu opened by right clicking OR e Press Delete key 3 A confirmation dialog box opens for you to select whether or not to remove the selected download modules from the project To delete the selected download modules select Yes Otherwise select No or Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open this dialog box again select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box Select the Remove download module s from project checkbox on the Confirmation tab By default this checkbox is select
467. setting breakpoints as multiple functions can be selected This dialog box has three areas Select Function Name Displays the same name functions or member functions and their detailed information Name Displays the names of the functions Address Displays the addresses of the functions Set Function Name Displays the function to be set and their detailed information Name Displays the names of the functions Address Displays the addresses of the functions Counter Displays the number of the functions having the same name All Function Displays the number of same name functions or member functions Select Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Select Function Name list box Set Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box a Selecting a function Click the function you wish to select in the Select Function Name list box and click the gt button You will see the selected function in the Set Function Name list box To select all functions in the Select Function Name list box click the gt gt button b Deselecting a function Click the function you wish to deselect from the Set Function Name list box and click the lt button To deselect all functions click the lt button The deselected function s will be moved from the Set Function Name list box back to the Select Function Name list box c Setting a function Click the OK button to set the functions displayed in
468. setup to your requirements You will be presented with a set up dialog specific to the debugging platform that you chose in the Debug Settings dialog For a detailed description of the features available in your debugging platform please refer to the separate Debugging Platform User Manual 2 Memory mapping For the debugger to correctly represent your user system the memory map must be set up It needs to know which areas in the device s address space are RAM ROM on chip registers or areas where there is NO Memory When you select the device type and mode in the project generator the HEW will automatically set up the map for that device and the mode in which the processor is operating For example in a device with internal ROM and RAM the areas where these are located in the device s memory map will be set by default If you are using a device that does not have internal memory or a device with external memory instead of or in addition to the internal memory then you must tell the debugging platform that you have memory there Tip If you are trying to debug code with an emulator and need some memory available that does not exist either on chip or externally in your hardware then you can map some emulation memory from the emulator to the address space for your application to use The details will be specific to the debugging platform that you chose in the new project Additional information about the memory mapping can
469. sh to control and click the Remove button Click OK button Select the Project gt Add Files menu to open the Add files to project sampleCVS dialog box Select the file you wish to control and click the Add button 2 Step 2 Selecting Custom Version Control System l Zi 3 4 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select Select ersion Control System ki Version control system C uztom WCS Cancel The Select Version Control System dialog box opens Select Custom VCS Click the OK button 3 Step 3 Making settings for Version Control Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure to open the Version Control Setup dialog box e Setting environment variables 2 3 4 148 Select the Projects tab Click the Add button on Environment The Environment dialog box appears Enter CVSROOT in Variable and C cvs 1 11 17 DATABASE in Value respectively 2CENESAS Ji 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Yersion Control Setup Ei Ei Commands Projects General Show details for project sarmiplely S Details Version control directory mappings Source Director Version Control Director Add Madity Hemose H Environment jaleen Hemave Cancel Export Import Click the OK button e Setting up commands aoe eee ae 9 Select the Commands tab Click the Add button on User menu options The Add Menu Option dialog box ap
470. sh to use for tests so that the environment for the tests will always be the same 1 Select File gt Save Workspace 2 Select File gt Save Session You can always use the same environment to start a test by loading the HEW environment setting that has been saved e Preparing a test script to be used in the example of test procedures In this example use the macro recording support facility to record the following combination of operations as HEW command line commands into a macro This macro should be used as a test script at execution of a test Classification Operation Recordable HEW Command Line Commands Preparation before the Reload the session refresh_session command running the program See Step 1 2 Initialize values Initialize register values 1 register set command 2 Prepare a program See Step 1 3 Build the program for demonstration 1 build command See Step 1 4 Download the program Download the program for demonstration file load command See Step 1 5 Add variables run the Use the memory fill function to set the memory memory_fill command program and check the value of array a to 0 result See Step 1 6 Reset the CPU reset command See Step 1 7 Run the program until a selected line withina go _ till command main function is reached See Step 1 9 Add the array which stores random data to the watch add command Watch window 1 See Step 1 10
471. shows the HEW macro file Default hdc in which a macro has been recorded 24 2CENESAS 1 Overview we C SHE WH acro4 D efault hde O Ga Sa 1 a Macro Demo Start 3 refresh session 4 Clear output window debug 5 register set RO Ox0 6 register set Rl Oxv T register set Re OKU g register set K3 Oxo g register set R4 0x 10 register set KS Oxo 11 register set R Oxo le register set RY Oxo l3 register set KS Oxo 14 register set RY Oxo 1s register set R1O Oxo 16 register set Rll x Ll register set Elz x 15 register set R13 OXU 19 register set Rl4 Oxo aU build all wait al file load Elf Dwarte 4 CONFIGDIF s PROJECTHAME aes memory ill OxVOOUO000 OxVOO000eY OxOOOO long nover 2a reset a qo till go Uxz0E4 2a atch add Watchl a 6 ao Macro Demo End Within a HEW macro file the HEW command line commands of the operations listed below are included between the lines showing information to identify macros Operation Recordable HEW Command Line Commands Reload the session refresh session command Initialize register values 1 register set command 2 Build the program for demonstration 1 build command Download the program for demonstration file load command Use the memory fill function to set the memory value of array a to 0 memory_ fill command Reset the CPU reset command Run the program until a selected line within a main function is reached go_till command Add the array which sto
472. sing the Editor 4 7 3 Auto indentation When you press Enter the editor the insertion cursor will move to the next line down at the first column i e against the left hand side of the window Auto Indentation is a feature which when RETURN is pressed places the insertion cursor on the next line as before but under the first non whitespace character of the previous line This enables you to type neat C C or assembler code faster as you don t have to type leading spaces or tabs yourself The figure below illustrates two examples The first shows the effect of pressing Enter when the Auto Indentation feature is disabled the insertion cursor returns to the left hand side of the window on the next line When the int z 20 line is typed it 1s not aligned with the previous two lines The second example shows the effect of pressing Enter when Auto Indentation is enabled the insertion cursor drops underneath the i of the int word on the previous line Now when the int z 20 line 1s typed it is automatically aligned 1 e automatically indented Fold myFunctionl void Fold myFunction void 1 a Hae 20 int Z int int i Auto Indentation Disabled tt Auto Indentation Enabled To enable disable Auto Indentation 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Set the Enable auto indentation checkbox By default t
473. splay the result in all currently supported radices Character Constants Characters enclosed in single quote marks may be use as character constants For example A etc These character constants are converted to ASCII code and used as 1 byte immediate values Character String Literals Character strings enclosed in double quote marks may be use as character string literals Examples are abc etc 102 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 5 Tools Administration You can control the components that are used by the High performance Embedded Workshop via the Tools Administration dialog box which is invoked by selecting the Tools gt Administration menu option The Tools Administration dialog box is only accessible when no workspace is open Tools Administration Registered components Ok Version zI g Toolchains see x HS H8 300 Standard Toolchain 6 0 3 0 Cancel 9 0 1 0 Register System Tools Utility Phases Unregister BS Debugger Components ioe A Binary File Object Reader 1 4 0 0 Properties ElfO wart Object reader 2 06 00 4 Generic Cache View EC 1 03 00 Erpat Genenc Code_HCoverage View ECs 1 03 00 Generic Coverage View ECs z2 02 00 search disk 4 Generic Data HCoverage View ECH 1 03 00 i Generic EEPROM View EC 1 03 00 Jol ir ameta Se ie ae aa 30704 ba 4 Uninstaller T Show all components Current HE tools database location CH Ew Modify t ANELAR
474. ss to value of the register Followed Stack Pointer Keep tracking of the stack pointer position Set Start Up Symbol Ea Changing the program display position Immediately after downloading Refresh Update of the window contents Lock Refresh Disabling update of the window contents Data Length Ibyte I Display in 1 byte units 2bytes i Display in 2 bytes units Abytes TTT Display in 4 bytes units Sbytes nunn Display in 8 bytes units 285 17 Using the Debugger Radix Hex 16 Display in hexadecimal Dec 10 Display in decimal Signed Dec 10 Display in signed decimal Oct 5 Display in octal Bin 3 Display in binary Code ASCII dbe Displaying memory as ASCII characters default SJIS JIS UNICODE EUC Not supported Float Displaying memory as single precision floating point Double a Displaying memory as double precision floating point 16bit Fixed 16 Displaying memory as 16 bit fixed 32bit Fixed 32 Displaying memory as 32 bit fixed 24bit Accum Displaying memory as 24 bit accumulate 40bit Accum Displaying memory as 40 bit accumulate Layout Label a Switch display or non display of Label area Register E Switch display or non display of Register area Code Switch display or non display of Code area Column Changing the number of digits displayed Coverage Enable Switching display or non display of measurement result Save Saving memory contents in a file Load
475. ssible to drag and drop files from Windows Explorer onto the Projects tab of the workspace window For details see section 2 3 2 Drag and drop of files and folders Note If you add a file that has an unrecognized file type to the project then the file will be added to the project but certain functions will be disabled for this file When you double click on a file with an unrecognized file type in the Workspace window the open operation is passed to the Windows Operating system instead of opening the file in the editor The default Open operation is then carried out as if the file was double clicked in Windows Explorer To view the currently defined extensions use the File Extensions dialog box See section 2 5 File extensions and file groups for further information 2 3 2 Drag and drop of files and folders It is possible to drag and drop files or folders from Windows Explorer onto the Projects tab of the workspace window These files or folders can only be dropped onto a project in the active project or a user folder in the active project Note however that you cannot drag and drop files or folders onto multiple folders When you drag and drop files The behavior depends on the destination e A file dropped onto the active project is added into the group folder of the file type If a suitable group folder does not exist the HEW creates it For example if you drop the file test c onto the active pr
476. sssssesesseaaaas 195 D2 oh USA 20101 6 eee eee E N EEE nen ONO er E 195 13 2 1 Opening the Map Symbol Information Window cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 196 13 2 2 Printing out the Map iSt gee ccas aves ccasessvcestanawecansih eiee E EE EEE EAER ei 197 1323 Fadnis symboli essien ae oe oe as 197 13 2 4 Filtering the symbol information ccc cccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 198 13 2 5 Viewing the source code for the address nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnsrsseseeereseeerrerrerereeeen 199 13 2 6 Printing out the symbol information cccccccccccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 199 PA Usine the Command Oin serssisgnrcir rnd E E E ad 201 14 1 Opening the Command Line WindoW ccccccceeessesesesseeeseseeeeeeseeseeeseeseeseeeseeeeeeesseeaaas 201 14 2 Spe ifying a command ileer EnEn E ANN NENEA ean eee 202 TAD PXOCUUMG acommand TNC sseecrrcoriis isore isi uns kare n a A E EE A 203 14 4 Stopping command CXeCutiONn cece cceeeeeeseesesesseeesseeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeees 203 EAD Specifyimg AO OTA Cisse acisresssiceasuseadeancaasaosssaesdoswecdsqoanacdsd eae gaisgossdaasdesseceesnacsatereeGodeesee 203 14 6 Starting OF stopping logging spsiscsncsvssssvnecschanavedeaveadesadwnsdeeenanndeadepoarsaeaseadesedonsdssdatesteeeseseasertet 203 14 7 Entering a full path to the file 0 0 0 cc ceccssssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
477. stes the WORKSPDIR placeholder Pastes the WORKSPNAME placeholder Pastes the HEWDIR placeholder Project directory Project name Workspace directory Workspace name HEW Installation directory Select All Selects i e highlights the entire contents of the active window Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Removes the selected text block and copy them onto the Windows clipboard Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Copy Cut Paste Clear Window Clears the contents of the window Undo Undoes the last operation Once an opening bracket or is input and the nesting follows this button is visible This button selection is impossible Shows or hides the toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Toolbar display Te Wa fe e ay I Customize toolbar 14 2 Specifying a command file It is useful to use a command file when a series of predefined command lines need to be executed Create a command file by a text editor and write necessary command lines The default extension of a command file is hdc Choose Set Batch File from the pop up menu to open the Set Batch File dialog box in which the name of a command file hdc can be specified Clicking the OK button displays the specified command file name as the window title Clicking the Cancel button closes the
478. t Help gt Technical Support gt Check Website For Updates 2 Your default web browser is invoked and defaults to the HEW download page for your region 3 Browse this area for HEW updates to fix bugs or add new features 18 2 Creating a bug report Occasionally you may experience some unforeseen problems with the HEW application If a problem does occur that results in an application crash the HEW bug tracking program will be invoked automatically This allows you to compile a bug report and this can then be sent to your technical support contact in a variety of ways It is also possible to invoke this tracker program manually This is described below To create and send a HEW bug report 1 Select Help gt Technical Support gt Create Bug Report menu option 2 Detailed information is generated from your HEW system This may take some time The Submit a Bug Report dialog box is then displayed 3 Write the description of your problem in the Please type a description of the problem you wish to report edit box This item must be completed 4 Type your name in the Name edit box Type your company URL or purpose of the product being developed in the Company website Y our application edit box This item must be completed 6 Type your country or region in the Country Region edit box This item must be completed 7 Once you are happy with your report choose the method of sending the report in the How would you like to submit t
479. t HEW workspace This allows your test suite to work with multiple workspaces and projects to test different situations in one test suite The open workspace and change project commands all work with the test suite feature so allow you to control which workspace is currently in use 219 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility To create a test suite 1 Select the Test gt Create New Test Suite menu option The Create New Test Suite dialog box is displayed Create New Test Suite kl Test suite name Cancel Directory for test suite E HEW Workspace Demos 4 Browse 2 Enter the test suite name 3 Initially the workspace directory is shown in Directory for test suite This can be modified as required 4 Clicking OK 5 The test suite is then created This then enables a number of other items on the Test menu Once the test suite is created the Test tab of the workspace window has the test suite added to it This tab allows quick navigation around your test suite and fast access to the tests A file is located in the destination location with the filename HTS HEW test suite 16 2 Opening and closing test suites Once a test suite 1s created it is saved to a file with the extension HTS HEW test suite To open this file again after you have created it previously you can use the following operation To open a test suite 1 Select the Test gt Open Test Suite menu option The Open Test Sui
480. t Insert Project menu option The Insert Project dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Existing project radio button 3 Enter the full path of the project database file HWP file into the edit field or click the Browse button to search for it graphically 4 Click the OK button to insert the existing project into the workspace 2 12 Setting the current project A project can be in three states the Current project a Loaded project or an Unloaded project Since a workspace can contain many projects only one of them can be the Current project at any time This project is the one that build actions and debug operations can be performed on e g clicking the Build toolbar button will build the Current project To set a project as the current project Select one of the following operations e Select the project that you want to make active from the Project gt Set Current Project sub menu OR e Select the project from the Projects tab of the workspace window Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Set as Current Project option If the project is Loaded it is possible to open the project s directory and view the files It is also possible to change the builder or debugger options for the project A Loaded project can also have tool executions performed on it from the Tools menu 58 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics To unload a project from the workspace 1 Select the Loaded project from the Projects tab of t
481. t log 14 6 Starting or stopping logging Choose Logging from the pop up menu to toggle logging to file on and off When logging is active the button becomes effective Note that the contents of the log file cannot be viewed until logging is completed or temporarily disabled by clearing the check box Re enabling logging will append to the log file 14 7 Entering a full path to the file It is recommended that the full path to a file is specified as a file name in the Command Line window because the current directory can be moved However care must be taken to enter the correct full path 203 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line to a file when it is entered from the keyboard To save this trouble a full path can be easily specified by browsing through files Choose Browse from the pop up menu to open the Browse dialog box Select a file and click Open to paste the full path to the selected file to the cursor location This option can only be used when the cursor is located on the last line 14 8 Pasting a placeholder Select a placeholder from the Placeholder submenu in the pop up menu to paste the selected placeholder to the cursor location This function is only available when the cursor is located on the last line Placeholder sub menu Placeholder Configuration directory CONFIGDIR Configuration name CONFIGNAME Project directory PROJDIR Project name PROJECTNAME Workspace directory WORKSPDIR Workspace name W
482. t network HEW service This is defined using machine name If the workspace cannot be found using the machine name then the dialog below appears Simply type or browse the location of the machine and click OK If you want to be the server machine then leave the radio button on its default selection use local machine er Location Cancel Computer name Brome If you have previously been the server of a workspace then the following message will be displayed when you attempt connection to another machine Clicking OK then connects your machine to the new location High Performance Embedded Workshop A Workspace is registered to be shared on computer PADOSSZ you aie registered bo run server locally do pou wanit to change pour server registrator pan Paed Note If the network is running multiple HEW workspaces with the network facilities to share projects enabled then a user can only access one of them at one time The only instance when this is not the case is if the same machine is serving all of the network workspaces 174 sQENESAS 11 Comparing Files 11 Comparing Files The High performance Embedded Workshop HEW has an integrated difference view You can perform a difference comparison with two files on your local drive or a local file and a file in the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe system 11 1 Opening the Difference window To perform a difference comparison with two files on your local drive l
483. t on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users To check in edits made to files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the files that you would like to check back into Visual SourceSafe in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select one of the following operations i e Click the Check in to VCS toolbar button 1 OR e Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check in to VCS menu option OR e Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Check in to VCS 161 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe Check in to WES Iw Workspace Name hiws EH E yi a Froject_Mame hwp EH EW Wh Froject_Name c EAH E typedef ineh GAHE Wldbsct c KH oil s ae ee Cancel Comment 3 The Check in to VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to check back into Visual SourceSafe and click the OK button 4 When the operation is finished the file has a red mark next to its name This means you as the current user of HEW has checked it out 5 The red mark next to the file name is removed which indicates that the file has been checked into Visual SourceSafe If you select the Keep checked out checkbox in the Check in to VCS dialog box before you check the files
484. target and accesses with download To change the target the following operations is necessary 1 Select the project that needs to be changed in the tree on the left of the dialog It defaults to the current project 2 Select the session which is to be modified in the drop list above the tree Change the target using the target drop list control This removes any target specific setup options that have been previously been set 4 Setting the Options of Debug Settings The HEW debugger is tightly integrated with the TCL command line facilities This means that it is possible to write batch files for the HEW debugger which can be executed automatically at certain times The Command batch file load timing list displays the order in which the files will be executed It is possible to Add Modify Remove Up and Down the files in this list To configure the automatic command line batch file execution 1 Select the Debug gt Debug Settings menu item The Debug Settings dialog box will be invoked 2 Select the Options tab 3 Select the Command batch file load timing This can be the following values at target connection before downloading the modules after downloading the modules and after reset 252 2CENESAS 4 17 Using the Debugger Command batch file load timing la target connection Pree eee eee A target connection Betore download of a aaa Add After download of modules After reset Modity
485. te Makefile Generates a makefile Operations with some menu items can be recorded as HEW command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu item indicates that this function can be recorded into a HEW macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all HEW products 2 This menu is not displayed while a debug only project Debugger only xxxxxx created by HEW V 4 01 or later is in use 345 2CENESAS 1 List of Menus 1 6 List of Debug Menu Menu Debug Menu Option Debug Sessions Debug Settings Reset CPU Go Reset Go Go to Cursor Set PC to Cursor Run Display PC Step In Step Over Step Out Step Step Auto Mode Assembly Source Halt Program Initialize Connect 2 Disconnect 2 Save Memory Verify Memory 2 Download Modules Unload Modules Keyboard Toolbar Button Recording 1 Shortcuts F5 SHIFT F5 CTRL SHIFT Y F11 F10 SHIFT F11 Bij BII Bie FC Macro Function Opens the Debug Sessions dialog box to list add or remove the debug session Opens the Debug Settings dialog box to set the debugging conditions or download modules Resets the microprocessor Starts executing the user program at the current PC Executes the user program from the reset vector address Starts executing the user program at the current PC and continues until the PC equ
486. te dialog box is displayed 2 Select the test suite file Then click Select The test suite is loaded This then enables a number of other items on the Test menu and opens the test suite contents in the Test tab of the workspace window When test suites are opened the filename of the suite is added to the Recently used test suite list on the File menu This allows access to open your test suites after the initial Open test Suite menu operation To close a test suite Select the Test gt Close Test Suite menu option Once clicked the current test suite is closed and all items are removed from the workspace tab There are TCL command line commands for these operations that can be used via the command line window These commands are named open test suite and close test suite You can also close a test suite from the workspace window pop up menu 16 3 Editing a test suite Once your test suite has been created the next step is to add some tests This operation allows you to access the Modify Test Suite dialog box and will allow you to add tests which will then be executable 220 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility To edit a test suite 1 Select the Test gt Edit Test Suite menu option The Modify Test Suite dialog box is displayed Modify Test Suite Test cases Ok Ui Cancel Add Moditp Remove i The Modify Test Suite dialog box displays the currently define
487. ted the window contents are appended to the existing file and if it is not selected the existing file 1s overwritten 334 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger h Opening a Memory window The contents of the memory area to which the selected variable is assigned can be displayed in the Memory window Choosing Go To Memory from the pop up menu opens the Memory window i Specifying realtime update The R mark shown to the left of each variable indicates whether the variable is updated in real time A pop up menu containing the following options is available in the Watch window Auto Update Marks the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real time Auto Update All Marks all variables with bold Rs and updates all variables in real time Delete Auto Update Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels realtime update Delete Auto Update All Marks all variables with outlined Rs and cancels real time update j Recording the history of updating of values The history of updating of the values of watched items to which automatic update has been applied can be recorded into a file To start recording the history of updating of values 1 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu 2 Select Record Update Value and then Start Recording from submenus 3 The Recording Settings dialog box opens Record Settings F Recording Sheet OK Watch Cancel File name Doo gt Browse A
488. tents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons 2CENESAS 1 Overview The Build tab also shows an icon corresponding to the error message output by build execution Icon Name Icon Error Message Level Build Error Cy Error Build Warning fig Warning Information Ty Information Debug tab Shows the output from any debugger process Any debug component that needs to display information will send its output to this window Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Options Toolbar button Function Clear Window E Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Find in Files tab Shows the results of the last Find in Files action To activate find in files select the Edit gt Find in Files menu option or click the Find In Files toolbar button For further details on using Find in Files see section 4 4 2 Finding text in multiple files Right clicking displays a pop up
489. ter Comment dialog box You may specify a comment for each file or 1f you would like to specify the same comment for all files check the Apply comment to all files checkbox before clicking the OK button 8 5 Executable return code While each version control command executes its output is redirected to the Version Control tab of the output window When the command s execution is complete its return code is obtained When defining a command you can determine whether this return code can be used to indicate that the command failed and that the remaining commands should not be executed 1 e abort The controls contained in the Executable return code group allow you to specify this behavior 137 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System If the return code of the commands can be used to indicate a failure then you should select the Command has failed if the return code is option and set the drop down list and edit box as required If the Command has failed if the return code is option is selected then the HEW will check the return code of each command to determine whether a failure occurred If this is the case no further commands will be executed and any other processes which would follow the commands e g build will not be executed If the Return code of tool is not meaningful option is selected then the HEW will not check the return code of each command Consequently all commands will execute regardless 8 6 Specifyin
490. ter each test The Automatically save test results check box allows you to automatically save the results of each test execution to a text file in the same directory as the test suite The filename used is made up from the current test suite and the date of time of the test execution The Stop at first failure will stop the automated test execution when the first test failure is met This avoids running many tests when perhaps the first test causes all others to fail anyway The Test time out is for use when you may be executing user code In some cases if there is a bug the code many execute and never finish during the tests execution If any one test takes longer than the number of seconds in this box the test is terminated and is flagged as a failure You can also run test from the workspace window pop up menu 235 2CENESAS 16 Using the Test Support Facility 16 9 Using the test browser The test browser displays the results of the last test execution The test browser can be easily opened by selecting the Test gt Test Results Browser menu option ig J Test Name Description Result ie Tes_Demo Demonstration FAIL 0 ef Component Result Details a CPU Mernon SimSessionSH 4 FAIL Failed in memory range Ue 0000000 Os F000002 a Spmbol Wratch SimsessionSH 4 FAIL Symbol data i not matching A CPU 10 SimSessionSH 4 SUCCESS D The top pane of the test browser lists all of the tests that were executed duri
491. that of Stop Macro consists one macro and one HEW macro file can record multiple macros a set of HEW command line commands A macro includes multiple HEW command line commands HEY Macro File Record Macro gt hacro Operations Start Reset CPU Et reset Step In step 0z Stop Macro DO gt fMacro Operations End Enter macro name Record Macro gt hacro Build Start Build gt build wait stop Macro D gt acro Build End Enter a macro name The current records of macros are shown in the Macro tab of the Output window The Build macro in the figure above is outputted as follows Record Macro Recording Build R4 Ibuild wait Stop Macro Finished recording Build Enter a macro name o gt A Build A Debug Find in Files Macro See section 1 13 1 Example of test procedures for an operation procedure e Test support facility The test support facility allows you to create a test image file of the selected test 1tems test image data execute a macro created by the macro recording support facility or an existing HEW command batch file and compare a test image file with the current HEW system Test image data can be saved into a test image file HIF Note however that HEW is not capable of acquiring test image information of all functions in the HEW system For the items from which test image information can be acquired see section 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image
492. the Tools gt Version Control gt Get from VCS menu option will have exactly the same effect as clicking the Get from VCS toolbar button As the toolbar buttons themselves are fixed the only operation that you can perform upon them is to define which commands should be executed when they are clicked In order to invoke commands from the toolbar or the system defined options of the Tools gt Version Control sub menu you must first define the associated commands that should be executed when they are activated The names of the options and their intended action are listed Option Description Add to VCS Add selected files to version control system Remove from VCS Remove selected files from version control system Get from VCS Get a read only local copy of the selected files from version control system Check out from VCS Get a writable local copy of the selected files from version control system Check in to VCS Put back i e update the selected files in version control system with the local copy Get VCS status View the status of the selected files 134 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System To define a command to be executed via the system menu or toolbar button l 8 1 2 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed Select a menu option in which you wish to define a command from System menu options and toolbar buttons list and click the Modi
493. the Disassembly view the HEW cannot detect the change For example if you use the external flash utility to program the range of memory being displayed the Disassembly view will not be reflected 274 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Right click on the Disassembly filed in disassembly mode and select Refresh This acquires the latest information of the data being displayed and updates the contents of the view 4 Disassembly lock refresh It 1s possible to lock a memory range in the disassembly view so that it does not refresh This function is called the disassembly lock refresh Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode and select Lock Refresh The Lock Refresh dialog box will be displayed Lock Refresh ki Locked o Start Address Joooo2000 Cancel End Address 00002014 Check the Locked check box The controls should now enable Select the start and end address that should be locked and cached so that no updates are displayed Click OK The view refreshes to only show the locked area 5 Looking at a specific address When you are looking at your program in a Disassembly view you may want to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode and select the Set Address option The Set Address dialog box will be displayed Set Ad
494. the Projects tab or an entry in the Navigation tab is double clicked in the workspace window By default the external editor is selected e Output window double click When an error or warning in the Build tab or an entry in the Find in Files tab is double clicked in the output window By default the external editor is selected 125 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment e Drag and drop file into HEW main window When a file is dragged from the Windows Explorer and dropped into the HEW window note that however a drag and drop of a file onto the current project and user folder into the Projects tab of the workspace window only adds this file to the project and does not open the file By default the internal editor 1s selected 8 Click the OK button When the Use external editor checkbox 1s selected the following actions always select the external editor for use e Clicking the Edit Code button in the Breakpoints dialog box opened by selecting Edit gt Source Breakpoints menu e Selecting the File gt Recent Files menu If you select a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window and right click to display a pop up menu the Open lt file name gt in external editor menu is available under the Open lt file name gt menu Note When using an external editor be aware of the following issues e Each time you invoke the external editor in whichever way a separate instance of the editor will be launched e
495. the data length Select the data length from the followings in the pop up menu Data Length of the memory window Either the following can be specified lbyte Display in 1 byte units default 2bytes Display in 2 bytes units Abytes Display in 4 bytes units Sbytes Display in 8 bytes units 17 3 18 Changing the radix Select the data radix from the followings in the pop up menu Radix of the memory window Either the following can be specified Hex Dec Signed Dec Oct Bin Display in hexadecimal default Display in decimal Display in signed decimal Display in octal Display in binary 17 3 19 Changing the code Select the code from the followings in the pop up menu Code of the memory window Either the following can be specified ASCII Displaying memory as ASCII characters default SJISJISUNICODE EUC Not support Float Double 16bit Fixed 32bit Fixed 24bit Accum 40bit Accum Displaying memory as single precision floating point Displaying memory as double precision floating point Displaying memory as 16bit fixed Displaying memory as 32bit fixed Displaying memory as 24bit accumulate Displaying memory as 40bit accumulate 293 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 3 20 Setting the layout Select the layout from the followings in the pop up menu Layout of the memory window The followings can be selected Label Switch display or non display of label Register Switch display or non display
496. the other HEW windows or outside the HEW main window Figure 1 below shows a docked Workspace window and figure 11 below shows a floating Workspace window E T Tutorial El Ta Tutorial El ese source file a a Assembly source file 5r intpresrc alk E intpre sre B vecttblerc 2 vecttblerc vhandler src ion A vhandlerere 2 1 G source file Sion CG source file i ne 4 dbsct c SE E resetpre c nec brke O Projects Navigation When the Workspace window or the Output window is docked it has a control bar as shown below If you want to move a docked window click and drag its control bar to the new location Close Button Er Control bar To dock the Workspace window or the Output window 1 Ensure that the Allow Docking option is checked on the window s pop up menu 2 Select one of the following operations e Double click on the title bar of a floating window OR e Drag the title bar of a floating window and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar or toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the windows To float the Workspace window or the Output window 1 Ensure that the Allow Docking option is checked on the window s pop up menu 2CENESAS 1 Overview 2 Select one of the following operations e Double click on the control bar of a docked window OR e Drag the control bar of a docked window and draw it away from the edge of
497. the pop up menu Display Address ey Address ovo0o000 al Specify the displaying address in the Address field Drag and Drop Manipulation Operation Select address on Memory Window s Address area and drop it Changes the window s display start address to that address into another Memory Window s Address area Select address text string on Disassembly Window s Address Changes the window s display start address to that address area and drop it into Memory Window s Address area Select variable name text string and drop it into Memory Changes the window s display start address to that address Window s Address area 17 3 11 Changing the scroll area Select the Scroll Area menu from the pop up menu of the memory window The Scroll Area dialog box is displayed 291 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Scroll Area Ei Start Address ooo0o0 al End Address OFFFFF Cancel al Specify the scroll range to be displayed By default the scroll range is set to 0 to the maximum address of MCU 17 3 12 Starting address to value of the register Select the register from the followings in the pop up menu Register of the memory window Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 3 13 Tracking the stack pointer position The memory window has a function that alters the display address while tracking the stack pointer position By default the display does not track the stack pointer posi
498. the previous build i e out of date files are marked in the workspace window In the window below the file demo c is out of date When you click Build next time these files will be re built This is also displayed for dependent projects of the current project The view of these files 1s updated whenever something that affects the build occurs e g options changing file addition dependencies changing files modified etc 52 2CENESAS 2 Build Basics Workspace OOOO By demo Sel como ca Assembly source file Intpre src lly larc E vecttbl sre 2 vhandler sre AS C source tile oe E dbscte 3 ab de mo c a 6 lowerc c a 4 resetpre c e 6 brke To display out of date files in the workspace window l 2 3 4 Click on the Setup gt Options menu item Select the Build tab Check the Mark out of date files check box Click OK oP oy Command line Initial directory Environment 2 9 File dependencies A typical project will contain dependencies between files For example a C file may include one or more header files In complex projects source files will include or depend upon others and this can quickly become difficult to manage However the HEW provides a dependency scanning mechanism whereby all files in a project are checked for dependencies Once complete the Projects tab of the Workspace window will display an up to date list with all the project file de
499. then the c extension will be in the C source file group and will be used as input to the compiler phase Additionally the HEW allows you to define your own extensions For example if the project you are developing uses assembler source files the default extension may be src If you would like to use a different extension instead of src e g asm then you can define a new extension and request that the HEW treats it in the same way as a src file File extensions and file groups can be viewed and modified via the File Extensions dialog box which is invoked by selecting the Project gt File Extensions menu option This dialog box displays all the extensions and file groups that are defined within the current workspace File Extensions Group Gosolute tile Assembly include file Assembly list tile Assembly source file Hesembly source file Remove Assembly source file Binary file Open with C header file list file source file header file itt liet file The File Extensions list is divided into two columns On the left are the file extensions and on the right are the file groups associated with the extensions Many file extensions can belong to the same group For example assembler source files may have several extensions in a single project e g src asm mar etc Assembler source files T source files Library files 2 5 1 Associating an application with a file group In addition to opening
500. this project CPU Series CFU Type SH7 750R SH7751 SH7751R SH7760 gt IF there is no CPU type to be selected select the CPU Type that a similar to hardware specification or select Uther lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 1 Select the CPU and Toolchain version in Step 1 The CPU types CPU Type are classified according to the CPU series CPU Series Select the CPU corresponding to the program to be developed because the generation file differs according to the CPU Series and CPU Type settings If there is no corresponding CPU select a CPU with similar hardware specifications or Other The following buttons at the bottom of the dialog box are the same as those in the New Project wizard dialog box Next gt Moves to the next display lt Back Returns to the previous display Finish Opens the Summary dialog box selections followed by this button are default Cancel Returns to the New Project Workspace dialog box To move to Step 2 click the Next gt button in Step 1 241 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Hew Project 2 9 Option Setting Specify global options Endiars FPL Round Denorrnalized number allower as a result C Position independent code FIC Treat double as float Use try throw and catch of C JEnable digable runtime type information Bit field s members are allocated from the low Pack struct union and class gt z Back
501. ties for Click the Properties button The properties dialog is displayed 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 4 Click the Read only checkbox This makes the link read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to be modified accidentally 5 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box 6 Saving session information To save a session Select the File gt Save Session menu item If you have the Prompt before saving session checkbox checked a dialog box 1s displayed which asks you whether you wish to save the information Clicking No loses the changes you made in the session This checkbox is located in the Setup gt Options dialog box on the Workspace tab To save a session with a different name 1 Choose the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Select the session you would like to save Click the Save as button The Save Session dialog box is displayed Browse to the new file location ge If you only want to export the session file to another location then leave the Maintain link checkbox unchecked If you would like HEW to use this location instead of the current session location then check the Maintain link checkbox 6 Click the OK button To save a session with a different name using File gt Save Sessions As 1 Choose the File gt Save Sessions As menu option The Session Name dialog box is displ
502. time change the variable s value Delete x Removes the variable indicated by the text cursor from the Watch window Delete All F Removes all the variables from the Watch window R Auto Update All w Marks all variables with bold Rs and updates all variables in real time Delete Auto Update ee Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels realtime update Delete Auto Update All CI Marks all variables with outlined Rs and cancels realtime update Record Start Recording p i Opens the Recording Settings dialog box and starts Update recording the history of updating of values Value Stop Recording pE i Stops recording the history of updating of values Add Watch EH CI Launches the Add Watch dialog box allowing the user to enter a variable or expression to be watched Edit Value el Launches the Edit Watch dialog box allowing the user to Radix Hexadecimal lb CI Display in hexadecimal Decimal Qs Display in decimal Octal isplay in octal Binary B Cisplay inbinary Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Save As mj Saves the currently displayed contents Go To Memory ai Opens a Memory window for the address Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons b Adding a watch item Use the Add Watch dialog box in the Watch window to add Watch items to the Watch window To use Add Watch from a Watch window 1
503. tinues compilation of the other files and stops the build after finishing the whole compiler phase iii When the number of errors in one execution of a tool exceeds the specified number the number of error messages displayed on the Output window is the specified number plus one A message saying that the number of error has exceeded the specified number is NOT displayed on the Output window The same things as Stop build if the number of errors exceeds shown above hold also in Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds There is no correlation between Stop build if the number of errors exceeds and Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds They are independent 3 6 Logging build output The HEW allows you to write the results of each build to file To specify a log file 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Customize dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Log tab 3 Select the Generate build log checkbox 4 Enter the full path of the log file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button or click the placeholder button ay and select the placeholder from the pop up menu 5 Click the OK button to confirm the new log file settings MW Generate build log Path stwORKs PORE ORES PAAME log Browse 74 2CENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features 3 7 Changing toolchain version If two or more versions of the same toolchain are registered in the HEW you
504. tion To track the stack pointer position choose Followed Stack Pointer option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Followed Stack Pointer dialog box is displayed Followed Stack Pointer Ed E3 Yot Follow da Stack Pointer Select the stack pointer to track from the drop down list box The Memory Window has its display addresses automatically altered by tracking the selected stack pointer position Selecting Not Following in the Followed Stack Pointer dialog box causes the debugger to stop tracking the stack pointer position Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 17 3 14 Changing the program display position immediately after downloading To specify the source file position select Set Start Up Symbol option from pop up menu of the memory window The Set start up symbol dialog box is displayed Set start up symbol Ft x main rea Input start up symbol to drop down list box 292 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger 17 3 15 Updating the window contents The Memory window contents can be forcibly updated Selecting the Refresh from the pop up menu of the memory window 17 3 16 Disabling update of the window contents Automatic update of the Memory window contents which is performed when user program execution stops and in other cases can be disabled The Memory window will be grayed Selecting the Lock Refresh from the pop up menu of the memory window 17 3 17 Changing
505. tion of files while debugging 1 Select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Selecting the Do not allow file editing when target is connected checkbox prevents modification of files while the HEW is connected to a debugging platform In other words if the HEW is not connected to a debugging platform files can be modified By default this checkbox is not selected 4 Click OK 99 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 15 Managing the editor columns The editor in HEW has the ability to manage columns apart from the main editor column These can be added and used by any component in the HEW system Examples of this functionality might include a hardware breakpoint column added by the target or possibly an address information column added by the debugger The global column states feature is also accessible from the main edit menu To switch off a column in all source files l Select one of the following operations to display the Global Editor Column States dialog box Select the Edit gt Define Column Format menu option OR Right click in the editor window and select Define Column Format from the pop up menu Global Editor Column States Line Number SAW Breakpoints WS Aw Breakponts ASM Cancel Source Address If the column s checkbox is checked then the column is enabled if the column s checkbox is gray then this means that the column is enabled in some files
506. to see if the module is enabled or not Each register name must be defined in the section and the numbering of each register must be sequential The dependency is entered in the section as dep lt reg gt lt bit gt lt value gt 1 lt reg gt is the register id of the dependency 2 lt bit gt is the bit position within the register 3 lt value gt is the value that the bit must be for the module to be enabled The Register definition entry is entered in the format id lt name gt lt address gt lt size gt lt absolute gt lt format gt lt bitfields gt 1 lt name gt register name to be displayed 2 lt address gt address of the register 3 lt size gt which may be B W or L for byte word or long word default is byte 4 lt absolute gt which can be set to A if the register is at an absolute address This is only relevant if the I O area address range moves about on the CPU in different modes In this case if a register is defined as absolute the base address offset calculation is not performed and the specified address is used directly 5 lt format gt Format for register output Valid values are H for Hexadecimal D for decimal and B for binary 6 lt bitfields gt section defining the bits within the register Bitfield sections define the bits within a register each entry is of the type bit lt no gt lt name gt 1 lt no gt is the bit number 2 lt name gt is a symbolic name of the bit 66 99
507. tons Current toolbar buttons Compare files ir bel gnore white space L dA Find __Lancel_ ee Find next occurence of searc Reset ry Find previous occurence of se t Find previous difference 4 Find nest difference Separator Mave Up i Mare bawn This dialog box allows you to modify the displayed buttons and change the ordering The list on the left named Available toolbar buttons displays all toolbar buttons not currently in use on the toolbar The list named Current toolbar buttons displays all of the toolbars currently added to the components toolbar To add the currently selected buttons to a toolbar 1 Select the toolbar button you wish to add from the Available toolbar buttons list 2 Press the Add button 3 Click OK To move the currently selected buttons 1 Select the toolbar you wish to move in the Current toolbar buttons list 2 Click Move Up or Move Down until it is in the desired position 3 Click OK To remove the currently selected buttons from a toolbar 1 Select the toolbar button you wish to remove from the Current toolbar buttons list 2 Press the Remove button The toolbar is added to the Available toolbar buttons list 3 Click OK 372 2CENESAS 12 To Build in Toolchain for HEW1 x 12 To Build in Toolchain for HEW1 x When a project created in HEW1 x is used without upgrading to new toolchain that has been registered in HEW2 x onwards the toolchain for the old versi
508. tro of trowel and the ty o of sporty orange but not smart orange because the character does not match across a new line This character matches the newline character n would be used to search for line endings or in patterns that cross line boundaries Example 1 n matches every occurrence of a newline following a semicolon Example 2 nif searches for a semicolon a new line and a line beginning with if This character matches the tab character Example 1 t8 Finds every occurrence of a tab character followed by an 8 Example 2 init t Finds every occurrence of a tab character following init This matches any one character or a range of single characters listed within the brackets Brackets cannot be nested specifies a range of characters e g a z or 0 9 The beginning character in the range must have a lower ASCII value than the ending character of the range matches a single character if it is not any one of the characters between and This pattern also matches newline characters unless the newline character is included within the brackets Example 1 AEIOU Finds every uppercase vowel Example 2 lt gt Finds a literal lt gt or Example 3 A Za z0 9_ Matches an upper or lowercase letter a digit or an underscore Example 4 0 9 Matches any character except a digit Example 5 t n Matches a space a tab or newline Example 6 Matches a literal
509. tton 11 The Test Demo test icon appears under the Suite test suite icon Z zl ass dute Demo TA Project Templates al Navigator 1 13 7 Step 6 Creating a test image file To compare the Memory content at the address of an array or the contents of the Watch window the range of data acquisition must be selected The test image of a test item is saved to the test image file Test Suite Demo Test Demo hif specified at step 5 1 Right click on the Test Suite Demo test suite icon to display a pop up menu 2 Select Edit Test Image File to invoke the Edit Test Image File dialog box The title of the dialog box includes the test name Demo and test image file name Test hif Select the checkboxes Memory under CPU in Item and Watch under Symbol 3 Select the checkboxes Memory xxxxxx under CPU in Available components and Watch XXxxxx under Symbol Edit Test Image File Test_Demo Test_Suite Demo Test Demo Ei Ea Available components JE StackTrace SimSessionSH 4 DE Trace SimSessionSH 4 Cancel De ay 10 SimSessionSH 4 GE Memor SimsessionsH 4 Check All C Register SimS essionSH 4 HE Simulated 1 0 SinSessionSH 4 a Status SimSessians H 4 Settings gA Output OP Build Output Window Import gA Debug Output Wwindow 5SimSessionS H 4 mS SH S Seela SimS essians H 4 fatch SimS essianSH E 4 Double click Memory xxxxxx under CPU
510. tus bar The status bar displays information about the current state of the HEW The figure below shows the status bar Displays HEW status messages Virtual desktop Line number Lines lngertion Oyvenaite mode GUI command description Mum Lock Attributes Column number Caps Lock Ready EEs Defaultt desktop Read write 62 87 4 INS NUM Fl 1 3 Help system The Help menu is the rightmost menu on the High performance Embedded Workshop menu bar It contains the Help Topics menu option which when selected takes you to the main High performance Embedded Workshop help window To obtain help on specific dialogs click the context sensitive help button which is located in the top right hand corner of each dialog as shown in the figure below Contest Senskive Help Suton B Close Button When this is clicked the mouse pointer will change to a pointer with a question mark above it Whilst the mouse pointer is in this state click on the part of the dialog that you require assistance on Alternatively select the control for which you require help and press the F1 key 1 4 Launching the HEW To initiate the HEW open the Start menu of Windows select Programs select RENESAS select High performance Embedded Workshop and then select the shortcut of the HEW The Welcome dialog box shown will be displayed after the start up screen by default 11 2CENESAS 1 Overview Welcome ki Options b e Create a new project wor
511. u to invoke a version control command either by selecting an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button When either of these actions are performed the associated commands are executed and the output is displayed in the Version Control tab of the output window To execute a command by a version control menu option or toolbar button 1 Select the items to which you want to apply the version control command from the Projects tab of the workspace window This may include a workspace projects folders and files Right click to invoke a pop up menu You can select a menu option you have defined from the Version Control submenu A command associated with this menu option will be executed on the files contained in the workspace project or folder or file itself selected in the workspace window 2 For example if you select the workspace icon all of the files in all of the projects will be passed to the version control command this will include any HEW system files 3 Select the required menu option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or click the desired version control toolbar button The custom version control support allows you the highest degree of flexibility in specifying how a version control system is to be used To configure it select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box will be displayed 133 2CENESAS
512. ual To move to Step 7 click the Next gt button in Step 6 245 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Hew Project 9 Setting the Target System for Debugging SH 4 Functional Simulator SH 4 Functional SimulatorfLittle endian y ri PUETI ss geld deadbeat SH 4 Simulator Litthe endian SH 4 with BSC Simulator SH 4 with BSC Simulator Litthe endian SH 4 SH 750R Functional Simulator SH 4 SH FF S0R Functional Sirulator Lit SH 4 SH50R Simulator SH 4 SH F50R Simulator Litthe endian Bl Target type 5H 4 Back Next gt AT pence 7 Specify the debugger targets in Step 7 Targets Sets the debugger targets Select by checking the debugger targets No selection or a selection of more than one target is possible Target Type Specifies the type of the targets displayed in Targets Note The endian type selected in step 2 will be applied to the compiler settings This is separate from the endian type of the debugger target selected in step 7 To move to Step 8 click the Next gt button in Step 7 246 CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Hew Project 9 Setting the Debugger Options Target name SH 4 Simulator Configuration name SimDebug_SH 4 Detail options Simulator I O disable Simulator I O addr Ox Bus mode 0 falar TER ne AT pence 8 Set the options for the debugger targets selected in Step 8 Configuration nam
513. unction Filter by functions Data Filter by data symbols Entry Filter by positions to start execution None Filter by other symbols such as labels Scope scope attribute Global Filter by global symbols Normal Filter by local symbols Section sections containing symbols Section name Filter by section names File files containing symbols File name Filter by file names 7 Clicking the Set All button selects the check boxes of all filtering conditions 8 Clicking the Clear All button de selects the check boxes of all filtering conditions 9 Click OK Symbol information of the linkage editor shown in the right pane is filtered by the selected condition For further filtering by combining a different condition select another column and then select a filtering condition in the column To disable filtering de select the Enable Filter checkbox in the Filter Symbol dialog box 13 2 5 Viewing the source code for the address The source file for the address in the selected line will be opened in the editor window To view the source code for the address Select one of the following operations e Right click on the symbol list line in the right pane to open a pop up menu Then select View Source OR e Double click on the symbol list line in the right pane 13 2 6 Printing out the symbol information You can also print out the symbol information in the right pane To print out the symbol information 1 Right click within the right pane to
514. urrent contents of the memory will be overwritten YOUR PROGRAM OR DATA WILL BE ERASED 17 3 8 Saving memory contents in a text file You can save an area of memory in the address space to a text file using the Save Memory Contents feature Select an address range to save in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Save Memory contents option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Save memory contents dialog box is displayed Select the output range in Memory Save Area data format in Data Length number of digits in Column radix in Radix and code in Code It is possible to select showing hiding of the label display area and register display area by Output the label column and Output the register column respectively If you did not drag the address range to be saved you must enter the output range Save memory contents Ei x Save irr SH 4derna d ft ze i Sim ebug_SH 4 Readme txt File name oo Save as Ippe TextFiles tt H Cancel blemon Save Area fooono000 foooooorF Gal Data Length Mbyte Column ie R adis Hex Code lasch M Output the label column M Output the register column 2 17 3 9 Finding a value in memory You can find a value in memory using the Search Memory feature Select an address range to search in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Search option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Search memory dialog box is displayed
515. vansesaanswe ieatnsadatonsceseannatoateronasdeatnaasiadananadasascobonmeactenaneacans 61 3 1 The build process revisited aciscscaciceisconsinasesndmcasdonsandsnsatsieesanaisdieannnsdwedstasavabassiesassadeeiaenageansonkonewesas 6l 3 1 1 OV VU Seo TOU ariecser nis E E E E E A AE E E E EEA vest E E E 6l 3 2 Creatine a custom build PHASE vs ij cesiccsnsscdncamencannninnsqncgiusicancnmedyaongmanusindsedewoatsanaawndeaudeeaceeeernad seed 62 3 3 Ordering build phases cc cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesssseseeeeseseeeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 66 3 3 1 Build Order ta Disses EE N a 66 3 3 2 Badd File Order ia Dessrscrnr pe r E E 69 3 3 3 Ede Mappings taoenna e E a soso 69 3 4 Setting custom build phase options ccccccccccccccceccesssssesessssessssssssssssessssssesssssssnsssessessessseens 71 3 4 1 G6 a a a P E T T T ee T E ar eee 71 3 4 2 eT eS nii E E E E EE T 72 3 4 3 Dependent Files TaD enese E E NE 12 3 5 COO MIS he DU eccorrisieiia esaa AAE AE 73 30 Lopgine Duild onip sessies A 74 3 7 Changing toolchain Versio sg paestacacsanactta donsticrejesceatesan sian NEEN NEEE ENET eee 75 3 8 Goneratino a make Mle sssisesisriroriirisoni iri or r EE NE AAEN ERA A T 75 3 9 Using a makefile inside the HEW System ccccccccccesesesseseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 77 2CENESAS Table Of Contents 3 10 Customizing the HEW linkage Order ccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeEeEE EE
516. w shows the Standard toolbar when it is docked and also when it is floating on Control bar Docked Toolbar Standard Fal Floating Toolbar To dock a toolbar Select one of the following operations e Double click on the title bar of a floating toolbar OR e Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating bar changes 2CENESAS 1 Overview To float a toolbar Select one of the following operations e Double click on the control bar of a docked toolbar OR Drag the control bar of a docked toolbar and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main J frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbars 1 2 4 Workspace window The Workspace window has four panes Projects Templates Navigation and Test tab Ey E Tutorial A Assembly source file Intpre src is vecttblerc vhandler src 3 oa resetpre c i Ey sbrk c Projects tab e Projects Templates Templates tab Navigation tab Test tab e Projects tab Allows you to show the current workspace projects and files You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its icon See section 2 2 Configuring the Projects tab of the Workspace window for more information on the Projects tab e Templates tab Allo
517. w Test Ed Test name IT est Dera Test descriptions Cancel uh Demonstration Tests to execute File Path Demo Default ra T 2 Hemose Mave tatap Mave up Mare danm Mare ta batan Test image file E SHE W Workspace DemoSH44 Test Suite Derno_ Test Derma hit Browse ALE To add a new test you should setup the following data l A 10 11 222 Enter the test name There can be no spaces in this name Enter the test description This should describe the test in a verbose way so you will understand it at a later date To setup the actual tests to execute you should click the Add button The Add New Test Script dialog box is displayed See below The Script type box allows you to select a HEW macro HEW macro or a HEW command line batch file TCL command line batch file Selecting HEW Macro in the Script type drop down list shows all of the registered macros in the Select macros to add to test list You can select multiple macro files to be executed for each test This is achieved by selecting the checkbox next to the macro names you wish to use Selecting TCL command line batch file in the drop down list changes the Add Test Script dialog box so you can define the file to execute when the test is executed Clicking OK stores the results and adds it to the Add New Test dialog box Finally you must set the Debug system for test image comparison file This fi
518. w and not just project source files Any source file opened in the disassembly window is read only and cannot be edited it is only intended for the viewing and debugging of source files This view is only available when the module is downloaded Window configuration View med mode View Sauce Sl View Disassembly a Disassembly DemoSH4_c Miel x Column Source Address SAW eee e header 22 00002000 long min mnax long j eE ine I oo002z006 printe Data 29 00002014 for i 0 ae WA Line Humber column SAW Breakpoints column Source Source Address column e Clicking another toolbar button switches the display mode To view disassembly codes in mixed mode click the View mixed mode button To view disassembly codes in disassembly mode click the View Disassembly button e The columns listed in the table below are on the left of the Source field Column Name Description Line Displays the line number for the source file Source Address After your program has been downloaded the source view displays S W the addresses for the current source file Breakpoints Display the PC location 5 and breakpoints Setting PC breakpoint by double click e The Source field includes codes highlighting the syntax 278 2CENESAS 17 Using the Debugger Option Right clicking within the Source field opens a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Macro
519. w slmbol reterence 4reference nooptimize Note If a subcommand file is specified as shown below the section setting information of the linkage editor will not be shown in the Map Section Information window C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU _4 Category Subcommand file M Use external subcommand file Subcommand file path s COMFI GDIR ISAlet sub Options LinkLibrary sUbocom mand LONFIGDIA S AleT sub 13 1 Managing section settings You can add modify or delete information on sections on the GUI through the Map Section Information window It is also easy to check the section settings after modification 13 1 1 Opening the Map Section Information window To open the Map Section Information window 1 Select one of the following operations e Click the Map toolbar button tu OR e Select View gt Map 2 The Select Map Window Type dialog box opens Select Map Section Information in the Map drop down list 188 2CENESAS Window configuration 13 Map Map Section Information a Toolbar Address saa A0000000 verton Go RSTHandler group Sub section group Overlay group Section eas eg 00000800 Gg INTHandler VECTTEL Aga 00001000 RG PResetPRe Aga 00002000 EMG P C C BSEC C DSEC 1 4G PC C BSEC C DSE Wo 2 El S l manker section setting Name _ st afena a sie ol Wa PoverlayPRG Aga 7000000
520. w workspace 1 Select the Create a new project workspace option from the Welcome dialog box and click the OK button or select File gt New Workspace The New Project Workspace dialog box will be displayed 2 Enter the name of the new workspace into the Workspace Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character Especially do not use a minus sign or a space As you enter the workspace name the HEW will add a sub directory and Project Name for you automatically This can be changed if desired This allows the workspace and project name to be different To select the directory in which you would like to create the workspace use the Browse button or type the directory into the Directory field manually 3 Select the CPU family and Tool chain upon which you would like to base the workspace Note that these cannot be changed once the workspace has been created 4 When anew workspace is created the HEW will also automatically create a project with the name specified in the Project Name field and place it inside the new workspace The project types list displays all of the available project types e g Application Library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list The project types displayed will be all valid types for the current pair of CPU family and Tool chain The project types are classified in three classes toolchain only debug only Debugger o
521. will be displayed 2 Click the Import button An Import a Version Control configuration dialog box will be displayed Browse to the HVC file that you would like to import 4 Select the file and then click the Import button 131 2CENESAS 7 Version Control 132 CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 8 Using the Custom Version Control System If you have selected Custom VCS as the version control system in section 7 1 Select a Version Control System the following definitions are necessary for connection of the HEW and Custom VCS e Version control menu options and locations of the associated command executables EXE command parameters how to control the execution result of version control commands etc e Locations of files for version control directory mapping and global variables e Execution control of version control commands user settings and other general options After defining this information you can execute a command of the custom version control system by selecting a HEW menu option or toolbar button and view the result in the HEW For installation and setting of the version control system refer to the user s manual for respective version control systems For details on operations of the HEW with the custom version control system see section 8 11 Usage example of the Custom Version Control System 8 1 Defining Version Control menu options The custom version control system allows yo
522. ws Firewall in the Network and Internet Connections The Windows Firewall dialog box is invoked Click the Exceptions tab Click the Add Program button to open the Add a Program dialog box Click the Browse button and select Hew2 exe under the HEW installation directory Click the OK button and close the Add a Program dialog box Click the Add Port button to open the Add a Port dialog box Enter DCOM in Name and 135 in Port Number and select TCP option button Click the OK button and close the Add a Port dialog box Click the OK button in the Windows Firewall dialog box Close the Network and Internet Connections Close the Control Panel 10 2 Enabling network facilities to share projects To use network facilities to share projects l 2 3 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box is displayed Select the Network tab Click the Enable network data access checkbox This should add an administrator to the system without a password The administrator is the only user that can add additional users to the system and change user access rights The administrator has the highest level of access Before leaving the network dialog the administrator must set their password It is not possible to leave this dialog box until this is completed This is described in the following section Close the Options dialog box 171 2CENESAS 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities 6 When the dialog box is closed you are asked
523. ws you to display template settings See section 4 11 Templates for more information about a template e Navigation tab J C Functions ven Sy abort yoid ven Sy maintveid sg Manual Reset oid a PowerON Reset oid ol sbrkisizet size a Projects Templates ad Havigation CENESAS 1 Overview Allows you to provide jumps to various textual constructs within your project s files What is actually displayed within the Navigation tab depends upon what components are currently installed The figure above shows C macro definitions C Defines and C functions C Functions conforming to the ANSI standard See Chapter 12 Navigation Facilities for more information about a navigation e Test tab Allows you to setup or view test suites as part of the test support facility See Chapter 16 Using the Test Support Facility for more information about the test support facility To allow the Workspace window or the Output window docking Right click anywhere inside the Workspace window or the Output window Then a pop up menu will be displayed vw Allow Docking If the Allow Docking option is checked docking is allowed Otherwise docking is not allowed Select the Allow Docking option to check or un check it When the Allow Docking option is checked you can dock a window toolbar or menu bar to the edge of the HEW main window or to the edge of another docked window You can also float them above
524. ws you to see what functions are available for the current object Selecting the function automatically enters the remaining parameters for you Pressing CTRL SHIFT SPACE opens this pop up window which is visible until a closing bracket is entered 185 2CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities class Sample p sam Posam new Samples p sam gt change l for i503 Tod chengeWone a fe F E i Jas alil J e Itis possible to select a C function define C class or member function in the pop up window and add it to the HEW editor window by either of the following ways Right click within the HEW editor window to display a pop up menu and select List Members A pop up window opens Select an item you wish to add and press ENTER OR Press CTRL SPACE to display a pop up window Select an item you wish to add and press ENTER 186 2CENESAS 13 Map 13 Map Among the section settings of the linkage editor and the contents of the linkage list file output by the linkage editor information on sections and symbols are respectively shown There are the following features Sections A tree view in the form of address section group section Assignment of sections can be changed by drag and drop You can add modify or delete addresses section groups and sections The source file for the address in the selected line can be opened in the editor window The contents can be printed out Symbols Lists al
525. y window will switch to source mode e Ifthe Disassembly window is open then when a break occurs no other editor windows are opened e When a break occurs the window order will not be changed automatically If you wish to continue step in Disassembly mode of the Disassembly window select the Debug gt Step mode gt Assembly 5 Viewing assembly language code The Disassembly mode shows at the current PC location You can view assembly language codes only when the debugging platform is connected to the session Window configuration a Disassembly aja DAM ASM Disassembly Address OOO02Z000 OOO0z002 OOO02004 VWew med mode View Source B View Disassembly Column header Disassembly Address column Label column SAW breakpoints ASM column Ob code column Disassembly e Clicking another toolbar button switches the display mode To view disassembly codes in mixed mode click the View mixed mode button To view source codes in source mode click the View Source button e The columns listed in the table below are on the left of the Disassembly field Column Name Description S W Breakpoints ASM Display the PC location 5 breakpoints Setting PC breakpoint by double click Disassembly Address Display the disassembly address Open the Set Address dialog box by double click Enter the address to jump to Obj code Display the object codes Label Display the Labels
526. yed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar button Macro Recording Function Refresh Updates the window contents Load IO File Manually load an IO file Mn Print Prints the contents currently displayed in the window Save To File Lt Saves the contents currently displayed in the window in a text file Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons 17 6 2 Expanding an I O register display To display the names addresses and values of the I O registers double click on the module name or select the module name by clicking on it or using the cursor keys and press the cursor right key The module display will expand to show the individual registers of that peripheral module and their names addresses and values Double clicking or pressing the cursor left key again on the module name will close the I O register display Note If you are using an emulator based debugging platform reading data from an I O register can sometimes affect the operation of your program For example reading a data register can cancel a pending interrupt Data is only read from I O modules that have been expanded in the IO window so that the register values are displayed Therefore as long as I O modules are collapsed when they no longer need to be displayed this will not cause a problem Also note that having a Memory window or Disassembly window open on the I O area can have t

High-performance Embedded Workshop V.4.03 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents